Subaru 2007 Forester 2 5X Owners Manual

2015-09-07

: Subaru Subaru-2007-Forester-2-5X-Owners-Manual-762948 subaru-2007-forester-2-5x-owners-manual-762948 subaru pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 356 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Foreword

Congratulations on choosing a SUBARU vehicle. This Owner’s

Manual has all the information necessary to keep your SUBARU in

excellent condition and to properly maintain the emission control

system for minimizing emission pollutants. We urge you to read

this manual carefully so that you may understand your vehicle and

its operation. For information not found in this Owner’s Manual,

such as details concerning repairs or adjustments, please contact

the dealer from whom you purchased your SUBARU or the nearest

SUBARU dealer.

The information, specifications and illustrations found in this man-

ual are those in effect at the time of printing. FUJI HEAVY INDUS-

TRIES LTD. reserves the right to change specifications and de-

signs at any time without prior notice and without incurring any ob-

ligation to make the same or similar changes on vehicles previous-

ly sold. This Owner’s Manual applies to all models and covers all

equipment, including factory installed options. Some explanations,

therefore may be for equipment not installed in your vehicle.

Please leave this manual in the vehicle at the time of resale. The

next owner will need the information found herein.

FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD., TOKYO, JAPAN

is a registered trademark of FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.

This manual describes the following vehicle types.

* The illustrated vehicle is one of the FORESTER series.

000135

–

CONTINUED

–

Warranties

Warranties for U.S.A.

All SUBARU vehicles distributed by

Subaru of America, Inc. and sold at retail

by an authorized SUBARU dealer in the

United States come with the following

warranties:

ySUBARU Limited Warranty

yEmission Control Systems Warranty

yEmissions Performance Warranty

All warranty information, including details

of coverage and exclusions, is in the

“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

Please read these warranties carefully.

Warranties for Canada

All SUBARU vehicles distributed by

Subaru Canada, Inc. and sold at retail by

an authorized SUBARU dealer in Canada

come with the following warranties:

ySUBARU Limited Warranty

yAnti-Corrosion Warranty

yEmission Control Warranty

All warranty information, including details

of coverage and exclusions, is in the War-

ranty and Service Booklet. Please read

these warranties carefully.

T2.5XT (Canada model only)

TAll models except Canada model

2.5XT

How to use this Owner’s

Manual

Using your Owner’s Manual

Before you operate your vehicle, carefully

read this manual. To protect yourself and

extend the service life of your vehicle, fol-

low the instructions in this manual. Failure

to observe these instructions may result in

serious injury and damage to your vehicle.

This manual is composed of fourteen

chapters. Each chapter begins with a brief

table of contents, so you can usually tell at

a glance if that chapter contains the infor-

mation you want.

Chapter 1: Seat, seatbelt and SRS air-

bags

This chapter informs you how to use the

seat and seatbelt and contains precau-

tions for the SRS airbags.

Chapter 2: Keys and doors

This chapter informs you how to operate

the keys, locks and windows.

Chapter 3: Instruments and controls

This chapter informs you about the opera-

tion of instrument panel indicators and

how to use the instruments and other

switches.

Chapter 4: Climate Control

This chapter informs you how to operate

2.5XT models are equipped with

High Intensity Discharge (HID) head-

lights that contain mercury. For that

reason, it is necessary to remove

HID headlights before vehicle dis-

posal. Once removed, please reuse,

recycle or dispose of the HID head-

lights as hazardous waste.

This vehicle does not contain mer-

cury devices or parts.

the climate control.

Chapter 5: Audio

This chapter informs you how to operate

your audio system.

Chapter 6: Interior equipment

This chapter informs you how to operate

interior equipment.

Chapter 7: Starting and operating

This chapter informs you how to start and

operate your SUBARU.

Chapter 8: Driving tips

This chapter informs you how to drive your

SUBARU in various conditions and ex-

plains some safety tips on driving.

Chapter 9: In case of emergency

This chapter informs you what to do if you

have a problem while driving, such as a

flat tire or engine overheating.

Chapter 10: Appearance care

This chapter informs you how to keep your

SUBARU looking good.

Chapter 11: Maintenance and service

This chapter informs you when you need

to take your SUBARU to the dealer for

scheduled maintenance and informs you

how to keep your SUBARU running prop-

erly.

Chapter 12: Specifications

This chapter informs you about dimension

and capacities of your SUBARU.

Chapter 13: Consumer information and

Reporting safety defects

This chapter informs you about Uniform

tire quality grading standards and Report-

ing safety defects.

Chapter 14: Index

This is an alphabetical listing of all that’s in

this manual. You can use it to quickly find

something you want to read.

Safety warnings

You will find a number of WARNINGs,

CAUTIONs and NOTEs in this manual.

These safety warnings alert you to poten-

tial hazards that could result in injury to

you or others.

Please read these safety warnings as well

as all other portions of this manual careful-

ly in order to gain a better understanding

of how to use your SUBARU vehicle safe-

ly.

NOTE

A NOTE gives information or sugges-

tions how to make better use of your

vehicle.

Safety symbol

You will find a circle with a slash through it

in this manual. This symbol means “Do

not”, “Do not do this”, or “Do not let this

happen”, depending upon the context.

A WARNING indicates a situation in

which serious injury or death could

result if the warning is ignored.

A CAUTION indicates a situation in

which injury or damage to your vehi-

cle, or both, could result if the cau-

tion is ignored.

000013

–

CONTINUED

–

Vehicle symbols

There are some of the symbols you may

see on your vehicle.

Mark Name

WARNING

CAUTION

Power door lock

Passenger’s windows lock

Fuel

Front fog lights

Parking lights

Hazard warning flasher

Engine hood

Seat heater

Child restraint top tether an-

chorages

Child restraint lower anchor-

ages

Horn

Windshield wiper deicer

Wiper intermittent

Windshield washer

Windshield wiper mist (for

single wipe)

Rear window wiper

Rear window washer

Lights

Mark Name

Parking lights, tail lights, li-

cense plate light and instru-

ment panel illumination

Head lights

Headlight beam leveler

Illumination brightness

Fan speed

Instrument panel outlets

Instrument panel outlets and

foot outlets

Foot outlets

Windshield defroster and

foot outlets

Windshield defroster

Outside mirror defogger

Mark Name

Safety precautions when

driving

Seatbelt and SRS airbag

Carefully read the sections “Seatbelts”

and “*SRS airbag (Supplemental Re-

straint System airbag)” in chapter 1 of this

Owner’s Manual for instructions and pre-

cautions concerning the seatbelt system

and SRS airbag system.

Rear window defogger

Air recirculation

Engine oil

Washer

Door lock (Transmitter)

Door unlock (Transmitter)

Mark Name

yAll persons in the vehicle should

fasten their seatbelts BEFORE the

vehicle starts to move. Otherwise,

the possibility of serious injury

becomes greater in the event of a

sudden stop or accident.

yTo obtain maximum protection in

the event of an accident, the driv-

er and all passengers in the vehi-

cle should always wear seatbelts

when the vehicle is moving. The

SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-

tem) airbag does not do away with

the need to fasten seatbelts. In

combination with the seatbelts, it

offers the best combined protec-

tion in case of a serious accident.

Not wearing a seatbelt increases

the chance of severe injury or

death in a crash even when the ve-

hicle has the SRS airbag.

yThe SRS airbags deploy with con-

siderable speed and force. Occu-

pants who are out of proper posi-

tion when the SRS airbag deploys

could suffer very serious injuries.

Because the SRS airbag needs

enough space for deployment, the

driver should always sit upright

and well back in the seat as far

from the steering wheel as practi-

cal while still maintaining full ve-

hicle control and the front passen-

ger should move the seat as far

back as possible and sit upright

and well back in the seat.

–

CONTINUED

–

Child safety

Carefully read the sections “Child restraint

systems”,“*SRS airbag (Supplemental

Restraint System airbag)”, and “Seatbelts”

in chapter 1 of this Owner’s Manual for in-

structions and precautions concerning the

child restraint system, seatbelt system

and SRS airbag system.

yNever hold a child on your lap or

in your arms while the vehicle is

moving. The passenger cannot

protect the child from injury in a

collision, because the child will be

caught between the passenger

and objects inside the vehicle.

yWhile riding in the vehicle, infants

and small children should always

be placed in the REAR seat in an

infant or child restraint system

which is appropriate for the

child’s age, height and weight. If a

child is too big for a child restraint

system, the child should sit in the

REAR seat and be restrained us-

ing the seatbelts. According to ac-

cident statistics, children are saf-

er when properly restrained in the

rear seating positions than in the

front seating positions. Never al-

low a child to stand up or kneel on

the seat.

yPut children aged 12 and under in

the REAR seat properly restrained

at all times in a child restraint de-

vice or in a seatbelt. The SRS air-

bag deploys with considerable

speed and force and can injure or

even kill children, especially if

they are 12 years of age and under

and are not restrained or improp-

erly restrained. Because children

are lighter and weaker than

adults, their risk being injured

from deployment is greater.

yNEVER INSTALL A REARWARD

FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE

FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS

SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO

THE CHILD BY PLACING THE

CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO

THE SRS AIRBAG.

yAlways use the child safety locks

whenever a child rides in the rear

seat. Serious injury could result if

a child accidentally opened the

door and fell out. Refer to the

“Child safety locks” section in

chapter 2.

yAlways lock the passenger’s win-

dows using the lock switch when

children are riding in the vehicle.

Failure to follow this procedure

could result in injury to a child op-

erating the power window. Refer

to the “Windows” section in chap-

ter 2.

yNever leave unattended children

in the vehicle. They could acci-

dentally injure themselves or oth-

ers through inadvertent operation

of the vehicle. Also, on hot or sun-

ny days, temperature in a closed

vehicle could quickly become

high enough to cause severe or

possibly fatal injuries to them.

Engine exhaust gas (carbon

monoxide)

Drinking and driving

Drunken driving is one of the most fre-

quent causes of accidents. Since alcohol

affects all people differently, you may

have consumed too much alcohol to drive

safely even if the level of alcohol in your

blood is below the legal limit. The safest

thing you can do is never drink and drive.

However if you have no choice but to

drive, stop drinking and sober up com-

pletely before getting behind the wheel.

Drugs and driving

If you are taking any drugs, check with

your doctor or pharmacist or read the liter-

ature that accompanies the medication to

determine if the drug you are taking can

impair your driving ability. Do not drive af-

ter taking any medications that can make

you drowsy or otherwise affect your ability

to safely operate a motor vehicle. If you

yNever inhale engine exhaust gas.

Engine exhaust gas contains car-

bon monoxide, a colorless and

odorless gas which is dangerous,

or even lethal, if inhaled.

yAlways properly maintain the en-

gine exhaust system to prevent

engine exhaust gas from entering

the vehicle.

yNever run the engine in a closed

space, such as a garage, except

for the brief time needed to drive

the vehicle in or out of it.

yAvoid remaining in a parked vehi-

cle for a lengthy time while the en-

gine is running. If that is unavoid-

able, then use the ventilation fan

to force fresh air into the vehicle.

yAlways keep the front ventilator

inlet grille free from snow, leaves

or other obstructions to ensure

that the ventilation system always

works properly.

yIf at any time you suspect that ex-

haust fumes are entering the vehi-

cle, have the problem checked

and corrected as soon as possi-

ble. If you must drive under these

conditions, drive only with all win-

dows fully open.

yKeep the rear gate closed while

driving to prevent exhaust gas

from entering the vehicle.

Drinking and then driving is very

dangerous. Alcohol in the blood-

stream delays your reaction and im-

pairs your perception, judgment and

attentiveness. If you drive after

drinking – even if you drink just a lit-

tle – it will increase the risk of being

involved in a serious or fatal acci-

dent, injuring or killing yourself,

your passengers and others. In ad-

dition, if you are injured in the acci-

dent, alcohol may increase the se-

verity of that injury.

Please don’t drink and drive.

There are some drugs (over the

counter and prescription) that can

delay your reaction time and impair

your perception, judgment and at-

tentiveness. If you drive after taking

them, it may increase your, your

passengers’ and other persons’ risk

of being involved in a serious or fa-

tal accident.

–

CONTINUED

–

have a medical condition that requires you

to take drugs, please consult with your

doctor.

Never drive if you are under the influence

of any illicit mind-altering drugs. For your

own health and well-being, we urge you

not to take illegal drugs in the first place

and to seek treatment if you are addicted

to those drugs.

Driving when tired or sleepy

Please do not continue to drive but in-

stead find a safe place to rest if you are

tired or sleepy. On long trips, you should

make periodic rest stops to refresh your-

self before continuing on your journey.

When possible, you should share the driv-

ing with others.

Modification of your vehicle

Car phone/cell phone and

driving

Driving with pets

Unrestrained pets can interfere with your

driving and distract your attention from

driving. In a collision or sudden stop, unre-

strained pets or cages can be thrown

around inside the vehicle and hurt you or

your passengers. Besides, the pets can

be hurt under these situations. It is also for

their own safety that pets should be prop-

erly restrained in your vehicle. Restrain a

pet with a special traveling harness which

can be secured to the rear seat with a

seatbelt or use a pet carrier which can be

secured to the rear seat by routing a seat-

belt through the carrier’s handle. Never re-

strain pets or pet carriers in the front pas-

senger’s seat. For further information,

consult your veterinarian, local animal

protection society or pet shop.

Tire pressures

Check and, if necessary, adjust the pres-

sure of each tire (including the spare) at

least once a month and before any long

journey.

Check the tire pressure when the tires are

cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust the

tire pressures to the values shown on the

tire placard.

Refer to the “Tires and wheels” section in

When you are tired or sleepy, your

reaction will be delayed and your

perception, judgment and attentive-

ness will be impaired. If you drive

when tired or sleepy, your, your pas-

sengers’ and other persons’ chanc-

es of being involved in a serious ac-

cident may increase.

Your vehicle should not be modified

other than with genuine Subaru

parts and accessories. Other types

of modifications could affect its per-

formance, safety or durability, and

may even violate governmental reg-

ulations. In addition, damage or per-

formance problems resulting from

modification may not be covered

under warranties.

Do not use a car phone/cell phone

while driving; it may distract your at-

tention from driving and can lead to

an accident. If you use a car phone/

cell phone, pull off the road and park

in a safe place before using your

phone. In some States/Provinces,

only hands-free phones may legally

be used while driving.

chapter 11 for detailed information.

California proposition 65

warning

Driving at high speeds with exces-

sively low tire pressures can cause

the tires to deform severely and to

rapidly become hot. A sharp in-

crease in temperature could cause

tread separation, and destruction of

the tires. The resulting loss of vehi-

cle control could lead to an acci-

dent.

Engine exhaust, some of its constit-

uents, and certain vehicle compo-

nents contain or emit chemicals

known to the State of California to

cause cancer and birth defects or

other reproductive harm. In addi-

tion, certain fluids in vehicles and

certain components of product wear

contain or emit chemicals known to

the State of California to cause can-

cer and birth defects or other repro-

ductive harm.

Table of contents

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Keys and doors

Instruments and controls

Climate control

Audio

Interior equipment

Starting and operating

Driving tips

In case of emergency

Appearance care

Maintenance and service

Specifications

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

Index

Illustrated index

Exterior

67891011

12345

000194

1) Headlight switch (page 3-17)

2) Replacing bulbs (page 11-44)

3) Engine hood (page 11-4)

4) Wiper switch (page 3-22)

5) Roof rails (page 8-13)

6) Door locks (page 2-4)

7) Tire pressure (page 11-31)

8) Flat tires (page 9-3)

9) Tire chains (page 8-10)

10) Front fog light button (page 3-20)

11) Tie-down/Towing hooks (page 9-11)

–

CONTINUED

–

12 3

000121

1) Rear window defogger button (page

3-24)

2) Rear gate (page 2-20)

3) Child safety locks (page 2-17)

4) Fuel filler lid and cap (page 7-3)

5) Tie-down/Towing hook (page 9-11)

Interior

TPassenger compartment area

123

456

000122

1) Lower anchorage for child restraint

system (page 1-32)

2) Seatbelt (page 1-10)

3) Moonroof (page 2-21)

4) Parking brake lever (page 7-20)

5) Front seat (page 1-2)

6) Rear seat (page 1-7)

–

CONTINUED

–

000123

1) Cup holder (page 6-7)

2) Center console (page 6-4)

3) Glove box (page 6-4)

4) Front power supply socket (page 6-8)

5) Pocket (if equipped) (page 6-7)

AUX unit (if equipped) (page 6-8)

Instrument panel

000223

12 3 4 5 67

89101112141516 13

1) Door locks (page 2-4)

2) Outside mirror switch (page 3-27)

3) Light control lever (page 3-17)

4) Combination meter (page 3-6)

5) Wiper control lever (page 3-21)

6) Hazard warning flasher switch (page

3-6)

7) Audio (page 5-1)

8) Gear shift lever (MT) (page 7-9)

Selector lever (AT) (page 7-10)

9) Climate control (page 4-1)

10) Cruise control (page 7-22)

11) Horn (page 3-29)

12) SRS airbag (page 1-36)

13) Tilt steering (page 3-28)

14) Fuse (page 11-41)

15) Hood lock release knob (page 11-4)

16) Power windows (page 2-18)

–

CONTINUED

–

Light control and wiper control levers/switches

000020

1) Parking light switch (page 3-20)

2) Windshield wiper (page 3-22)

3) Mist (page 3-23)

4) Windshield washer (page 3-23)

5) Rear window wiper and washer

switch (page 3-23)

6) Wiper control lever (page 3-22)

7) Illumination brightness control (page

3-19)

8) Light control lever (page 3-17)

9) Headlight ON/OFF (page 3-17)

10) Headlight flasher High/Low beam

change (page 3-17)

11) Turn signal (for lane change) (page 3-

19)

12) Turn signal (page 3-19)

Combination meter

TU.S.-spec. models

VAT vehicles

000248

123 4

5867

1) Fuel gauge (page 3-7)

2) Temperature gauge (page 3-8)

3) Speedometer (page 3-6)

4) Tachometer (page 3-7)

5) Trip meter A/B selection and trip

meter reset knob (page 3-6)

6) Odometer and trip meter (page 3-6)

7) Outside temperature indicator (page

3-8)

8) Select lever position indicator (page

3-15)

–

CONTINUED

–

X, XS, L.L.Bean

123 4

5786

000227

1) Fuel gauge (page 3-7)

2) Temperature gauge (page 3-8)

3) Speedometer (page 3-6)

4) Tachometer (page 3-7)

5) Trip meter A/B selection and trip

meter reset knob (page 3-6)

6) Odometer and trip meter (page 3-6)

7) Outside temperature indicator (page

3-8)

8) Select lever position indicator (page

3-15)

VMT vehicles

123 4

000126

1) Fuel gauge (page 3-7)

2) Temperature gauge (page 3-8)

3) Speedometer (page 3-6)

4) Tachometer (page 3-7)

5) Trip meter A/B selection and trip

meter reset knob (page 3-6)

6) Odometer and trip meter (page 3-6)

7) Outside temperature indicator (page

3-8)

–

CONTINUED

–

X, XS, L.L.Bean

123 4

765

000228

1) Fuel gauge (page 3-7)

2) Temperature gauge (page 3-8)

3) Speedometer (page 3-6)

4) Tachometer (page 3-7)

5) Trip meter A/B selection and trip

meter reset knob (page 3-6)

6) Odometer and trip meter (page 3-6)

7) Outside temperature indicator (page

3-8)

TCanada-spec. models

VAT vehicles

000247

123 4

5867

1) Fuel gauge (page 3-7)

2) Temperature gauge (page 3-8)

3) Speedometer (page 3-6)

4) Tachometer (page 3-7)

5) Trip meter A/B selection and trip

meter reset knob (page 3-6)

6) Odometer and trip meter (page 3-6)

7) Outside temperature indicator (page

3-8)

8) Select lever position indicator (page

3-15)

–

CONTINUED

–

X, XS, L.L.Bean

123 4

7865

000129

1) Fuel gauge (page 3-7)

2) Temperature gauge (page 3-8)

3) Speedometer (page 3-6)

4) Tachometer (page 3-7)

5) Trip meter A/B selection and trip

meter reset knob (page 3-6)

6) Odometer and trip meter (page 3-6)

7) Outside temperature indicator (page

3-8)

8) Select lever position indicator (page

3-15)

VMT vehicles

123 4

765

000130

1) Fuel gauge (page 3-7)

2) Temperature gauge (page 3-8)

3) Speedometer (page 3-6)

4) Tachometer (page 3-7)

5) Trip meter A/B selection and trip

meter reset knob (page 3-6)

6) Odometer and trip meter (page 3-6)

7) Outside temperature indicator (page

3-8)

–

CONTINUED

–

X, XS, L.L.Bean

76 5

23 4

000131

1) Fuel gauge (page 3-7)

2) Temperature gauge (page 3-8)

3) Speedometer (page 3-6)

4) Tachometer (page 3-7)

5) Trip meter A/B selection and trip

meter reset knob (page 3-6)

6) Odometer and trip meter (page 3-6)

7) Outside temperature indicator (page

3-8)

TWarning and indicator light

Mark Name Page

Seatbelt warning light 3-9

SRS airbag system

warning light 3-10

Front passenger’s

frontal airbag ON indi-

cator light

3-11

Front passenger’s

frontal airbag OFF in-

dicator light

3-11

CHECK ENGINE

warning light/Malfunc-

tion indicator lamp

3-11

Charge warning light 3-12

Oil pressure warning

light 3-12

AT OIL temperature

warning light (AT vehi-

cles)

3-12

or ABS warning light 3-13

or Brake system warning

light 3-13

Door open warning

light 3-14

All-Wheel Drive warn-

ing light (AT vehicles) 3-15

Low fuel warning light 3-14

Turn signal indicator

lights 3-15

High beam indicator

light 3-15

Security indicator light

(if equipped) 2-3

Cruise control indica-

tor light (if equipped) 3-15

Cruise control set indi-

cator light (if equipped) 3-16

Mark Name Page

–

CONTINUED

–

Tire changing tools

000132

1) Jack (page 9-14)

2) Jack handle (page 9-14)

3) Spare tire (page 9-3)

Cargo area cover

000195

1) Cargo area cover (page 6-13)

2) Cargo tie-down hook (page 6-14)

3) Accessory power outlet (page 6-8)

4) Shopping bag hook (page 6-14)

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Front seats .......................................................... 1-2

Manual seat ............................................................. 1-3

Power seat (if equipped) ........................................ 1-4

Lumbar support (Driver’s seat only) ..................... 1-5

Head restraint adjustment ..................................... 1-6

Active head restraint .............................................. 1-6

Seat heater (if equipped) ................................... 1-7

Rear seats ........................................................... 1-7

Head restraint adjustment ..................................... 1-8

Folding down the rear seatback ............................ 1-9

Armrest (if equipped) ......................................... 1-10

Seatbelts ............................................................. 1-10

Seatbelt safety tips ................................................. 1-10

Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) .................... 1-11

Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor

(A/ELR) .................................................................. 1-12

Seatbelt warning light and chime .......................... 1-12

Fastening the seatbelt ............................................ 1-13

Seatbelt maintenance ............................................. 1-19

Seatbelt extender ............................................... 1-20

Front seatbelt pretensioners ............................. 1-21

System monitors .................................................... 1-22

System servicing .................................................... 1-23

Precautions against vehicle modification ............ 1-23

Child restraint systems ..................................... 1-24

Where to place a child restraint system ............... 1-25

Choosing a child restraint system ........................ 1-26

Installing child restraint systems with A/ELR

seatbelt .................................................................. 1-27

Installing a booster seat ......................................... 1-30

Installation of child restraint systems by use of

lower and tether anchorages (LATCH) ............... 1-32

Top tether anchorages ........................................... 1-34

*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System

airbag) .............................................................. 1-36

Vehicle with driver’s and front passenger’s

SRS airbags and lap/shoulder restraints ........... 1-36

Subaru advanced frontal airbag system .............. 1-40

SRS side airbag (if equipped) ................................ 1-52

SRS airbag system monitors ................................. 1-57

SRS airbag system servicing ................................ 1-58

Precautions against vehicle modification ............ 1-59

1-2

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Seat, s eatbelt and SRS airbags

Front seats

yNever adjust the seat while driv-

ing to avoid the possibility of loss

of vehicle control and of personal

injury.

yBefore adjusting the seat, make

sure the hands and feet of rear

seat passengers are clear of the

adjusting mechanism.

ySeatbelts provide maximum re-

straint when the occupant sits

well back and upright in the seat.

To reduce the risk of sliding under

the seatbelt in a collision, the

front seatbacks should be always

used in the upright position while

the vehicle is running. If the front

seatbacks are not used in the up-

right position in a collision, the

risk of sliding under the lap belt

and of the lap belt sliding up over

the abdomen will increase, and

both can result in serious internal

injury or death.

yThe SRS airbags deploy with con-

siderable speed and force. Occu-

pants who are out of proper posi-

tion when the SRS airbag deploys

could suffer very serious injuries.

Because the SRS airbag needs

enough space for deployment, the

driver should always sit upright

and well back in the seat as far

from the steering wheel as practi-

cal while still maintaining full ve-

hicle control and the front passen-

ger should move the seat as far

back as possible and sit upright

and well back in the seat.

100082

Put children aged 12 and under in

the rear seat properly restrained at

all times. The SRS airbag deploys

with considerable speed and force

and can injure or even kill children,

especially if they are 12 years of age

and under and are not restrained or

improperly restrained. Because chil-

dren are lighter and weaker than

adults, their risk of being injured

from deployment is greater. Conse-

quently, we strongly recommend

that ALL children (including those in

child seats and those that have out-

grown child restraint devices) sit in

the REAR seat properly restrained

at all times in a child restraint device

or in a seatbelt, whichever is appro-

priate for the child’s age, height and

weight. Secure ALL types of child

restraint devices (including forward

facing child seat) in the REAR seats

at all times.

NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD

FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT

SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS

INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD

BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD

TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

1-3

–

CONTINUED

–

Manual seat

TFore and aft adjustment

Pull the lever upward and slide the seat to

the desired position. Then release the le-

ver and move the seat back and forth to

make sure that it is securely locked into

place.

TReclining the seatback

Pull the reclining lever up and adjust the

seatback to the desired position. Then re-

lease the lever and make sure the seat-

back is securely locked into place.

The seatback placed in a reclined position

can spring back upward with force when

released. When operating the reclining le-

ver to return the seatback, hold it lightly so

that it may be raised back gradually.

According to accident statistics,

children are safer when properly re-

strained in the rear seating posi-

tions than in the front seating posi-

tions. For instructions and precau-

tions concerning child restraint sys-

tems, see the “Child restraint sys-

tems” section in this chapter.

100595

To prevent the passenger from slid-

ing under the seatbelt in the event of

a collision, always put the seatback

in the upright position while the ve-

hicle is in motion. Also, do not place

objects such as cushions between

the passenger and the seatback. If

you do so, the risk of sliding under

the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding

up over the abdomen will increase,

and both can result in serious inter-

nal injury or death.

100085

100596

1-4

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

TSeat height adjustment (Driver’s

seat only)

1) Turn the dial backward to lower the seat.

2) Turn the dial forward to raise the seat.

Use the adjusting dial to adjust the height

of the seat.

Power seat (if equipped)

TFore and aft adjustment

To adjust the seat forward or backward,

move the control switch forward or back-

ward.

TSeat cushion angle adjustment

To adjust the seat cushion angle, pull up

or push down the front end of the control

switch.

TSeat height adjustment

100597

100598

100739

100600

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

1-5

–

CONTINUED

–

To adjust the seat height, pull up or push

down the rear end of the control switch.

TReclining the seatback

To adjust the angle of the seatback, move

the control switch forward or backward.

Lumbar support (Driver’s

seat only)

Pull the lever forward or backward.

Pulling the lever forward will increase the

amount of support for your lower back.

To prevent the passenger from slid-

ing under the seatbelt in the event of

a collision, always put the seatback

in the upright position while the ve-

hicle is in motion. Also, do not place

objects such as cushions between

the passenger and the seatback. If

you do so, the risk of sliding under

the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding

up over the abdomen will increase,

and both can result in serious inter-

nal injury or death.

100085

100601

100545

1-6

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Head restraint adjustment

To raise the head restraint, pull it up.

To lower it, push the head restraint down

while pressing the release button on the

top of the seatback.

The head restraint should be adjusted so

that the center of the head restraint is clos-

est to the top of the occupant’s ears.

Active head restraint

The front seats of your vehicle are

equipped with active head restraints. They

automatically tilt forward slightly in the

event the vehicle is struck from the rear,

decreasing the amount of rearward head

movement and thus reducing the risk of

whiplash. For maximum effectiveness the

head restraint should be adjust so that the

center of the head restraint is closest to

the top of the occupant’s ears.

Never drive the vehicle with the

head restraints removed because

they are designed to reduce the risk

of serious neck injury in the event

that the vehicle is struck from the

rear.

100087 100089

yEach active head restraint is ef-

fective only when its height is

properly adjusted and the driver/

passenger sits in the correct posi-

tion on the seat.

yIf your vehicle is involved in a

rear-end collision, have an autho-

rized SUBARU dealer inspect the

active head restraints.

yThe active head restraints may

not operate in the event the vehi-

cle experiences only a slight im-

pact in the rear.

yThe active head restraints may be

damaged if they are pushed hard

from behind or subjected to

shock. As a result, they may not

function if the vehicle suffers a

rear impact.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

1-7

–

CONTINUED

–

Seat heater (if equipped)

HI – Rapid heating

LO – Normal heating

The seat heater operates when the igni-

tion switch is either in the “ACC” or “ON”

position.

To turn on the seat heater, push the “LO”

or “HI” position on the switch, as desired,

depending on the temperature. Selecting

the “HI” position will cause the seat to heat

up quicker.

The indicator located on the switch comes

on when the seat heater is in operation.

When the vehicle’s interior is warmed

enough or before you leave the vehicle,

be sure to turn the switch off.

NOTE

Use of the seat heater for a long period

of time while the engine is not running

can cause battery discharge.

Rear seats

100092

yThere is a possibility that people

with delicate skin may suffer

slight burns even at low tempera-

tures if he/she uses the seat heat-

er for a long period of time. When

using the heater, always be sure

to warn the persons concerned.

yDo not put anything on the seat

which insulates against heat,

such as a blanket, cushion, or

similar items. This may cause the

seat heater to overheat.

Seatbelts provide maximum re-

straint when the occupant sits well

back and upright in the seat. Do not

put cushions or any other materials

between occupants and seatbacks

or seat cushions. If you do so, the

risk of sliding under the lap belt and

of the lap belt sliding up over the ab-

domen will increase, and both can

result in serious internal injury or

death.

100093

1-8

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Head restraint adjustment

TRear windows side seating position

To raise the head restraint, pull it up.

To lower it, push the head restraint down

while pressing the release button on the

top of the seatback.

When the seats are not occupied, lower

the head restraint to improve rearward vis-

ibility.

TRear center seating position

To raise the head restraint, pull it up.

To lower it, push the head restraint down

while pressing the release button on the

top of the seatback.

When the rear center seating position is

occupied, place the head restraint to the

click position. When the rear center seat-

ing position is not occupied, lower the

head restraint to improve rearward visibil-

Never stack luggage or other cargo

higher than the top of the seatback

because it could tumble forward and

injure passengers in the event of a

sudden stop or accident.

Never drive the vehicle with the

head restraints removed because

they are designed to reduce the risk

of serious neck injury in the event

that the vehicle is struck from the

rear.

100094

The head restraint is not intended to

be used at the lowest position. Be-

fore sitting on the seat, raise the

head restraint to the click position

depending on your sitting height.

100098

The head restraint is not intended to

be used at the lowest position. Be-

fore sitting on the seat, raise the

head restraint to the click position

depending on your sitting height.

100099

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

1-9

ity.

Folding down the rear seat-

back

1. Lower the head restraints.

2. Unlock the seatback by pulling the re-

lease knob and then fold the seatback

down.

To return the seatback to its original posi-

tion, raise the seatback until it locks into

place and make sure that it is securely

locked.

yAfter returning the rear seatback

to its original position, make cer-

tain that the shoulder belts are ful-

ly visible.

yNever allow passengers to ride on

the folded rear seatback or in the

cargo area. Doing so may result in

serious injury or death.

ySecure lengthy items properly to

prevent them from shooting for-

ward and causing serious injury

during a sudden stop.

100095

100096

1-10

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Armrest (if equipped)

To lower the armrest, pull on the top edge

of the armrest.

Seatbelts

Seatbelt safety tips

To avoid the possibility of serious

injury, passengers must never be al-

lowed to sit on the center armrest

while the vehicle is in motion.

100602

yAll persons in the vehicle should

fasten their seatbelts BEFORE the

vehicle starts to move. Otherwise,

the possibility of serious injury

becomes greater in the event of a

sudden stop or accident.

yAll belts should fit snugly in order

to provide full restraint. Loose fit-

ting belts are not as effective in

preventing or reducing injury.

yEach seatbelt is designed to sup-

port only one person. Never use a

single belt for two or more per-

sons – even children. Otherwise,

in an accident, serious injury or

death could result.

yReplace all seatbelt assemblies

including retractors and attaching

hardware worn by occupants of a

vehicle that has been in a serious

accident. The entire assembly

should be replaced even if dam-

age is not obvious.

yPut children aged 12 and under in

the rear seat properly restrained

at all times. The SRS airbag de-

ploys with considerable speed

and force and can injure or even

kill children, especially if they are

12 years of age and under and are

not restrained or improperly re-

strained. Because children are

lighter and weaker than adults,

their risk of being injured from de-

ployment is greater. Consequent-

ly, we strongly recommend that

ALL children (including those in

child seats and those that have

outgrown child restraint devices)

sit in the REAR seat properly re-

strained at all times in a child re-

straint device or in a seatbelt,

whichever is appropriate for the

child’s height and weight.

Secure ALL types of child re-

straint devices (including forward

facing child seats) in the REAR

seats at all times.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

1-11

–

CONTINUED

–

Your vehicle is equipped with a crash

sensing and diagnostic module, which will

record the use of the seatbelt(s) by the

driver and/or front passenger when any of

the SRS frontal and side airbags deploys.

TInfants or small children

Use a child restraint system that is suit-

able for your vehicle. See information on

“Child restraint systems” in this chapter.

TChildren

If a child is too big for a child restraint sys-

tem, the child should sit in the rear seat

and be restrained using the seatbelts. Ac-

cording to accident statistics, children are

safer when properly restrained in the rear

seating positions than in the front seating

positions. Never allow a child to stand up

or kneel on the seat.

If the shoulder portion of the belt crosses

the face or neck, adjust the shoulder belt

anchor height (window-side seating posi-

tions only) and then if necessary move the

child closer to the belt buckle to help pro-

vide a good shoulder belt fit. Care must be

taken to securely place the lap belt as low

as possible on the hips and not on the

child’s waist. If the shoulder portion of the

belt cannot be properly positioned, a child

restraint system should be used. Never

place the shoulder belt under the child’s

arm or behind the child’s back.

TExpectant mothers

Expectant mothers also need to use the

seatbelts. They should consult their doctor

for specific recommendations. The lap

belt should be worn securely and as low

as possible over the hips, not over the

waist.

Emergency Locking Retrac-

tor (ELR)

The driver’s seatbelt has an Emergency

Locking Retractor (ELR).

The emergency locking retractor allows

normal body movement but the retractor

locks automatically during a sudden stop,

impact or if you pull the belt very quickly

out of the retractor.

NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD

FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE

FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS

SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO

THE CHILD BY PLACING THE

CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO

THE SRS AIRBAG.

According to accident statistics,

children are safer when properly

restrained in the rear seating posi-

tions than in the front seating po-

sitions. For instructions and pre-

cautions concerning the child re-

straint system, see the “Child re-

straint systems” section in this

chapter.

100100

1-12

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Automatic/Emergency Lock-

ing Retractor (A/ELR)

Each passenger’s seatbelt has an Auto-

matic/Emergency Locking Retractor (A/

ELR). The Automatic/Emergency Locking

Retractor normally functions as an Emer-

gency Locking Retractor (ELR). The A/

ELR has an additional locking mode “Au-

tomatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode” in-

tended to secure a child restraint system.

When the seatbelt is once drawn out com-

pletely and is then retracted even slightly,

the retractor locks the seatbelt in that po-

sition and the seatbelt cannot be extend-

ed. As the belt is rewinding, clicks will be

heard which indicate the retractor func-

tions as an ALR. When the seatbelt is re-

tracted fully, the ALR mode is released.

When securing a child restraint system on

the rear seats by the use of the seatbelt,

the seatbelt must be changed over to the

Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode.

When the child restraint system is re-

moved, make sure that the seatbelt re-

tracts fully and the retractor returned to

the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

mode.

For instructions on how to convert the re-

tractor to the ALR mode and restore it to

the ELR mode, see the “Child restraint

systems” section in this chapter.

Seatbelt warning light

and chime

Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt

warning device at the driver’s seat, as re-

quired by current safety standards. There

is a seatbelt warning light in the combina-

tion meter.

If the driver has not yet fastened the seat-

belt when the ignition switch is turned to

the “ON” position, the seatbelt warning

light will flash for 6 seconds, to warn that

the seatbelt is unfastened. If the driver’s

seatbelt is not fastened, a chime will also

sound simultaneously.

If the driver’s seatbelt is still not fastened

6 seconds later, the warning light will re-

main lit for 15 seconds. If the driver’s seat-

belt is still not fastened even 15 seconds

later (21 seconds after turning ON the ig-

nition switch), the warning lights will alter-

nate between flashing and steady illumi-

nation at 15-second intervals, and the

chime will sound while the warning light is

flashing.

Alternate flashing and steady illumination

of the warning lights and sounding of the

chime will continue until the driver fastens

the seatbelt.

NOTE

yIf the driver unfastens the seatbelt af-

ter fastening, the seatbelt warning de-

vice operates as follows according to

the vehicle speed.

yAt speeds lower than approximate-

ly 9 mph (15 km/h)

The warning light will alternate be-

tween flashing and steady illumina-

tion at 15-second intervals. The

chime will not sound.

yAt speeds higher than approxi-

mately 9 mph (15 km/h)

The warning light will alternate be-

tween flashing and steady illumina-

tion at 15-second intervals and the

chime will sound while the warning

light is flashing.

yIt is possible to cancel the warning

operation that follows the 6-second

warning after turning ON the ignition

switch. When the ignition switch is

turned ON next time, however, the

complete sequence of warning opera-

tion resumes. For further details about

canceling the warning operation,

please contact your SUBARU dealer.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

1-13

–

CONTINUED

–

Fastening the seatbelt

TFront seatbelts

1. Adjust the seat position:

Driver’s seat: Adjust the seatback to the

upright position. Move the seat as far from

the steering wheel as practical while still

maintaining full vehicle control.

Front passenger’s seat: Adjust the seat-

back to the upright position. Move the seat

as far back as possible.

2. Sit well back in the seat.

3. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the

belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted. If

the belt stops before reaching the buckle,

return the belt slightly and pull it out more

slowly. If the belt still cannot be unlocked,

let the belt retract slightly after giving it a

strong pull, then pull it out slowly again.

yNever use a belt that is twisted or

reversed. In an accident, this can

increase the risk or severity of in-

jury.

yKeep the lap belt as low as possi-

ble on your hips. In a collision,

this spreads the force of the lap

belt over stronger hip bones in-

stead of across the weaker abdo-

men.

ySeatbelts provide maximum re-

straint when the occupant sits

well back and upright in the seat.

To reduce the risk of sliding under

the seatbelt in a collision, the

front seatbacks should be always

used in the upright position while

the vehicle is running. If the front

seatbacks are not used in the up-

right position in a collision, the

risk of sliding under the lap belt

and of the lap belt sliding up over

the abdomen will increase, and

both can result in serious internal

injury or death.

yDo not put cushions or any other

materials between occupants and

seatbacks or seat cushions. If you

do so, the risk of sliding under the

lap belt and of the lap belt sliding

up over the abdomen will in-

crease, and both can result in se-

rious internal injury or death.

Never place the shoulder belt under

the arm or behind the back. If an ac-

cident occurs, this can increase the

risk or severity of injury.

100101

Metallic parts of the seatbelt can be-

come very hot in a vehicle that has

been closed up in sunny weather;

they could burn an occupant. Do not

touch such hot parts until they cool.

1-14

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle

until you hear a click.

5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on

the shoulder belt.

6. Place the lap belt as low as possible on

your hips, not on your waist.

VAdjusting the front seat shoulder

belt anchor height

The shoulder belt anchor height should be

adjusted to the position best suited for the

driver/front passenger.

To lower the anchor height, push the re-

lease button and slide the anchor down.

To raise the anchor height, slide the an-

chor up. Pull down on the anchor to make

sure that it is locked in place.

Always adjust the anchor height so that

the shoulder belt passes over the middle

of the shoulder without touching the neck.

VUnfastening the seatbelt

Push the button on the buckle.

Before closing the door, make sure that

the belts are retracted properly to avoid

catching the belt webbing in the door.

100102

100103

100104

When wearing the seatbelts, make

sure the shoulder portion of the

webbing does not pass over your

neck. If it does, adjust the seatbelt

anchor to a lower position. Placing

the shoulder belt over the neck may

result in neck injury during sudden

braking or in a collision.

100105

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

1-15

–

CONTINUED

–

TRear seatbelts (except rear center

seatbelt)

1. Sit well back in the seat.

2. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the

belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted. If

the belt stops before reaching the buckle,

return the belt slightly and pull it out more

slowly. If the belt still cannot be unlocked,

let the belt retract slightly after giving a

strong pull on it, then pull it out slowly

again.

3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle

until you hear a click.

4. To make the lap part tight, pull up on

the shoulder belt.

5. Place the lap belt as low as possible on

your hips, not on your waist.

VAdjusting the rear seat shoulder belt

anchor height (window-side seating

positions only)

The shoulder belt anchor height should be

adjusted to the position best suited for

you.

To lower the anchor height, push the re-

lease button and slide the anchor down.

To raise the anchor height, slide the an-

chor up. Pull down on the anchor to make

sure that it is locked in place.

Always adjust the anchor height so that

the shoulder belt passes over the middle

of the shoulder without touching the neck.

100102

100103

100104

1-16

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

VUnfastening the seatbelt

Push the button on the buckle.

Before closing the door, make sure that

the belts are retracted properly to avoid

catching the belt webbing in the door.

TRear center seatbelt

1) Center seatbelt tongue plate

2) Connector (tongue)

3) Connector (buckle)

4) Center seatbelt buckle

When wearing the seatbelts, make

sure the shoulder portion of the

webbing does not pass over your

neck. If it does, adjust the seatbelt

anchor to a lower position. Placing

the shoulder belt over the neck may

result in neck injury during sudden

braking or in a collision.

100105

100603

100108

Fastening the seatbelt with the web-

bing twisted can increase the risk or

severity of injury in an accident.

When fastening the belt after it is

pulled out from the retractor, espe-

cially when inserting the connec-

tor’s tongue plate into the mating

buckle (on right-hand side), always

check that the webbing is not twist-

ed.

100109

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

1-17

–

CONTINUED

–

Rear center seatbelt is stowed in the re-

cess of the ceiling.

1. Remove the connector (tongue) plate

from the slot located at the front of the re-

cess by pulling the connector (tongue)

plate rearward.

2. Pull out the seatbelt slowly from the

overhead retractor.

1) Seatbelt comfort guide

3. Pass the seatbelt through the seatbelt

comfort guide located beside the head re-

straint.

4. After confirming that the webbing is not

twisted, insert the connector (tongue) at-

tached at the webbing end into the buckle

on the right-hand side until a click is heard.

If the belt stops before reaching the buck-

le, return the belt slightly and pull it out

more slowly. If the belt still cannot be un-

locked, let the belt retract slightly after giv-

ing it a strong pull, then pull it out slowly

again.

Be sure to fasten both tongue plates

to the respective buckles. If the

seatbelt is used only as a shoulder

belt (with the connector’s tongue

plate not fastened to the connec-

tor’s buckle on the right-hand side),

it cannot properly restrain the wear-

er in position in an accident, possi-

bly resulting in serious injury or

death.

100110

100111

100604

100113

1-18

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

5. Insert the center seatbelt tongue plate

into the center seatbelt buckle marked

“CENTER” on the left-hand side until it

clicks.

6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on

the shoulder belt.

7. Place the lap belt as low as possible on

your hips, not on your waist.

VUnfastening the seatbelt

Push the release button of the center

seatbelt buckle (on the left-hand side) to

unfasten the seatbelt.

When the seatback is folded down for

greater cargo area, it is necessary to

disconnect the connector.

1. Insert a key or other hard pointed ob-

ject into the slot in the connector (buckle)

on the right-hand side and push it in, and

the connector (tongue) plate will discon-

nect from the buckle.

100114

100115

100116

100117

100118

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

1-19

2. Allow the retractor to roll up the belt.

You should hold the webbing end and

guide it back into the retractor while it is

rolling up. Neatly store the tongue plates

in the recess on the ceiling and then insert

the connector (tongue) plate into the slot

located at the front of the recess.

Seatbelt maintenance

To clean the seatbelts, use a mild soap

and lukewarm water. Never bleach or dye

the belts because this could seriously af-

fect their strength.

Inspect the seatbelts and attachments in-

cluding the webbing and all hardware pe-

riodically for cracks, cuts, gashes, tears,

damage, loose bolts or worn areas. Re-

place the seatbelts even if only minor

damage is found.

100119

yDo not allow the retractor to roll

up the seatbelt too quickly. Other-

wise, the metal tongue plates may

hit against the trim, resulting in

damaged trim.

yHave the seatbelt fully rolled up

so that the tongue plates are neat-

ly stored. A hanging tongue plate

can swing and hit against the trim

during driving, causing damage to

the trim.

100120

yKeep the belts free of polishes,

oils, chemicals and particularly

battery acid.

yNever attempt to make modifica-

tions or changes that will prevent

the seatbelt from operating prop-

erly.

1-20

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Seatbelt extender

If the front seatbelts are not long enough

to permit the tongue plate to engage with

the seatbelt buckle, an optional seatbelt

extender is available from your SUBARU

dealer. When ordering an extender, only

order one particularly designed for your

vehicle. Several different types of extend-

ers are available to match various variet-

ies of front seatbelt designs. See your

SUBARU dealer for assistance.

The extender adds approximately 8 inch-

es (200 mm) of length and it can be used

for either the driver or front passenger

seating position.

For the safety of others, the extender

should be removed after each use, espe-

cially if the next person using the seatbelt

does not need one.

Note that leaving the seatbelt extender’s

tongue plate engaged with the seatbelt

buckle may prevent the Subaru advanced

front airbag system from functioning cor-

rectly or cause the system to fail.

When the seatbelt extender is used by

a pregnant passenger, consult a doctor

to get approval in advance.

To connect the extender to the seatbelt,

insert the tongue plate into the seatbelt

buckle so that the “PRESS” signs on the

buckle-release buttons of the extender

and the seatbelt are both facing outward

as shown in the diagram. You will hear a

click when the tongue plate locks into the

buckle.

When releasing the seatbelt, press on the

buckle-release button on the extender, not

on the seatbelt. This helps to prevent

damage to the vehicle interior and extend-

er itself.

Be sure to observe the following

when using the seatbelt extender.

Failure to follow these instructions

and warnings could reduce the ef-

fectiveness of the seatbelt and re-

sult in more serious injury in the

event of a collision.

yNever use the extender when the

belt itself is long enough to permit

it to be buckled properly. If remov-

al of heavy clothing is all that is

needed to permit the seatbelt to

be buckled properly, remove the

heavy clothing and do not use the

extender.

yDo not use the extender if the

buckle of the extender rests over

the abdomen.

yDo not let someone else use the

extender. Use of an extender

when it is not needed could re-

duce the effectiveness of the seat-

belt and result in more serious in-

jury in the event of a collision.

yUse the extender only for the front

seatbelts and only for the model

for which it was originally provid-

ed. Never use the extender for the

rear seatbelts or for a different

model.

100605

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

1-21

–

CONTINUED

–

Front seatbelt pretensioners

The driver’s and front passenger’s seat-

belts have a seatbelt pretensioner. The

seatbelt pretensioners are designed to be

activated in the event of an accident in-

volving a moderate to severe frontal colli-

sion.

Also, the seatbelt pretensioners are de-

signed to be activated in the event of an

accident involving a moderate to severe

side impact collision.

The pretensioner sensor also serves as

the frontal and side SRS airbag sensors. If

the sensors detect a certain predeter-

mined amount of force during a frontal col-

lision or a side impact collision, the front

seatbelt is quickly drawn back in by the re-

tractor to take up the slack so that the belt

more effectively restrains the front seat

occupant.

When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated,

an operating noise will be heard and a

small amount of smoke will be released.

These occurrences are normal and not

harmful. This smoke does not indicate a

fire in the vehicle.

Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been

activated, the seatbelt retractor remains

locked. Consequently, the seatbelt can

not be pulled out and retracted and there-

fore must be replaced.

NOTE

ySeatbelt pretensioners are not de-

signed to activate in minor frontal im-

pacts, in minor side impacts or in rear

impacts or in roll-over accidents.

yThe driver’s seat and passenger’s

seat pretensioners and frontal SRS air-

bag operate simultaneously.

yThe driver’s and passenger’s seat-

belt pretensioners and the SRS side

airbag operate simultaneously.

yPretensioners are designed to func-

tion on a one-time-only basis. In the

event that a pretensioner is activated,

both the driver’s and front passenger’s

seatbelt retractor assemblies must be

replaced only by an authorized SUBA-

RU dealer. When replacing seatbelt re-

tractor assemblies, use only genuine

SUBARU parts.

yIf either front seatbelt does not re-

tract or cannot be pulled out due to a

malfunction or activation of the preten-

sioner, contact your SUBARU dealer as

soon as possible.

yIf the front seatbelt retractor assem-

bly or surrounding area has been dam-

aged, contact your SUBARU dealer as

soon as possible.

yWhen you sell your vehicle, we urge

you to explain to the buyer that it has

seatbelt pretensioners by alerting him

to the contents of this section.

100121

yTo obtain maximum protection,

the occupants should sit in an up-

right position with their seatbelts

properly fastened. Refer to the

“Seatbelts” section in this chap-

ter.

1-22

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

System monitors

A diagnostic system continually monitors

the readiness of the seatbelt pretensioner

while the vehicle is being driven. The seat-

belt pretensioners share the control mod-

ule with the SRS airbag system. There-

fore, if any malfunction occurs in a seat-

belt pretensioner, the SRS airbag system

warning light will illuminate. The SRS air-

bag system warning light will show normal

system operation by lighting for approxi-

mately 6 seconds when the ignition switch

is turned to the “ON” position.

The following components are monitored

by the indicator:

yFront sub sensor (Right-hand side)

yFront sub sensor (Left-hand side)

yAirbag control module (including impact

sensors)

yFrontal airbag module (Driver’s side)

yFrontal airbag module (Front passen-

ger’s side)

ySide airbag sensor (Center pillar right-

hand side)

ySide airbag sensor (Center pillar left-

hand side)

ySide airbag module (Driver’s side)

ySide airbag module (Front passenger’s

side)

ySeatbelt pretensioner (Driver’s side)

ySeatbelt pretensioner (Front passen-

ger’s side)

ySeatbelt buckle switch (Driver’s side)

ySeatbelt buckle switch (Front passen-

ger’s side)

yDriver’s seat position sensor

yFront passenger’s seatbelt tension sen-

sor (if equipped)

yFront passenger’s occupant detection

system weight sensor

yFront passenger’s occupant detection

control module

yFront passenger’s frontal airbag ON

and OFF indicator

yAll related wiring

yDo not modify, remove or strike

the front seatbelt retractor assem-

blies or surrounding area. This

could result in accidental activa-

tion of the seatbelt pretensioners

or could make the system inoper-

ative, possibly resulting in seri-

ous injury. Seatbelt pretensioners

have no user-serviceable parts.

For required servicing of front

seatbelt retractors equipped with

seatbelt pretensioners, see your

nearest SUBARU dealer.

yWhen discarding front seatbelt re-

tractor assemblies or scrapping

the entire vehicle due to collision

damage or for other reasons, con-

sult your SUBARU dealer.

100606

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

1-23

–

CONTINUED

–

System servicing

If the front part of the vehicle is dam-

aged in an accident to the extent that

the seatbelt pretensioner does not op-

erate, contact your SUBARU dealer as

soon as possible.

Precautions against vehicle

modification

Always consult your SUBARU dealer if

you want to install any accessory parts to

your vehicle.

If the warning light exhibits any of

the following conditions, there may

be a malfunction in the seatbelt pre-

tensioners and/or SRS airbag sys-

tem. Immediately take your vehicle

to your nearest SUBARU dealer to

have the system checked. Unless

checked and properly repaired, the

seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS

airbags will not operate properly in

the event of a collision, which may

increase the risk of injury.

yFlashing or flickering of the warn-

ing light

yNo illumination of the warning

light when the ignition switch is

first turned to the “ON” position

yContinuous illumination of the

warning light

yIllumination of the warning light

while driving

yWhen discarding a seatbelt retrac-

tor assembly or scrapping the en-

tire vehicle damaged by a colli-

sion, consult your SUBARU deal-

er.

yTampering with or disconnecting

the system’s wiring could result in

accidental activation of the seat-

belt pretensioner and/or SRS air-

bag or could make the system in-

operative, which may result in se-

rious injury. The wiring harnesses

of the seatbelt pretensioner and

SRS airbag systems are covered

with yellow insulation and the

connectors of the system are yel-

low for easy identification. Do not

use electrical test equipment on

any circuit related to the seatbelt

pretensioner and SRS airbag sys-

tems. For required servicing of

the seatbelt pretensioner, see

your nearest SUBARU dealer.

The front sub sensors are located

near the bottom of the radiator and

the side airbag sensor is located in-

side each center pillar and the SRS

airbag control module including the

impact sensors is located under the

center console. If you need service

or repair in those areas or near the

front seatbelt retractors, we recom-

mend that you have an authorized

SUBARU dealer perform the work.

1-24

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Child restraint systems

Infants and small children should always

be placed in an infant or child restraint

system in the rear seat while riding in the

vehicle. You should use an infant or child

restraint system that meets Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standards or Canada Mo-

tor Vehicle Safety Standards, is compati-

ble with your vehicle and is appropriate for

the child’s age and size. All child restraint

systems are designed to be secured in ve-

hicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt por-

tion of a lap/shoulder belt (except those

covered under the section in this manual,

entitled “Installation of child restraint sys-

tems by use of lower and tether anchorag-

es (LATCH)”).

Children could be endangered in an acci-

dent if their child restraints are not proper-

ly secured in the vehicle. When installing

the child restraint system, carefully follow

the manufacturer’s instructions.

According to accident statistics, children

are safer when properly restrained in the

rear seating positions than in the front

seating positions.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces

require that infants and small children be

restrained in an approved child restraint

system at all times while the vehicle is

moving.

Do not perform any of the following

modifications. Such modifications

can interfere with proper operation

of the seatbelt pretensioners.

yAttachment of any equipment

(bush bar, winches, snow plow,

skid plate, etc.) other than genu-

ine SUBARU accessory parts to

the front end.

yModification of the suspension

system or front end structure.

yInstallation of a tire of different

size and construction from the

tires specified on the vehicle plac-

ard attached to the driver’s door

pillar or specified for individual

vehicle models in this Owner’s

Manual.

100607

100125

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

1-25

–

CONTINUED

–

Where to place a child re-

straint system

The following are SUBARU’s recommen-

dations on where to place a child restraint

system in your vehicle.

A: Front passenger’s seat

You should not install a child restraint sys-

tem (including a booster seat) due to the

hazard to children posed by the passen-

ger’s airbag.

B: Rear seat, window-side seating po-

sitions

Recommended positions for all types of

child restraint systems.

In these positions, Automatic/Emergency

Locking Retractor (A/ELR) seatbelts and

lower anchorages (bars) are provided for

installing a child restraint system.

Some types of child restraints might not

be able to be secured firmly due to projec-

tion of the seat cushion.

In this seating position, you should use

only a child restraint system that has a

Never let a passenger hold a child

on his or her lap or in his or her arms

while the vehicle is moving. The

passenger cannot protect the child

from injury in a collision, because

the child will be caught between the

passenger and objects inside the

vehicle.

Additionally, holding a child in your

lap or arms in the front seat exposes

that child to another serious danger.

Since the SRS airbag deploys with

considerable speed and force, the

child could be injured or even killed.

100126

Children should be properly re-

strained at all times. Never allow a

child to stand up, or to kneel on any

seat. Unrestrained children will be

thrown forward during sudden stop

or in an accident and can be injured

seriously.

Additionally, children standing up

or kneeling on or in front of the front

seat are exposed another serious

danger. Since the SRS airbag de-

ploys with considerable speed and

force, the child could be injured or

even killed.

100127

1-26

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

bottom base that fits snugly against the

contours of the seat cushion and can be

securely retained using the seatbelt.

C: Rear seat, center seating position

Installing a child restraint system is not

recommended, although the A/ELR seat-

belt and an upper anchorage (tether an-

chorage) are provided in this position.

Some types of child restraints might not

be able to be secured firmly due to projec-

tion of the seat cushion.

In this seating position, you should use

only a child restraint system that has a

bottom base that fits snugly against the

contours of the seat cushion and can be

securely retained using the seatbelt.

Choosing a child restraint

system

Choose a child restraint system that is ap-

propriate for the child’s age and size

(weight and height) in order to provide the

Put children aged 12 and under in

the rear seat properly restrained at

all times. The SRS airbag deploys

with considerable speed and force

and can injure or even kill children,

especially if they are 12 years of age

and under and are not restrained or

improperly restrained. Because chil-

dren are lighter and weaker than

adults, their risk of being injured

from deployment is greater.

Consequently, be sure to secure

ALL types of child restraint devices

(including forward facing child

seats) in the REAR seats at all times.

You should choose a restraint de-

vice which is appropriate for the

child’s age, height and weight. Ac-

cording to accident statistics, chil-

dren are safer when properly re-

strained in the rear seating posi-

tions than in the front seating posi-

tions.

100608

SINCE YOUR VEHICLE IS

EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER’S

SRS AIRBAG, NEVER INSTALL A

REARWARD FACING CHILD SAFE-

TY SEAT IN THE FRONT PASSEN-

GER’S SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SE-

RIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE

CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILD’S

HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS

AIRBAG.

100502

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

1-27

–

CONTINUED

–

child with proper protection. The child re-

straint system should meet all applicable

requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle

Safety Standards for United States or

Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standards

for Canada. It can be identified by looking

for the label on the child restraint system

or the manufacture’s statement of compli-

ance in the document attached to the sys-

tem. Also it is important for you to make

sure that the child restraint system is com-

patible with the vehicle in which it will be

used.

Installing child restraint sys-

tems with A/ELR seatbelt

TInstalling a rearward facing child re-

straint

1. Place the child restraint system in the

rear seating position.

2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through

or around the child restraint system follow-

yChild restraint systems and seat-

belts can become hot in a vehicle

that has been closed up in sunny

weather; they could burn a small

child. Check the child restraint

system before you place a child in

it.

yDo not leave an unsecured child

restraint system in your vehicle.

Unsecured child restraint sys-

tems can be thrown around inside

of the vehicle in a sudden stop,

turn or accident; they can strike

and injure vehicle occupants as

well as result in serious injuries or

death to the child.

When you install a child restraint

system, follow the manufacturer’s

instructions supplied with it. After

installing the child restraint system,

check to ensure that it is held se-

curely in position. If it is not held

tight and secure, the danger of your

child suffering personal injury in the

event of an accident may be in-

creased.

100503

1-28

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

ing the instructions provided by its manu-

facturer.

3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle

until you hear a click.

4. Take up the slack in the lap belt.

5. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the re-

tractor to change the retractor over from

the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

function. Then, allow the belt to rewind

into the retractor. As the belt is rewinding,

clicks will be heard which indicate the re-

tractor functions as ALR.

6. Push and pull the child restraint system

forward and from side to side to check if it

is firmly secured.

Sometime a child restraint can be more

firmly secured by pushing it down into the

seat cushion and then tightening the seat-

belt.

7. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt

to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR

properly functioning).

8. To remove the child restraint system,

press the release button on the seatbelt

buckle and allow the belt to retract com-

pletely. The belt will return to the ELR

mode.

When the child restraint system is no

longer in use, remove it and restore the

100609

100610

NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD

FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT

PASSENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO

RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH

TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE

CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE

SRS AIRBAG.

100506

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

1-29

–

CONTINUED

–

ELR function of the retractor. That

function is restored by allowing the

seatbelt to retract fully.

TInstalling forward facing child re-

straint

1. Place the child restraint system in the

rear seating position.

2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through

or around the child restraint system follow-

ing the instructions provided by its manu-

facturer.

3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle

until you hear a click.

4. Take up the slack in the lap belt.

5. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the re-

tractor to change the retractor over from

the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

function. Then, allow the belt to rewind

into the retractor. As the belt is rewinding,

clicks will be heard which indicate the re-

tractor functions as ALR.

6. Before having a child sit in the child re-

straint system, move it back and forth and

right and left to check if it is firmly secured.

Sometimes a child restraint can be more

firmly secured by pushing it down into the

seat cushion and then tightening the seat-

belt.

7. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt

to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR

properly functioning).

100136

100137 100138

1-30

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

8. If the child restraint system requires a

top tether, latch the hook onto the top teth-

er anchor and tighten the top tether. See

the “Top tether anchorages” for additional

instructions.

9. To remove the child restraint system,

press the release button on the seatbelt

buckle and allow the belt to retract com-

pletely. The belt will return to the ELR

mode. Unhook the top tether hook from

the top tether anchor.

When the child restraint system is no

longer in use, remove it and restore the

ELR function of the retractor. That

function is restored by allowing the

seatbelt to retract fully.

Installing a booster seat

100139

100611

yChild restraint systems and seat-

belts can become hot in a vehicle

that has been closed up in sunny

weather; they could burn a small

child. Check the child restraint

system before you place a child in

it.

yDo not leave an unsecured child

restraint system in your vehicle.

Unsecured child restraint sys-

tems can be thrown around inside

of the vehicle in a sudden stop,

turn or accident; they can strike

and injure vehicle occupants as

well as result in serious injuries or

death to the child.

When you install a child restraint

system, follow the manufacturer’s

instructions supplied with it. After

installing the child restraint system,

check to ensure that it is held se-

curely in position. If it is not held

tight and secure, the danger of your

child suffering personal injury in the

event of an accident may be in-

creased.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

1-31

–

CONTINUED

–

1. Place the booster seat in the rear seat-

ing position and sit the child on it. The

child should sit well back on the booster

seat.

2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through

or around the booster seat and the child

following the instructions provided by its

manufacturer.

3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle

until you hear a click. Take care not to

twist the seatbelt.

Make sure the shoulder belt is positioned

across the center of child’s shoulder and

that the lap belt is positioned as low as

possible on the child’s hips.

4. To remove the booster seat, press the

release button on the seatbelt buckle and

allow the belt to retract.

100141

yNever use a belt that is twisted or

reversed. In an accident, this can

increase the risk or severity of in-

jury to the child.

yNever place the shoulder belt un-

der the child’s arm or behind the

child’s back. If an accident oc-

curs, this can increase the risk or

severity of injury to the child.

100142

yThe seatbelt should fit snugly in

order to provide full restraint.

Loose fitting belts are not as ef-

fective in preventing or reducing

injury.

yPlace the lap belt as low as possi-

ble on the child’s hips. A high-po-

sitioned lap belt will increase the

risk of sliding under the lap belt

and of the lap belt sliding up over

the abdomen, and both can result

in serious internal injury or death.

yMake sure the shoulder belt is po-

sitioned across the center of

child’s shoulder. Placing the

shoulder belt over the neck may

result in neck injury during sud-

den braking or in a collision.

1-32

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Installation of child restraint

systems by use of lower and

tether anchorages (LATCH)

Some types of child restraint systems can

be installed on the rear seat of your vehi-

cle without use of the seatbelts. Such child

restraint systems are secured to the des-

ignated anchorages provided on the vehi-

cle body.

The lower and tether anchorages are

sometimes referred to as the LATCH sys-

tem (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHil-

dren).

Your vehicle is equipped with four lower

anchorages (bars) and three upper an-

chorages (tether anchorages) for accom-

modating such child restraint systems.

The lower anchorages (bars) are used for

installing a child restraint system only on

the rear seat window-side seating posi-

tions. For each window-side seating posi-

tion, two lower anchorages are provided.

Each anchor bar is located where the seat

cushion meets the seatback.

yChild restraint systems and seat-

belts can become hot in a vehicle

that has been closed up in sunny

weather; they could burn a small

child. Check the child restraint

system before you place a child in

it.

yDo not leave an unsecured child

restraint system in your vehicle.

Unsecured child restraint sys-

tems can be thrown around inside

of the vehicle in a sudden stop,

turn or accident; they can strike

and injure vehicle occupants as

well as result in serious injuries or

death to the child.

When you install a child restraint

system, follow the manufacturer’s

instructions supplied with it. After

installing the child restraint system,

check to ensure that it is held se-

curely in position. If it is not held

tight and secure, the danger of your

child suffering personal injury in the

event of an accident may be in-

creased.

100612

100144

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

1-33

–

CONTINUED

–

The tether anchorages (upper anchorag-

es) are provided for all the seating posi-

tions (center and both window-side ones)

of the rear seat.

You will find marks “ ” at the bottom of

the rear seat seatbacks. These marks in-

dicate the positions of the lower anchorag-

es (bars).

Each lower anchorage is located where

the seat cushion meets the seatback.

1. Use the “ ” marks to locate the two

lower anchorages (bars) for the position

where you want to install the child restraint

system.

2. While following the instructions sup-

plied by the child restraint system manu-

facturer, connect the lower hooks onto the

lower anchorages located at “ ” marks

on the bottom of the rear seatback. When

the hooks are connected, make sure the

adjacent seatbelts are not caught.

100613

100614

100615

100520

1-34

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

3. [If your child restraint system is of a

flexible attachment type (which uses teth-

er belts to connect the child restraint sys-

tem properly to the lower anchorages)]

While pushing the child restraint into the

seat cushion, pull both left and right lower

tether belts up to secure the child restraint

system firmly by taking up the slack in the

belt.

4. Connect the top tether hook to the teth-

er anchorage and firmly tighten the tether.

For information on how to set the top teth-

er, read the following “Top tether anchor-

ages”.

5. Before seating a child in the child re-

straint system, try to move seat back and

forth and left and right to verify that it is

held securely in position.

6. To remove the child restraint system,

follow the reverse procedures of installa-

tion.

If you have any question concerning this

type of child restraint system, ask your

SUBARU dealer.

Top tether anchorages

Your vehicle is equipped with three top

tether anchorages so that a child restraint

system having a top tether can be in-

stalled in the rear seat. When installing a

child restraint system using top tether,

proceed as follows, while observing the in-

structions by the child restraint system

manufacturer.

Since a top tether can provide additional

stability by offering another connection

between a child restraint system and the

vehicle, we recommend that you use a top

tether whenever one is required or avail-

able.

100616 100149

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

1-35

–

CONTINUED

–

TAnchorage location

1) For left seat

2) For center seat

3) For right seat

Three upper anchorages are installed on

the rear edge of the roof.

Open the cover flaps to use the tether an-

chorages.

TTo hook the top tether

1. Remove the head restraint at the seat-

ing position where the child restraint sys-

tem has been installed with the lower an-

chorages or seatbelt; lift up the head re-

straint while pressing the release button.

Store the head restraint in the cargo area.

Avoid placing the head restraint in the

passenger compartment to prevent it from

being thrown around in the passenger

compartment in a sudden stop or a sharp

turn.

2. Open the cover flaps to use the an-

chorages. Fasten the top tether hook of

the child restraint system to the appropri-

ate top tether anchorage.

3. Tighten the top tether securely.

TOP TETHER

100740

100151

100152

100139

1-36

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

*SRS airbag (Supplemental

Restraint System airbag)

*SRS: This stands for supplemental re-

straint system. This name is used be-

cause the airbag system supplements the

vehicle’s seatbelts.

Your vehicle is equipped with a crash

sensing and diagnostic module, which will

record the use of the seatbelt(s) by the

driver and/or front passenger when any of

the SRS frontal and side airbags deploys.

Vehicle with driver’s and

front passenger’s SRS air-

bags and lap/shoulder re-

straints

Your vehicle is equipped with a supple-

mental restraint system in addition to a

lap/shoulder belt at each front seating po-

sition.

The supplemental restraint system (SRS)

consists of two airbag (driver’s and front

passenger’s frontal airbags) or four air-

bags (driver’s and front passenger’s fron-

tal airbags and driver’s and front passen-

ger’s side airbags).

These SRS airbags are designed only

as a supplement to the primary protec-

tion provided by the seatbelt.

The system also controls front seatbelt

pretensioners. For operation instructions

and precautions concerning the seatbelt

pretensioner, see the “Front seatbelt pre-

tensioners” section in this chapter.

Always remove the head restraint

when mounting a child restraint sys-

tem with a top tether. Otherwise, it

may not be possible to fasten the

top tether tightly.

yTo obtain maximum protection in

the event of an accident, the driv-

er and all passengers in the vehi-

cle should always wear seatbelts

when the vehicle is moving. The

SRS airbag is designed only as a

supplement to the primary protec-

tion provided by the seatbelt. It

does not do away with the need to

fasten seatbelts. In combination

with the seatbelts, it offers the

best combined protection in case

of a serious accident.

Not wearing a seatbelt increases

the chance of severe injury or

death in a crash even when the ve-

hicle has the SRS airbag.

For instructions and precautions

concerning the seatbelt system,

see the “Seatbelts” section in this

chapter.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

1-37

–

CONTINUED

–

yDo not sit or lean unnecessarily

close to the SRS airbag. Because

the SRS airbag deploys with con-

siderable speed – faster than the

blink of an eye – and force to pro-

tect in high speed collisions, the

force of an airbag can injure an

occupant whose body is too close

to SRS airbag.

It is also important to wear your

seatbelt to help avoid injuries that

can result when the SRS airbag

contacts an occupant not in prop-

er position such as one thrown

forward during pre-accident brak-

ing.

Even when properly positioned,

there remains a possibility that an

occupant may suffer minor injury

such as abrasions and bruises to

the face or arms because of the

SRS airbag deployment force.

yThe SRS airbags deploy with con-

siderable speed and force. Occu-

pants who are out of proper posi-

tion when the SRS airbag deploys

could suffer very serious injuries.

Because the SRS airbag needs

enough space for deployment, the

driver should always sit upright

and well back in the seat as far

from the steering wheel as practi-

cal while still maintaining full ve-

hicle control and the front passen-

ger should move the seat as far

back as possible and sit upright

and well back in the seat.

yDo not place any objects over or

near the SRS airbag cover or be-

tween you and the SRS airbag. If

the SRS airbag deploys, those ob-

jects could interfere with its prop-

er operation and could be pro-

pelled inside the vehicle and

cause injury.

yPut children aged 12 and under in

the rear seat properly restrained

at all times. The SRS airbag de-

ploys with considerable speed

and force and can injure or even

kill children, especially if they are

12 years of age and under and are

not restrained or improperly re-

strained. Because children are

lighter and weaker than adults,

their risk of being injured from de-

ployment is greater.

100082

1-38

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

NOTE

When you sell your vehicle, we urge

you to explain to the buyer that it is

equipped with SRS airbags by alerting

him or her to the applicable section in

this Owner’s Manual.

Consequently, we strongly rec-

ommend that ALL children (in-

cluding those in child seats and

those that have outgrown child re-

straint devices) sit in the REAR

seat properly restrained at all

times in a child restraint device or

in a seatbelt, whichever is appro-

priate for the child’s age, height

and weight.

Secure ALL types of child re-

straint devices (including forward

facing child seats) in the REAR

seats at all times.

According to accident statistics,

children are safer when properly

restrained in the rear seating posi-

tions than in the front seating po-

sitions.

For instructions and precautions

concerning the child restraint sys-

tem, see the “Child restraint sys-

tems” section in this chapter.

yNEVER INSTALL A REARWARD

FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE

FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS

SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO

THE CHILD BY PLACING THE

CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO

THE SRS AIRBAG.

yNever allow a child to stand up, or

to kneel on the front passenger’s

seat, or never hold a child on your

lap or in your arms. The SRS air-

bag deploys with considerable

force and can injure or even kill

the child.

yWhen the SRS airbag deploys,

some smoke will be released. This

smoke could cause breathing

problems for people with a history

of asthma or other breathing trou-

ble. If you or your passengers

have breathing problems after

SRS airbag deploys, get fresh air

promptly.

yA deploying SRS airbag releases

hot gas. Occupants could get

burned if they come into direct

contact with the hot gas.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

1-39

–

CONTINUED

–

613 15 20 19

100800

1) Airbag control module (including impact

sensors)

2) Frontal airbag module (driver’s side)

3) Frontal airbag module (front passen-

ger’s side)

4) Front sub sensor (left-hand side)

5) Front sub sensor (right-hand side)

6) Side airbag module (driver’s side)

7) Side airbag module (front passenger’s

side)

8) Side airbag sensor (center pillar left-

hand side)

9) Side airbag sensor (center pillar right-

hand side)

10)Airbag wiring (yellow)

11)Seatbelt pretensioner (driver’s side)

12)Seatbelt pretensioner (front passenger’s

side)

13)Seatbelt buckle switch (front passen-

ger’s side)

14)Seatbelt buckle switch (driver’s side)

15)Driver’s seat position sensor

16)Front passenger’s seatbelt tension sen-

sor

17)Front passenger’s occupant detection

system weight sensor

18)Front passenger’s occupant detection

control module

19)Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and

OFF indicator

20)SRS airbag system warning light

1-40

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Subaru advanced frontal air-

bag system

Your vehicle is equipped with a Subaru

advanced frontal airbag system that com-

plies with the new advanced frontal airbag

requirements in the amended Federal Mo-

tor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) No.

208.

The Subaru advanced frontal airbag sys-

tem automatically determines the deploy-

ment force of the driver’s SRS frontal air-

bag at the time of deployment as well as

whether or not to activate the front pas-

senger’s SRS frontal airbag and, if activat-

ed, the deployment force of the SRS fron-

tal airbag at the time of deployment.

Your vehicle has warning labels on the

driver’s and front passenger’s sun visors

beginning with the phrase “EVEN WITH

ADVANCED AIR BAGS” and a tag at-

tached to the glove box lid beginning with

the phrase “Even with Advanced Air

Bags”. Make sure that you carefully read

the instructions on the warning labels and

tag.

Always wear your seatbelt. The subaru

advanced frontal airbag system is a sup-

plemental restraint system and must be

used in combination with a seatbelt. All

occupants should wear a seatbelt or be

seated in an appropriate child restraint

system.

The driver’s SRS frontal airbag is stowed

in the center portion of the steering wheel.

The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

is stowed near the top of the dashboard

under an “SRS AIRBAG” mark.

In a moderate to severe frontal collision,

the driver’s and front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbags deploy and supplement the

seatbelts by reducing the impact on the

driver’s and front passenger’s head and

chest.

100608

NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD

FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT

SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS

INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD

BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD

TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

Never allow a child to stand up, or to

kneel on the front passenger’s seat.

The SRS airbag deploys with con-

siderable force and can injure or

even kill the child.

100126

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

1-41

–

CONTINUED

–

Never hold a child on your lap or in

your arms. The SRS airbag deploys

with considerable force and can in-

jure or even kill the child.

100125

The SRS airbag deploys with con-

siderable speed and force. Occu-

pants who are out of proper position

when the SRS airbag deploys could

suffer very serious injuries. Be-

cause the SRS airbag needs enough

space for deployment, the driver

should always sit upright and well

back in the seat as far from the

steering wheel as practical while

still maintaining full vehicle control

and the front passenger should

move the seat as far back as possi-

ble and sit upright and well back in

the seat.

100155

It is also important to wear your

seatbelt to help avoid injuries that

can result when the SRS airbag con-

tacts an occupant not in proper po-

sition such as one thrown toward

the front of the vehicle during pre-

accident braking.

Do not put any objects over the

steering wheel pad and dashboard.

If the SRS frontal airbag deploys,

those objects could interfere with its

proper operation and could be pro-

pelled inside the vehicle and cause

injury.

100156

1-42

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

TDriver’s SRS frontal airbag

The driver’s SRS frontal airbag uses a

dual stage inflator. The inflator operates in

different ways depending on the severity

of impact, backward-forward adjustment

of the driver’s seat position and whether or

not he/she is wearing the seatbelt.

The backward-forward adjustment of the

driver’s seat position is monitored by the

driver’s seat position sensor under the

driver’s seat.

Whether or not the driver is wearing the

seatbelt is monitored by the seatbelt buck-

le switch.

Observe the following precautions. Failure

to do so may cause the seatbelt buckle

switch and/or the seat position sensor to

malfunction, preventing the Subaru ad-

vanced frontal airbag system from func-

tioning correctly or causing the system to

fail.

yDo not place articles/metal objects or in-

stall any accessory other than a genuine

SUBARU accessory under the driver’s

seat. Do not allow the rear seat occupant

to kick the driver’s seat or push up its bot-

tom surface with his/her feet.

yDo not place a magnet near the seatbelt

buckle or under the driver’s seat.

If the seatbelt buckle switch and/or the

driver’s seat position sensor have failed,

the SRS airbag system warning light will il-

luminate. Although the driver’s SRS fron-

tal airbag can deploy regardless of the

backward-forward adjustment of the driv-

er’s seat position even when the warning

light is on, have the system inspected by

your SUBARU dealer immediately if the

SRS airbag system warning light comes

on.

NOTE

The driver’s SRS side airbag and seat-

belt pretensioner are not controlled by

the Subaru advanced frontal airbag

system.

TFront passenger’s SRS frontal air-

bag

The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

uses a dual stage inflator. The inflator op-

erates in different ways depending on the

severity of impact.

The total load on the seat is monitored by

the occupant detection system’s weight

sensor located under the seat.

The system has another sensor that mon-

itors the tension of the front passenger

seatbelt. Using the total seat load and

seatbelt tension data from the sensors,

the occupant detection system deter-

mines whether the front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbag should or should not be in-

flated.

The occupant detection system may not

inflate the front passenger’s SRS frontal

airbag even when the driver’s SRS frontal

airbag deploys. This is normal.

Observe the following precautions. Failure

to do so may prevent the Subaru ad-

vanced frontal airbag system from func-

tioning correctly or cause the system to

fail.

Do not attach accessories to the

windshield, or fit an extra-wide mir-

ror over the rear view mirror. If the

SRS airbag deploys, those objects

could become projectiles that could

seriously injure vehicle occupants.

100157

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

1-43

–

CONTINUED

–

yDo not apply any strong impact to the

front passenger’s seat such as by kicking.

yDo not spill liquid on the front passen-

ger’s seat. If liquid is spilled, wipe it off im-

mediately.

yDo not remove or disassemble the front

passenger’s seat.

yDo not install any accessory (such as

an audio amplifier) other than a genuine

SUBARU accessory under the front pas-

senger’s seat.

yDo not place anything (shoes, umbrella,

etc.) under the front passenger’s seat.

yThe front passenger’s seat must not be

used with the head restraint removed.

yDo not leave any article including a child

restraint system on the front passenger’s

seat or the seatbelt tongue and buckle en-

gaged when you leave your vehicle.

yDo not place a magnet near the seatbelt

buckle and the seatbelt retractor.

yDo not use front seats with their back-

ward-forward position and seatback not

being locked into place securely. If any of

them are not locked securely, adjust them

again. For adjusting procedure, refer to

the “Manual seat” in the front seats sec-

tion in Chapter 1 in this Owner’s Manual.

(Models equipped with manual seats only)

yIf you use an optional seatbelt extender,

remove it after each use. (Refer to the

“Seatbelt extender” section in this chap-

ter.)

If the seatbelt buckle switch and/or front

passenger’s occupant detection system

have failed, the SRS airbag system warn-

ing light will illuminate. Have the system

inspected by your SUBARU dealer imme-

diately if the SRS airbag system warning

light comes on.

If your vehicle has sustained impact, this

may affect the proper function of the Sub-

aru advanced frontal airbag system. Have

your vehicle inspected at your SUBARU

dealer.

The front passenger’s SRS side airbag

and seatbelt pretensioner are not con-

trolled by the Subaru advanced frontal

airbag system.

TPassenger’s frontal airbag ON and

OFF indicators

1) U.S.-spec. models

2) Canada-spec. models

or :Front passenger’s frontal

airbag ON indicator

or :Front passenger’s frontal

airbag OFF indicator

The front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

and OFF indicators show you the status of

the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag.

The indicators are located next to the

clock in the central portion of the instru-

ment panel.

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position, both the ON and OFF indi-

cators illuminate for 6 seconds during

which time the system is checked. Follow-

ing the system check, both indicators ex-

1212

100547

1-44

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

tinguish for 2 seconds. After this, one of

the indicators illuminates depending on

the status of the front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbag reached by the Subaru ad-

vanced frontal airbag system monitoring.

If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

is activated, the passenger’s frontal airbag

ON indicator will illuminate while the OFF

indicator will remain extinguished.

If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

is deactivated, the passenger’s frontal air-

bag ON indicator will remain extinguished

while the OFF indicator will illuminate.

With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”

position, if both the ON and OFF indica-

tors remain lit or extinguished simulta-

neously even after the system check peri-

od, the system is faulty. Contact your

SUBARU dealer immediately for an in-

spection.

TConditions in which front passen-

ger’s SRS frontal airbag is not acti-

vated

The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

will not be activated when any of the fol-

lowing conditions are met regarding the

front passenger’s seat:

yThe seat is empty.

yThe seat is equipped with a rearward

facing child restraint system and an infant

is restrained with it. (See WARNING that

follows.)

yThe seat is equipped with a forward fac-

ing child restraint system and a small child

is restrained with it. (See WARNING that

follows.)

yThe seat is equipped with a booster

seat and a small child is in the booster

seat. (See WARNING that follows.)

yThe seat is relieved of the occupant

load for a time exceeding the predeter-

mined period.

yThe seat is occupied by a child who has

outgrown a child restraint system (See

WARNING that follows.) or a small adult.

yThe front passenger’s occupant detec-

tion system is faulty.

When the front passenger’s seat is occu-

pied by a child, observe the following pre-

cautions. Failure to do so may increase

the load on the front passenger’s seat, ac-

tivating the front passenger’s SRS frontal

airbag even though that seat is occupied

by a child.

yDo not place any article on the seat oth-

er than the child occupant and a child re-

straint system.

NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD

FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT

PASSENGER’S SEAT EVEN IF THE

FRONT PASSENGER’S SRS FRON-

TAL AIRBAG IS DEACTIVATED. Be

sure to install it in the REAR seat in

a correct manner. Also, it is strongly

recommended that any forward fac-

ing child seat or booster seat be in-

stalled in the REAR seat, and that

even children who have outgrown a

child restraint system be also seat-

ed in the REAR seat. This is because

children sitting in the front passen-

ger’s seat may be killed or severely

injured should the front passenger’s

SRS frontal airbag deploy. REAR

seats are the safest place for chil-

dren.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

1-45

–

CONTINUED

–

yDo not place more than one child on the

seat.

yDo not install any accessory such as a

table or TV onto the seatback.

yDo not store a heavy load in the seat-

back pocket.

yDo not allow the rear seat occupant to

place his/her hands or legs on the front

passenger’s seatback, or allow him/her to

pull the seatback.

VIf the front passenger’s frontal air-

bag ON indicator illuminates and the

OFF indicator extinguishes even

when an infant or a small child is in

a child restraint system (including

booster seat)

Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” posi-

tion if the front passenger’s frontal airbag

ON indicator illuminates and the OFF indi-

cator extinguishes even when an infant or

a small child is in a child restraint system

(including booster seat). Remove the child

restraint system from the seat. By refer-

ring to the child restraint manufacturer’s

recommendations as well as the child re-

straint system installation procedures in

the “Child restraint systems” section in this

chapter, correctly install the child restraint

system. Turn the ignition switch to the

“ON” position and make sure that the front

passenger’s frontal airbag ON indicator

goes out and the OFF indicator comes on.

If the ON indicator remains illuminated

while the OFF indicator extinguishes, take

the following actions.

yEnsure that no article is placed on the

seat other than the child restraint system

and the child occupant.

yEnsure that there is no article left in the

seatback pocket.

yEnsure that the backward-forward posi-

tion and seatback of front passenger’s

seat are locked into place securely by

moving the seat back and forth. (Models

equipped with manual seats only)

If the ON indicator still illuminates while

the OFF indicator extinguishes after tak-

ing relevant corrective actions described

above, relocate the child restraint system

to the rear seat and immediately contact

your SUBARU dealer for an inspection.

NOTE

When a child who has outgrown a child

restraint system or a small adult is

seated in the front passenger’s seat,

the Subaru advanced frontal airbag

system may or may not activate the

front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

depending on the occupant’s seating

posture. If the front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbag is activated (the ON indi-

cator illuminates while the OFF indica-

tor extinguishes), take the following

actions.

yEnsure that no article is placed on

the seat other than the occupant.

yEnsure that there is no article left in

the seatback pocket.

If the ON indicator still illuminates

while the OFF indicator extinguishes

despite the fact that the actions noted

above have been taken, seat the child/

small adult in the rear seat and immedi-

ately contact your SUBARU dealer for

an inspection. Even if the system has

passed the dealer inspection, it is rec-

ommended that on subsequent trips

the child/small adult always take the

rear seat.

Children who have outgrown a child re-

straint system should always wear the

seatbelt irrespective of whether the airbag

is deactivated or activated.

TConditions in which front passen-

ger’s SRS frontal airbag is activated

The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

will be activated for deployment upon im-

pact when any of the following conditions

is met regarding the front passenger’s

seat.

yWhen the seat is occupied by an adult.

1-46

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

yWhen a heavy article is placed on the

seat.

When the front passenger’s seat is occu-

pied by an adult, observe the following

precautions. Failure to do so may lessen

the load on the front passenger’s seat, de-

activating the front passenger’s SRS fron-

tal airbag despite the fact that the seat is

occupied by an adult.

yDo not allow the rear seat occupant to

lift the front passenger’s seat cushion us-

ing his/her feet.

yDo not place any article under the front

passenger’s seat, or squeeze any article

from behind and under the seat. This may

lift the seat cushion.

yDo not squeeze any article between the

front passenger’s seat and side trim/pillar,

door or center console box. This may lift

the seat cushion.

VIf the passenger’s frontal airbag

OFF indicator illuminates and the

ON indicator extinguishes even

when the front passenger’s seat is

occupied by an adult

This can be caused by the adult incorrect-

ly sitting in the front passenger’s seat.

Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” posi-

tion. Ask the front passenger to set the

seatback to the upright position, sit up

straight in the center of the seat cushion,

correctly fasten the seatbelt, position his/

her legs out forward, and adjust the seat

to the rearmost position. Turn the ignition

switch to the “ON” position. If the OFF in-

dicator remains illuminated while the ON

indicator remains extinguished, take the

following actions.

yTurn the ignition switch to the “OFF” po-

sition.

yEnsure that there are no articles, books,

shoes or other objects trapped under the

seat, at the rear of the seat, or on the side

of the seat.

yEnsure that the backward-forward posi-

tion and seatback of front passenger’s

seat are locked into place securely by

moving the seat back and forth. (Models

equipped with manual seats only)

yNext, turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position and wait 6 seconds to allow the

system to complete self-checking. Follow-

ing the system check, both indicators ex-

tinguish for 2 seconds. Now, the ON indi-

cator should illuminate while the OFF indi-

cator remains extinguished.

If the OFF indicator still illuminates while

the ON indicator remains extinguished,

ask the occupant to move to the rear seat

and immediately contact your SUBARU

dealer for an inspection.

TEffect vehicle modifications made

for persons with disabilities may

have on Subaru advanced frontal

airbag system operation (U.S. only)

Changing or moving any parts of the front

seats, seat belts, front bumper, front side

frame, instrument panel, combination

meter, steering wheel, steering column,

tire, suspension or floor panel can affect

the operation of the Subaru advanced air-

bag system. If you have any questions,

you may contact the following Subaru dis-

tributors:

<Continental U.S., Alaska and the District

of Columbia>

Subaru of America, Inc.

Customer Dealer Services Department

P.O. Box 6000

Cherry Hill, NJ 08034-6000

1-800-SUBARU3 (1-800-782-2783)

Schuman Inc, dba Subaru of Hawaii

740 Halekauwila Street Honolulu, HI

96813

808-591-3075

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

1-47

–

CONTINUED

–

<Guam>

Shen’s Corporation dba Prestige

Automobile

491, East Marine Drive, Route 1 Dededo,

Guam

671-633-2698

Trebol Motors

P.O. Box 11204, San Juan, Puerto Rico

00910

787-793-2828

There are currently no Subaru distributors

in any other U.S. territories. If you are in

such an area, please contact the Subaru

distributor or dealer from which you

bought your vehicle.

1-48

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

TOperation

A) Driver’s side

B) Passenger’s side

1) SRS AIRBAGs deploy as soon as a collision occurs.

2) After deployment, SRS AIRBAGs start to deflate immediately so that the driver’s vision is not

obstructed.

100619

The SRS airbag can function only when

the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.

The Subaru advanced frontal airbag sys-

tem is designed to determine the activa-

tion or deactivation condition of the front

passenger’s SRS frontal airbag depend-

ing on the total load on the front passen-

ger’s seat monitored by the front passen-

ger’s occupant detection system weight

sensor. For this reason, only the driver’s

SRS frontal airbag may deploy in the

event of a collision, but this does not mean

failure of the system.

If the front sub sensors inside both front

fenders and the impact sensors in the air-

bag control module detect a predeter-

mined amount of force during a frontal col-

lision, the control module sends signals to

the airbag module(s) (only driver’s module

or both driver’s and front passenger’s

modules) instructing the module(s) to in-

flate the SRS frontal airbag(s). The driv-

er’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal air-

bags use dual stage inflators. The two in-

flators of each airbag are triggered either

sequentially or simultaneously, depending

on the severity of impact, backward-for-

ward adjustment of the driver’s seat posi-

tion and fastening/unfastening of the seat-

belt in the case of the driver’s SRS frontal

airbag and depending on the severity of

impact and the total load on the seat in the

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

1-49

–

CONTINUED

–

case of the front passenger’s SRS frontal

airbag. After deployment, the SRS airbags

immediately start to deflate so that the

driver’s vision is not obstructed. The time

required from detecting impact to the de-

flation of the SRS airbag after deployment

is shorter than the blink of an eye.

Both when only the driver’s SRS frontal

airbag deploys and the driver’s and front

passenger’s SRS frontal airbags deploy,

the driver’s and front passenger’s seatbelt

pretensioners operate at the same time.

Although it is highly unlikely that the SRS

airbag would activate in a non-accident

situation, should it occur, the SRS airbag

will deflate quickly, not obscuring vision

and will not interfere with the driver’s abil-

ity to maintain control of the vehicle.

When the SRS airbag deploys, a sudden,

fairly loud inflation noise will be heard and

some smoke will be released. These oc-

currences are a normal result of the de-

ployment. This smoke does not indicate a

fire in the vehicle.

The driver’s SRS frontal airbag and front

passenger’s SRS frontal airbag are de-

signed to deploy in the event of an acci-

dent involving a moderate to severe fron-

tal collision. They are basically not de-

signed to deploy in lesser frontal impacts

because the necessary protection can be

achieved by the seatbelt alone. Also, they

are basically not designed to deploy in

side or rear impacts or in roll-over acci-

dents because deployment of only the

driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both driver’s

and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbags

would not help the occupant in those situ-

ations. The driver’s and front passenger’s

SRS frontal airbags are designed to func-

tion on a one-time-only basis.

SRS airbag deployment depends on the

level of force experienced in the passen-

ger compartment during a collision. That

level differs from one type of collision to

another, and it may have no bearing on

the visible damage done to the vehicle it-

self.

VExamples of accidents in which the

driver’s/driver’s and front passen-

ger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) will most

likely deploy.

A head-on collision against a thick con-

crete wall at a vehicle speed of 12 to 19

mph (20 to 30 km/h) or higher activates

only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both

driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal

airbags. The airbag(s) will also be activat-

ed when the vehicle is exposed to a frontal

impact similar in fashion and magnitude to

the collision described above.

Do not touch the SRS airbag system

components around the steering

wheel and dashboard with bare

hands right after deployment. Doing

so can cause burns because the

components can be very hot as a re-

sult of deployment.

100159

1-50

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

VExamples of the types of accidents

in which it is possible that the driv-

er’s/driver’s and front passenger’s

SRS frontal airbag(s) will deploy.

Only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or

both driver’s and front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbags may be activated when the

vehicle sustains a hard impact in the un-

dercarriage area from the road surface

(such as when the vehicle plunges into a

deep ditch, is severely impacted or

knocked hard against an obstacle on the

road such as a curb).

VExamples of the types of accidents

in which deployment of the driver’s/

driver’s and front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbag(s) is unlikely to occur.

There are many types of collisions which

might not necessarily require deployment

100160 100161

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

1-51

–

CONTINUED

–

of driver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s

SRS frontal airbag(s). If the vehicle strikes

an object, such as a telephone pole or

sign pole, or if it slides under a truck’s load

bed, or if it sustains an oblique offset fron-

tal impact, the driver’s/driver’s and front

passenger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) may

not deploy depending on the level of acci-

dent forces involved.

VExamples of the types of accidents

in which the driver’s/driver’s and

front passenger’s SRS frontal air-

bag(s) will basically not deploy.

The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbags are designed basically not

to deploy if the vehicle is struck from the

side or from behind, or if it rolls onto its

side or roof, or if it is involved in a low-

speed frontal collision.

1) First impact

2) Second impact

In an accident where the vehicle is impact-

ed more than once, the driver’s and/or

front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag(s)

will deploy only once on the first impact.

Example: In the case of a double collision,

first with another vehicle, then against a

concrete wall in immediate succession,

once either or both of the driver’s and front

passenger’s SRS frontal airbags is/are ac-

tivated on the first impact, it/they will not

be activated on the second impact.

100162

100621

1-52

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

SRS side airbag (if equipped)

The SRS side airbag is stored in the door

side of each front seat seatback, which

bears an “SRS AIRBAG” label.

In a moderate to severe side impact colli-

sion, the SRS side airbag on the impacted

side of the vehicle deploys between the

occupant and the door panel and supple-

ments the seatbelt by reducing the impact

on the occupant’s chest and head.

The SRS side airbag is designed as

only a supplement to the primary

protection provided by the seatbelt.

They do not do away with the need

to fasten seatbelts. It is also impor-

tant to wear your seatbelt to help

avoid injuries that can result when

an occupant is not seated in a prop-

er upright position.

Do not sit or lean unnecessarily

close to either front door. The SRS

side airbag is stored in both front

seat seatbacks next to the door, and

it provides protection by deploying

rapidly (faster than the blink of an

eye) in the event of a side impact

collision. However, the force of SRS

side airbag deployment may cause

injuries if your head or other parts of

the body are too close to the SRS

side airbag.

100164

Do not rest your arm on either front

door or its internal trim. It could be

injured in the event of SRS side air-

bag deployment.

100165

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

1-53

–

CONTINUED

–

100622

100167

Never allow a child to kneel on the

front passenger’s seat facing the

side window or to wrap his/her arms

around the front seat seatback. In

the event of an accident, the force of

the SRS side airbag deployment

could injure the child seriously be-

cause his/her head or arms or other

parts of the body are too close to the

SRS side airbag. Since your vehicle

is also equipped with a passenger’s

SRS frontal airbag, children aged 12

and under should be placed in the

rear seat anyway and should be

properly restrained at all times.

100623

Do not attach accessories to the

door trim or near either SRS side air-

bags and do not place objects near

the SRS side airbags. In the event of

the SRS side airbag deployment,

they could be propelled dangerous-

ly toward the vehicle’s occupants

and cause injuries.

100624

1-54

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

TOperation

1) SRS side airbag deploys as soon as a

collision occurs.

2) SRS side airbag protects the front pas-

senger’s head and chest.

3) After deployment, SRS side airbag

starts to deflate immediately.

The SRS side airbag can function only

when the ignition switch is in the “ON” po-

sition.

The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS

side airbags deploy independently of each

other since each has its own impact sen-

sor. Also, the SRS side airbag deploys in-

dependently of the frontal airbags in the

steering wheel and instrument panel.

An impact sensor is incorporated into

each of the vehicle’s center pillars. If ei-

ther sensor detects a certain predeter-

mined amount of force during a side im-

pact collision, the control module sends a

signal to the side airbag module on the im-

pacted side of the vehicle, instructing it to

inflate the SRS side airbag. Then the side

airbag module produces gas, which in-

stantly inflates the SRS side airbag. After

deployment, the SRS side airbag will de-

flate in a few seconds.

The SRS side airbag deploys even when

no one occupies the seat on the side on

which an impact is applied.

When the SRS side airbag deploys, a sud-

den, fairly loud inflation noise will be heard

and some smoke will be released. These

occurrences are a normal result of the de-

ployment. This smoke does not indicate a

fire in the vehicle.

Do not put any kind of cover or

clothes or other objects over either

front seatback and do not attach la-

bels or stickers to the front seat sur-

face on or near the SRS side airbag.

They could prevent proper deploy-

ment of the SRS side airbag, reduc-

ing protection available to the front

seat’s occupant. 1

100625

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

1-55

–

CONTINUED

–

The SRS side airbag is designed to de-

ploy in the event of an accident involving a

moderate to severe side impact collision.

It is basically not designed to deploy in a

lesser side impact. Also, it is basically not

designed to deploy in frontal or rear im-

pacts because SRS side airbag deploy-

ment would not help the occupant in those

situations.

Each SRS side airbag is designed to func-

tion on a one-time-only basis.

SRS side airbag deployment depends on

the level of force experienced in the pas-

senger compartment during a side impact

collision. That level differs from one type

of collision to another, and it may have no

bearing on the visible damage done to the

vehicle itself.

VExample of the type of accident in

which the SRS side airbag will most

likely deploy.

A severe side impact near the front seat

activates the SRS side airbag.

Do not touch the SRS side airbag

system components around the

front seat seatback with bare hands

right after deployment. Doing so can

cause burns because the compo-

nents can be very hot as a result of

deployment.

100171

1-56

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

VExamples of the types of accidents in which the SRS side airbag is unlikely to

deploy.

100627

1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique

side-on impact.

2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on

impact in an area outside the vicinity

of the passenger compartment.

3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole

or similar object.

4) The vehicle is involved in a side-on

impact from a motorcycle.

5) The vehicle rolls onto its side or roof.

There are many types of collisions which

might not necessarily require SRS side

airbag deployment. In the event of acci-

dents like those illustrated, the SRS side

airbag may not deploy depending on the

level of accident forces involved.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

1-57

–

CONTINUED

–

VExamples of the types of accidents

in which the SRS side airbag will ba-

sically not deploy.

1) The vehicle is involved in frontal collision

with another vehicle (moving or station-

ary).

2) The vehicle is struck from behind.

The SRS side airbag is basically not de-

signed to deploy if the vehicle is involved

in a frontal collision or is struck from be-

hind. Examples of such accidents are il-

lustrated.

1) First impact

2) Second impact

In an accident where the vehicle is struck

from the side more than once, the SRS

side airbag deploys only once on the first

impact.

Example: In the case of a double side im-

pact collision, first with one vehicle and

immediately followed by another from the

same direction, once the SRS side airbag

is activated on the first impact, it will not be

activated on the second.

SRS airbag system monitors

A diagnostic system continually monitors

the readiness of the SRS airbag system

(including front seatbelt pretensioners)

while the vehicle is being driven. The SRS

airbag system warning light “ ” will

show normal system operation by lighting

for approximately 6 seconds when the ig-

nition switch is turned to the “ON” position.

The following components are monitored

by the indicator:

yFront sub sensor (Right-hand side)

yFront sub sensor (Left-hand side)

yAirbag control module (including impact

sensors)

yFrontal airbag module (Driver’s side)

yFrontal airbag module (Front passen-

ger’s side)

100628

100629

100606

1-58

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

ySide airbag sensor (Center pillar right-

hand side)

ySide airbag sensor (Center pillar left-

hand side)

ySide airbag module (Driver’s side)

ySide airbag module (Front passenger’s

side)

ySeatbelt pretensioner (Driver’s side)

ySeatbelt pretensioner (Front passen-

ger’s side)

ySeatbelt buckle switch (Driver’s side)

ySeatbelt buckle switch (Front passen-

ger’s side)

yDriver’s seat position sensor

yFront passenger’s seatbelt tension sen-

sor

yFront passenger’s occupant detection

system weight sensor

yFront passenger’s occupant detection

control module

yFront passenger’s frontal airbag ON

and OFF indicator

yAll related wiring

SRS airbag system servicing

If the warning light exhibits any of

the following conditions, there may

be a malfunction in the seatbelt pre-

tensioners and/or SRS airbag sys-

tem. Immediately take your vehicle

to your nearest SUBARU dealer to

have the system checked. Unless

checked and properly repaired, the

seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS

airbags will not operate properly in

the event of a collision, which may

increase the risk of injury.

yFlashing or flickering of the warn-

ing light

yNo illumination of the warning

light when the ignition switch is

first turned to the “ON” position

yContinuous illumination of the

warning light

yIllumination of the warning light

while driving

yWhen discarding an airbag mod-

ule or scrapping the entire vehicle

damaged by a collision, consult

your SUBARU dealer.

yThe SRS airbag has no user-ser-

viceable parts. Do not use electri-

cal test equipment on any circuit

related to the SRS airbag system.

For required servicing of the SRS

airbag, see your nearest SUBARU

dealer. Tampering with or discon-

necting the system’s wiring could

result in accidental inflation of the

SRS airbag or could make the sys-

tem inoperative, which may result

in serious injury. The wiring har-

nesses of the SRS airbag system

are covered with yellow insulation

and system connectors are yellow

for easy identification.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

1-59

–

CONTINUED

–

In the event that the SRS airbag is de-

ployed, replacement of the system

should be performed only by an autho-

rized SUBARU dealer. When the com-

ponents of the SRS airbag system are

replaced, use only genuine SUBARU

parts.

To ensure their long-term reliability, the

SRS airbags must be inspected by a SUB-

ARU dealer ten years after the date of

manufacture, which is shown on the certi-

fication plate attached to the driver’s door-

jamb.

In the following cases, contact your

SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

yThe front part of the vehicle was in-

volved in an accident in which only the

driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both driv-

er’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal

airbags did not deploy.

yThe pad section of the steering

wheel or front passenger’s frontal air-

bag cover is scratched, cracked, or

otherwise damaged.

In addition, if your vehicle is equipped

with SRS side airbags, contact your

SUBARU dealer as soon as possible in

the following cases.

yEither center pillar or a nearby area

of the vehicle was involved in an acci-

dent in which the SRS side airbag did

not deploy.

yThe fabric or leather of either front

seatback is cut, frayed, or otherwise

damaged.

Precautions against vehicle

modification

If you need service or repair in areas

listed below, have an authorized

SUBARU dealer perform the work.

The SRS airbag control module, im-

pact sensors and airbag modules

are stored in these areas.

yUnder the center console

yInside each front fender

ySteering wheel and column and

nearby areas

yTop of the dashboard on front

passenger’s side and nearby ar-

eas

yEach front seat and nearby area

yInside each center pillar

yTo avoid accidental activation of

the system or rendering the sys-

tem inoperative, which may result

in serious injury, no modifications

should be made to any compo-

nents or wiring of the SRS airbag

system.

This includes following modifica-

tions:

yInstallation of custom steering

wheels

yAttachment of additional trim

materials to the dashboard

yInstallation of custom seats

yReplacement of seat fabric or

leather

yInstallation of additional fabric

or leather on the front seat

1-60

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Always consult your SUBARU dealer if

you want to install any accessory parts on

your vehicle.

yInstallation of additional electri-

cal/electronic equipment such

as a mobile two-way radio on or

near the SRS airbag system

components and/or wiring is

not advisable. This could inter-

fere with proper operation of the

SRS airbag system.

Do not perform any of the following

modifications. Such modifications

can interfere with proper operation

of the SRS airbag system.

yAttachment of any equipment

(brush bar, winches, snow plow,

skid plate, etc.) other than genu-

ine SUBARU accessory parts to

the front end.

yModification of the suspension

system or front end structure.

yInstallation of a tire of different

size and construction from the

tires specified on the vehicle plac-

ard attached to the driver’s door

pillar or specified for individual

vehicle models in this Owner’s

Manual.

yAttachment of any equipment

(side steps or side sill protectors,

etc.) other than genuine SUBARU

accessory parts to the side body.

Keys and doors

Keys ..................................................................... 2-2

Key number ............................................................. 2-2

Immobilizer (if equipped) ................................... 2-3

Security ID plate ..................................................... 2-3

Security indicator light ....................................... 2-3

Key replacement ..................................................... 2-4

Door locks ........................................................... 2-4

Locking and unlocking from the outside ............. 2-4

Locking and unlocking from the inside ................ 2-5

Power door locking switches ............................ 2-6

Key lock-in prevention function ............................ 2-6

Remote keyless entry system ........................... 2-6

Locking the doors .................................................. 2-7

Unlocking the doors ............................................... 2-7

Illuminated entry ..................................................... 2-8

Vehicle finder function ........................................... 2-8

Sounding a panic alarm ......................................... 2-8

Selecting audible signal operation ....................... 2-8

Replacing the battery ............................................. 2-8

Replacing lost transmitters ................................... 2-9

Alarm system ...................................................... 2-12

System operation ................................................... 2-12

Activating and deactivating the alarm system ..... 2-13

If you have accidentally triggered the alarm

system ................................................................... 2-13

Arming the system ................................................. 2-13

Disarming the system ............................................ 2-14

Valet mode .............................................................. 2-15

Passive arming ....................................................... 2-15

Tripped sensor identification ................................ 2-16

Shock sensors (dealer option) .............................. 2-16

Child safety locks ............................................... 2-17

Windows .............................................................. 2-18

Power windows ....................................................... 2-18

Rear gate ............................................................. 2-20

Moonroof (if equipped) ...................................... 2-21

To open the moonroof ............................................ 2-21

To close the moonroof ........................................... 2-21

Anti-entrapment function ....................................... 2-21

2-2

Keys and doors

Keys

Vehicle with immobilizer system

1) Master key (Black)

2) Submaster key (Black)

3) Valet key (Gray)

4) Key number plate

5) Security ID plate

Vehicle without immobilizer system

1) Master key

2) Submaster key

3) Valet key

4) Key number plate

Three types of keys are provided for your

vehicle:

Master key, submaster key and valet key.

The master key and submaster key fit all

locks on your vehicle.

yIgnition switch

yDriver’s door

yGlove box

The valet key fits only the ignition switch

and door lock. You can keep the glove box

locked when you leave your vehicle and

valet key at a parking facility.

Key number

The key number is stamped on the key

number plate attached to the key set.

Write down the key number and keep it in

another safe place, not in the vehicle. This

number is needed to make a replacement

key if you lose your key or lock it inside the

vehicle.

For information on making replacement

keys for vehicles with the immobilizer sys-

tem, refer to the “Immobilizer (if

equipped)” section in this chapter.

12 3

200801

123

200802

Do not attach a large key holder or

key case to either key. If it bangs

against your knees while you are

driving, it could turn the ignition

switch from the ON position to the

ACC or OFF position, thereby stop-

ping the engine.

Keys and doors

2-3

–

CONTINUED

–

Immobilizer (if equipped)

The immobilizer system is designed to

prevent an unauthorized persons from

starting the engine. Only keys registered

with your vehicle’s immobilizer system

can be used to operate your vehicle. Even

if an unregistered key fits into the ignition

switch and can be turned to the “START”

position, the engine will automatically stop

after several seconds.

Each immobilizer key contains a tran-

sponder in which the key’s ID code is

stored. When a key is inserted into the ig-

nition switch and turned to the “ON” posi-

tion, the transponder transmits the key’s

ID code to the immobilizer system’s re-

ceiver. If the transmitted ID code matches

the ID code registered in the immobilizer

system, the system allows the engine to

be started. Since the ID code is transmit-

ted and acted upon almost instantly, the

immobilizer system does not impede nor-

mal starting of the engine.

If the engine fails to start, pull out the key

once before trying again. (Refer to the “Ig-

nition switch” section [chapter 3].)

This device complies with Part 15 of

the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of In-

dustry Canada. Operation is subject to

the following two conditions: (1) This

device may not cause harmful interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept

any interference received, including in-

terference that may cause undesired

operation.

Changes or modifications not express-

ly approved by the party responsible

for compliance could void the user’s

authority to operate the equipment.

To protect your vehicle from theft,

please pay close attention to the fol-

lowing security precautions:

yNever leave your vehicle unattended

with its keys inside.

yBefore leaving your vehicle, close all

windows and lock the doors and rear

gate.

yDo not leave spare keys or any

record of your key number in the vehi-

cle.

Security ID plate

1) Key number plate

2) Security ID plate

The security ID is stamped on the security

ID plate attached to the key set. Write

down the security ID and keep it in another

safe place, not in the vehicle. This number

is needed to make a replacement key if

you lose your key or lock it inside the vehi-

cle.

This number is also needed for replace-

ment or repair of the engine control mod-

ule and immobilizer control module.

Security indicator light

The security indicator light deters potential

thieves by indicating that the vehicle is

yDo not place the key under direct

sunlight or anywhere it may be-

come hot.

yDo not get the key wet. If the key

gets wet, wipe it dry with a cloth

immediately.

200803

2-4

Keys and doors

equipped with an immobilizer system. It

begins flashing approximately 60 seconds

after the ignition switch is turned from the

“ON” position to the “ACC” or “LOCK” po-

sition or immediately after the key is pulled

out.

If the security indicator light does not

flash, the immobilizer system may be

faulty. If this occurs, contact your SUBA-

RU dealer as soon as possible.

In case an unauthorized key is used (e.g.

an imitation key), the security indicator

light comes on.

Even if the security indicator light

flashes irregularly or its fuse blows

(the light does not flash if its fuse is

blown), the immobilizer system will

function normally.

Key replacement

Your key number plate and security ID

plate will be required if you ever need a re-

placement key made. Any new key must

be registered for use with your vehicle’s

immobilizer system before it can be used.

Up to four keys can be registered for use

with one vehicle.

For security, all the keys registered with

your vehicle’s immobilizer system will

have their ID codes erased and re-regis-

tered when a new key is made. Therefore,

all of your vehicle’s keys must be present-

ed when a new key is registered. Any key

that is not re-registered when a new key is

made cannot be used after the other keys

are re-registered. For information on re-

placement keys and on the registration of

keys with your immobilizer system, con-

tact your SUBARU dealer.

Door locks

Locking and unlocking from

the outside

1) Lock

2) Unlock

To lock the driver’s door from the outside

with the key, turn the key toward the rear.

To unlock the door, turn the key toward

the front (Driver’s side only).

Pull the outside door handle to open the

unlocked door.

200804

Keys and doors

2-5

1) Rotate the lock lever rearward.

2) Close the door.

To lock the door from the outside without

the key, rotate the lock lever rearward and

then close the door.

To lock the door from the outside using the

power door locking switch, push the front

side of the switch (“LOCK” side) and then

close the door. In this case, all closed

doors and the rear gate are locked at the

same time.

Always make sure that all doors and the

rear gate are locked before leaving your

vehicle.

NOTE

Make sure that you do not leave the key

inside the vehicle when locking the

doors from the outside without the key.

Locking and unlocking from

the inside

1) Lock

2) Unlock

To lock the door from the inside, rotate the

lock lever rearward. To unlock the door

from the inside, rotate the lock lever for-

ward.

The red mark on the lock lever appears

when the door is unlocked.

Pull the inside door handle to open an un-

locked door.

Always make sure that all doors and the

rear gate are closed before starting to

drive.

200805

Keep all doors locked when you

drive, especially when small chil-

dren are in your vehicle.

Along with the proper use of seat-

belts and child restraints, locking

the doors reduces the chance of be-

ing thrown out of the vehicle in an

accident.

It also helps prevent passengers

from falling out if a door is acciden-

tally opened, and intruders from un-

expectedly opening doors and en-

tering your vehicle.

200806

2-6

Keys and doors

Power door locking switches

1) Lock

2) Unlock

All doors and the rear gate can be locked

and unlocked by the power door locking

switches located at the driver’s side and

the front passenger’s side doors.

To lock all the doors and the rear gate,

push the “LOCK” side of the switch.

To unlock all the doors and the rear gate,

push the “UNLOCK” side of the switch.

When you close the doors after you set

the door locks, the doors remain locked.

NOTE

Make sure that you do not leave the key

inside the vehicle before locking the

doors from the outside using the pow-

er door locking switches.

Key lock-in prevention func-

tion

This function prevents the doors from be-

ing locked with the key still in the ignition

switch.

TBehavior with key lock-in preven-

tion function operative

With the driver’s door open, the doors are

automatically kept unlocked even if the

door locking switch is pushed to the

“LOCK” side.

TBehavior with key lock-in preven-

tion function non-operative

yIf the lock lever is turned to the rear

(“LOCK”) position with the driver’s door

open and the driver’s door is then closed

with the lock lever in that position, the driv-

er’s door is locked.

yIf the spare key is used to lock the driv-

er’s door from the outside of the vehicle,

the door is locked.

When leaving the vehicle, make sure

you are holding the key before locking

the doors.

Remote keyless entry sys-

tem

This device complies with Part 15 of

the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of In-

dustry Canada. Operation is subject to

the following two conditions: (1) This

device may not cause harmful interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept

any interference received, including in-

terference that may cause undesired

operation.

Changes or modifications not express-

ly approved by the party responsible

for compliance could void the user’s

authority to operate the equipment.

Two transmitters are provided for your ve-

200807

yDo not expose the transmitter to

severe shocks, such as those ex-

perienced as a result of dropping

or throwing.

yDo not take the transmitter apart

except when replacing the bat-

tery.

yDo not get the transmitter wet. If it

gets wet, wipe it dry with a cloth

immediately.

Keys and doors

2-7

–

CONTINUED

–

hicle.

The remote keyless entry system has the

following functions.

yLocking and unlocking the doors and

rear gate without a key

ySounding a panic alarm

yArming and disarming the alarm system

(if your vehicle is equipped with an option-

al alarm system). See the next section

“Alarm system” for detailed information.

The operable distance of the keyless entry

system is approximately 30 feet (10

meters). However, this distance will vary

depending on environmental conditions.

The system’s operable distance will be

shorter in areas near a facility or electronic

equipment emitting strong radio waves

such as a power plant, broadcast station,

TV tower, or remote controller of home

electronic appliances.

The keyless entry system does not oper-

ate when the key is inserted in the ignition

switch to prevent accidental lockout.

: LOCK/ARM button

Press to Lock all doors.

Press and Hold to activate panic

alarm.

Press three times in a five-second

period to use vehicle finder func-

tion.

: UNLOCK/DISARM button

1) Press once to Unlock driver’s

door.

2) Press a second time to Unlock

all other doors and rear gate.

Locking the doors

Briefly press the “ ” button (for less

than two seconds) to lock all doors and

rear gate. An electronic chirp will sound

once and the turn signal lights will flash

once.

If any of the doors or the rear gate is not

fully closed, an electronic chirp will sound

five times and the turn signal lights will

flash five times to alert you that the doors

or the rear gate are not properly closed.

When you close the door, it will automati-

cally lock.

If the “ ” button is pressed for two

seconds or longer, the panic alarm will

sound. When locking the doors in nor-

mal circumstances, press the “ ”

button for less than two seconds. For

details on the panic alarm, refer to

“Sounding a panic alarm”.

Unlocking the doors

Briefly press the “ ” button (for less

than two seconds) to unlock the driver’s

door. An electronic chirp will sound twice

and the turn signal lights will flash twice.

To unlock all other doors and the rear

gate, briefly press the “ ” button a

second time within 5 seconds.

If the interval between the first and sec-

ond presses of the “ ” button (for

unlocking of all of the doors and the

rear gate) is extremely short, the sys-

tem may not respond.

2-8

Keys and doors

Illuminated entry

The interior (dome and cargo area) light

will illuminate when the “ ” button is

pressed. This light stay illuminated for ap-

proximately 30 seconds if any of the doors

or the rear gate is not opened.

If the “ ” button is pressed before 30

seconds have elapsed, this light will go

out.

To activate this function, set the following

interior light switches to the indicated po-

sitions:

Dome light: Middle position

Cargo area light: DOOR position

Vehicle finder function

Use this function to find your vehicle

parked among many vehicles in a large

parking lot. Provided you are within 30

feet (10 meters) of the vehicle, pressing

the “ ” button three times in a five-sec-

ond period will cause your vehicle’s horn

to sound once and its turn signal lights to

flash three times.

If the interval between presses is too

short when you press the “ ” button

three times, the system may not re-

spond to the signals from the remote

transmitter.

Sounding a panic alarm

To activate the alarm, keep the “ ” but-

ton pressed for more than two seconds.

The horn will sound and the turn signal

lights will flash.

To deactivate it, press any button on the

remote transmitter. Unless a button on the

remote is pressed, the alarm will be deac-

tivated after approximately 30 seconds.

Selecting audible signal op-

eration

Using an electronic chirp, the system will

give you an audible signal when the doors

lock and unlock. If desired, you may turn

the audible signal off.

Do the following to deactivate the audible

signal. You can also use the same steps

to restore the function.

1. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut all

doors and the rear gate.

2. Open the driver’s door, then remove

the key from the ignition switch.

3. Hold down the “UNLOCK” side of the

power door locking switch.

4. While holding down the “UNLOCK”

side of the power door locking switch, in-

sert the key into the ignition switch and re-

move it again at least 6 times within 10

seconds after Step 3.

5. While still holding down the “UNLOCK”

side of the power door locking switch,

close the driver’s door once within 10 sec-

onds after Step 4.

6. The turn signal lights flashes 3 times to

indicate completion of the setting.

If you do not close the driver’s door

within 10 seconds after Step 4, a flash

of the turn signal lights will signal time-

out. If this happens, repeat the whole

procedure from Step 1.

You may have the above settings done by

your SUBARU dealer.

Replacing the battery

When the transmitter battery begins to get

weak, transmitter range will begin to de-

crease. Replace the battery as soon as

possible.

yDo not let dust, oil or water get on

or in the transmitter when replac-

ing the battery.

yBe careful not to damage the

printed circuit board in the trans-

mitter when replacing the battery.

Keys and doors

2-9

–

CONTINUED

–

To replace the battery:

1. Open the transmitter case using a flat-

head screwdriver.

2. Separate the case.

3. Remove the old battery from the hold-

er.

1) Negative (–) side facing up

4. Replace with a new battery (Type

CR2025 or equivalent) making sure to in-

stall the new battery with the negative (–)

side facing up.

5. Reinstall the back half of the transmit-

ter case by snapping it back on.

After the battery is replaced, the trans-

mitter must be synchronized with the

keyless entry system’s control unit.

Press either the “ ” or “ ” button

six times

to synchronize the unit.

Replacing lost transmitters

If you lose a transmitter or want to pur-

chase additional transmitters (up to four

can be programmed), you should re-pro-

gram all of your transmitters for security

reasons. It is recommended that you have

your dealer program all of your transmit-

ters into your system.

TProgramming the transmitters

The keyless entry system is equipped with

a special code learning feature that allows

you to program new transmitter codes into

the system or to delete old ones. The sys-

tem can learn up to four unique transmitter

codes. The four transmitter codes may be

the same or different.

Programming transmitter codes into

system:

Bag containing transmitter

200716

200717

200718

2-10

Keys and doors

Transmitter circuit board

To register a new transmitter with the key-

less entry system, it is necessary to pro-

gram the transmitter’s code (identification

number) into the system. A label showing

the code is affixed to the bag containing

the transmitter, and another is affixed to

the circuit board inside the transmitter. If

there is no bag, open the transmitter case

and make a note of the eight-digit number.

Program the number into the system in

accordance with the following procedure:

1. Firmly close the doors and the rear

gate.

2. Open the driver’s door, sit on the driv-

er’s seat, and close the door.

3. Perform the following steps within 45

seconds.

1)Open and close the driver’s door

once.

1) ON

2) LOCK

2)Insert the key into the ignition switch,

then turn it from the “LOCK” position to

the “ON” position 10 times within 15

seconds.

yWhen you complete step 2), an elec-

tronic tone will sound once.

yIf you do not perform steps 1) and 2)

within 45 seconds, an error will occur.

An electronic tone will not sound. In

this event, perform the whole proce-

dure again beginning with part 1.

4. Open and close the door once within

15 seconds.

yWhen part 4 of the procedure is com-

pleted, an electronic tone will sound

for 30 seconds.

yIf you do not perform the operations

in part 4 within 15 seconds, an error

will occur and the electronic tone will

not sound. In this event, perform the

registration steps again beginning with

part 3 of the procedure.

200719 200813

200814

Keys and doors

2-11

–

CONTINUED

–

5. Before the electronic tone stops sound-

ing, push the “LOCK” side of the power

door lock switch the same number of

times as the leftmost digit of the transmit-

ter code. For example, push the lock

switch eight times if the leftmost digit of

the code is 8.

NOTE

yThe electronic tone will stop sound-

ing when you start entering the num-

ber.

yIf you do not start entering the num-

ber using the lock switch before the

electronic tone stops sounding, an er-

ror will occur. In this event, perform the

registration steps again beginning with

part 3 of the procedure.

yIf the interval between one push of

the switch and the next exceeds five

seconds, an error will occur. In this

event, perform the procedure again be-

ginning with part 4. If an error occurs

six times, perform the procedure again

starting with part 3.

6. When you have finished entering the

number, push the “UNLOCK” side of the

lock switch within five seconds.

NOTE

yAn electronic tone will sound.

yIf you push the “UNLOCK” side of

the lock switch when more than five

seconds have passed, an error will oc-

cur. In this event, perform the proce-

dure again beginning with part 4. If an

error occurs six times, perform the pro-

cedure again starting with part 3.

7. Perform parts 5 and 6 of the procedure

for each of the remaining digits of the

transmitter code beginning with the sec-

ond digit (counting from the left) and fin-

ishing with the eighth digit.

NOTE

yWhen you finish entering the eighth

digit, an electronic tone will sound for

30 seconds.

yIf the interval between one push of

the switch and the next exceeds five

seconds, an error will occur. In this

event, perform the procedure again be-

ginning with part 4. If an error occurs

six times, perform the procedure again

starting with part 3.

8. Before the electronic tone stops sound-

ing, use the power door lock switch to re-

enter the transmitter code beginning with

the leftmost digit.

NOTE

If you do not start entering the number

using the lock switch before the elec-

tronic tone stops sounding, an error

will occur. In this event, perform the

procedure again beginning with part 3.

9. When you have finished entering the

code a second time, an electronic tone will

sound for one second to indicate comple-

tion of registration, provided the code en-

200812

200827

2-12

Keys and doors

tered the second time is identical to that

entered the first time.

NOTE

If the code entered the second time is

not identical to the code entered the

first time, an error will occur. In this

event, perform the procedure again be-

ginning with part 5. If an error occurs

five times, perform the procedure

again starting with part 3.

10.If you wish to program another trans-

mitter code into the system (up to four

transmitter codes can be programmed

into the system), perform the procedure

beginning with part 4. When you have fin-

ished programming all of the necessary

transmitter codes into the system, remove

the key from the ignition switch.

11.Test every registered transmitter to

confirm correct operation.

TDeleting old transmitter codes

The control unit of the keyless entry sys-

tem has four memory locations to store

transmitter codes, giving it the ability to

operate with up to four transmitters. When

you lose a transmitter, the lost transmit-

ter’s code remains in the memory. For se-

curity reasons, lost transmitter codes

should be deleted from the memory.

To delete old transmitter codes, program

four transmitter codes into the system. If

you have only one current transmitter,

program it four times. If you have two cur-

rent transmitters, program each one twice.

If you have three current transmitters, pro-

gram two of them once and the third one

twice. This process will leave only current

transmitter codes in the system’s memory.

NOTE

Make sure no one else is operating

their keyless entry system within range

of your vehicle when programming

transmitters. If someone else were to

operate their remote transmitter while

you are programming your transmit-

ters, it is possible that their transmitter

code will be programmed into your

system, allowing them unauthorized

access to your vehicle.

Alarm system

The alarm system helps to protect your

vehicle and valuables from theft. The horn

sounds and the turn signal lights flash if

someone attempts to break into your vehi-

cle. The starter motor is also interrupted to

prevent starting the vehicle without a key.

The system can be armed and disarmed

with the remote transmitter.

The system does not operate when the

key is inserted into the ignition switch.

Your vehicle’s alarm system has been set

for activation at the time of shipment from

the factory. You can set the system for de-

activation yourself or have it done by your

SUBARU dealer.

System operation

The alarm system will give the following

alarm when triggered:

yThe vehicle’s horn will sound and the

turn signal lights will flash for 30 seconds.

yIf any door or the rear gate remains

open after the 30-second period, the horn

will continue to sound for a maximum of 3

minutes. If the door and the rear gate are

closed while the horn is sounding, the

horn will stop sounding with a delay of up

to 30 seconds.

Keys and doors

2-13

–

CONTINUED

–

The alarm is triggered by:

yOpening a door or the rear gate.

yPhysical impact to the vehicle, such as

forced entry (only vehicles with shock sen-

sors (dealer option))

Activating and deactivating

the alarm system

To change the setting of your vehicle’s

alarm system for activation or deactiva-

tion, do the following.

1. Disarm the alarm system (see “Disarm-

ing the system” in this section).

2. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut all

doors and the rear gate.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” po-

sition.

4. Hold down the UNLOCK side of the

driver’s power door locking switch, open

the driver’s door within the following 1 sec-

ond, and wait 10 seconds without releas-

ing the switch. The setting will then be

changed as follows:

If the system was previously activated:

The horn sounds twice, indicating that the

system is now deactivated.

If the system was previously deactivated:

The horn sounds once, indicating that the

system is now activated.

NOTE

You may have the above setting

change done by your SUBARU dealer.

If you have accidentally trig-

gered the alarm system

TTo stop the alarm

Do any of the following operations:

yPress any button on the remote trans-

mitter.

yCycle the ignition switch from the

“LOCK” to “ON” position three times within

5 seconds.

Arming the system

TTo arm the system using remote

transmitter

1. Close all windows and the moonroof (if

so equipped).

2. Remove the key from the ignition

switch.

3. Open the doors and get out of the vehi-

cle.

4. Make sure that the engine hood is

locked.

5. Close all doors and the rear gate.

: Press to Arm the system.

: Press to Disarm the system.

Security indicator light

6. Briefly press the “ ” button (for less

200815

2-14

Keys and doors

than two seconds). All doors and the rear

gate will lock, an electric chirp will sound

once, the turn signal lights will flash once,

and the indicator lights will start flashing

rapidly. After rapid flashing for 30 seconds

(standby time), the indicator lights will

then flash slowly (twice approximately ev-

ery two seconds), indicating that the sys-

tem has been armed for surveillance.

If any of the doors or the rear gate is not

fully closed, an electronic chirp sounds

five times, the turn signal lights flash five

times to alert you that the doors or the rear

gate are not properly closed. When you

close the door, the system will automati-

cally arm and doors will automatically

lock.

TTo arm the system using power

door locking switches

1. Close all windows.

2. Remove the key from the ignition

switch.

3. Open the doors and get out of the vehi-

cle.

4. Make sure that the engine hood is

locked.

5. Close the doors and the rear gate but

leave only the driver’s door or the front

passenger’s door open.

6. Push the front side (“LOCK” side) of

the power door locking switch to set the

door locks.

7. Close the door. An electronic chirp will

sound once, the turn signal lights will flash

once, and the indicator lights will start

flashing rapidly. After rapid flashing for 30

seconds (standby time), the indicator

lights will then flash slowly (twice approxi-

mately every two seconds), indicating that

the system has been armed for surveil-

lance.

yThe system can be armed even if the

engine hood, the windows and/or

moonroofs are opened. Always make

sure that they are fully closed before

arming the system.

yThe 30-second standby time can be

eliminated if you prefer. Have it per-

formed by your SUBARU dealer.

yThe system is in the standby mode

for a 30-second period after locking the

doors with the remote transmitter. The

security indicator light will flash at

short intervals during this period.

yIf any of the following actions is done

during the standby period, the system

will not switch to the surveillance state.

yDoors are unlocked using the re-

mote transmitter.

yAny door or the rear gate is

opened.

yIgnition switch is turned to the

“ON” position.

yThe engine does not start even when

the ignition switch is turned to the

“START” position once the alarm sys-

tem has been triggered.

Disarming the system

Briefly press the “ ” button (for less

than two seconds) on the remote transmit-

ter. The driver’s door will unlock, an elec-

tronic chirp will sound twice, the turn sig-

nal lights will flash twice and the indicator

light will go off.

200883

Keys and doors

2-15

–

CONTINUED

–

NOTE (Models with immobiliz-

er)

If your vehicle is equipped with an im-

mobilizer, the immobilizer’s function

will cause the security indicator light to

flash (approximately once every three

seconds) even after the system is dis-

armed.

The system can be disarmed by the fol-

lowing method, too.

yCycle the ignition switch from the

“LOCK” to the “ON” position three

times within 5 seconds.

TEmergency disarming

If you cannot disarm the system using the

transmitter (i.e. the transmitter is lost, bro-

ken or the transmitter battery is too weak),

you can disarm the system without using

the transmitter.

1. Unlock the door with the key and then

open the door.

2. Insert the key into the ignition switch

and cycle it from the “LOCK” to the “ON”

position three times within 5 seconds.

Valet mode

When you choose the valet mode, the se-

curity system does not operate. In valet

mode, the remote transmitter is used only

for locking and unlocking the doors and

rear gate and panic activation.

To enter the valet mode, change the set-

ting of your vehicle’s alarm system for de-

activation mode. (Refer to “Activating and

deactivating the alarm system” in this sec-

tion.) The security indicator light will con-

tinue to flash once every three seconds in-

dicating that the system is in the valet

mode (only vehicle with an immobilizer).

To exit valet mode, change the setting of

your vehicle’s alarm system for activation

mode. (Refer to “Activating and deactivat-

ing the alarm system” in this section.)

NOTE

If your vehicle is not equipped with an

immobilizer, the security indicator light

does not flash during the valet mode.

Passive arming

When passive arming mode has been

programmed by the dealer, arming of the

system is automatically accomplished

without using the remote transmitter. Note

that in this mode, DOORS MUST BE

MANUALLY LOCKED.

TTo enter the passive mode

If you wish to program the passive arming

mode, have it done by your SUBARU

dealer.

TArming the system

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” po-

sition.

1) ON

2) LOCK

In passive mode, the system will au-

tomatically activate the alarm but

WILL NOT automatically lock the

doors. In order to lock the doors you

must either lock them as indicated

in the following step 4 or with the

key once they have been closed.

Failure to lock the doors manually

will result in a higher security risk.

200816

2-16

Keys and doors

2. Turn the ignition switch from “ON” to

“LOCK” position and remove the key from

the ignition switch.

3. Open the doors and get out of the vehi-

cle.

4. Before closing the doors, lock all doors

with the inside door lock levers.

5. Close the doors. The system will auto-

matically arm after one minute.

In the passive mode, the system can also

be armed with the remote transmitter or

with the power door locking switches. If

the remote transmitter or power door lock-

ing switch is used to lock the vehicle, arm-

ing will take place immediately regardless

of whether or not the passive mode has

been selected.

TDisarming the system

To disarm the system, briefly press the

“ ” button on the transmitter.

Tripped sensor identification

The security indicator light flashes when

the alarm system has been triggered. Al-

so, the number of flashes indicates the lo-

cation of unauthorized intrusion or the se-

verity of impact on the vehicle.

yWhen the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position, the indicator light will light

for 1 second and then flash as follows:

When a door or rear gate was opened:

5 times

When the ignition switch was turned to

the “ON” position: 3 times

When a strong impact or multiple im-

pacts were sensed: twice (only vehicles

with shock sensors (dealer option))

When a light impact was sensed: once

(only vehicles with shock sensors (deal-

er option))

Any of the above indicator light flash-

ings will recur each time the ignition

switch is turned to the “ON” position.

Rearming the alarm system cancels

the flashing.

Shock sensors (dealer op-

tion)

The shock sensors trigger the alarm sys-

tem when they sense impacts applied to

the vehicle and when any of their electric

wires is cut. The alarm system causes the

horn to sound and the turn signal lights to

flash for a short time when the sensed im-

pact is weak, but it warns of a strong im-

pact or multiple impacts by sounding the

horn and flashing the turn signal lights,

both lasting approximately 30 seconds.

If you desire, your SUBARU dealer can

connect them and set them for activation

or deactivation.

yThe shock sensors are not always

able to sense impacts caused by

breaking in, and cannot sense an im-

pact that does not cause vibration

(such as breaking the glass using a

rescue hammer).

yThe shock sensors may sense vibra-

tion like those shown below and trigger

the alarm system. Select the settings of

the alarm system and shock sensors

appropriately depending on where you

usually park your vehicle.

Example:

Vibration from a construction site

Vibration in a multistory parking ga-

200817

Keys and doors

2-17

rage

Vibration from trains

yYou can have the sensitivity of the

shock sensors adjusted to your prefer-

ence by your SUBARU dealer.

Child safety locks

1) Lock

2) Unlock

Each rear door has a child safety lock that

prevents the doors from being opened

even if the inside door handle is pulled.

When the child safety lock lever is in the

lock position, the door cannot be opened

from inside regardless of the position of

the inner door handle lock lever. The door

can only be opened from the outside.

Always use the child safety lock

whenever a child rides in the rear

seat. Serious injury could result if a

child accidentally opened the door

and fell out.

200818

2-18

Keys and doors

Windows

Power windows

The power windows operate only when

the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.

TDriver’s side switches

1) Lock switch

2) For driver’s window (with one-touch auto

down feature)

3) For front passenger’s window

4) For rear left window

5) For rear right window

All door windows can be controlled by the

power window switch cluster at the driver

side door.

VOperating the driver’s window

1) Open

2) Automatically open

3) Close

To open:

Push the switch down lightly and hold it.

The window will open as long as the

switch is held.

This switch also has a one-touch auto

down feature that allows the window to be

opened fully without holding the switch.

Push the switch down until it clicks and re-

lease it, and the window will fully open. To

stop the window halfway, pull the switch

up lightly.

To close:

Pull the switch up lightly and hold it. The

window will close as long as the switch is

To avoid serious personal injury

caused by entrapment, you must do

the following.

yWhen operating the power win-

dows, be extremely careful to pre-

vent anyone’s fingers, arms, neck

or head from being caught in the

window.

yAlways lock the passengers’ win-

dows using the lock switch when

children are riding in the vehicle.

yBefore leaving the vehicle, always

remove the key from the ignition

switch for safety and never allow

an unattended child to remain in

the vehicle. Failure to follow this

procedure could result in injury to

a child operating the power win-

dow.

200819

2200820

Keys and doors

2-19

held.

VOperating the passengers’ windows

To open the passengers’ windows, push

the appropriate switch down and hold it

until the window reaches the desired posi-

tion.

To close the window, pull the switch up

and hold it until it reaches the desired po-

sition.

VLocking the passengers’ windows

1) Lock

2) Unlock

To lock the passengers’ windows, push

the lock switch. When the lock switch is in

the “LOCK” position, the passengers’ win-

dows cannot be opened or closed.

Press the switch again to cancel the pas-

sengers’ window locking.

TPassengers’ side switches

To open the window, push the switch

down and hold it until the window reaches

the desired position.

To close the window, pull the switch up

and hold it until the window reaches the

desired position.

When the lock switch on the power win-

dow switch cluster, located on the driver’s

side door, is in the “LOCK” position, the

passengers’ windows cannot be operated

with the passengers’ switches.

200191

200821

2-20

Keys and doors

Rear gate The rear gate can be locked and unlocked

using either the keyless entry system or

the power door locking switches.

Refer to the “Power door locking switches”

and “Remote keyless entry system” sec-

tions in this chapter.

To open the rear gate, first unlock the rear

gate lock then pull the outside handle up.

Then, hold the rear gate and raise it as

high as it will go.

To close the rear gate, lower it slowly and

push down firmly until the latch engages.

The rear gate can be lowered easily if you

pull down holding the recessed grip.

NOTE

If the rear gate cannot be unlocked due

to a discharged battery, a fault in the

door locking/unlocking system or oth-

er causes, you can unlock it by manu-

ally operating the rear gate lock release

lever.

For the procedure, refer to “Rear gate –

if the rear gate cannot be unlocked” in

chapter 9 “In case of emergency”.

yDo not attempt to shut the rear

gate while holding the inside han-

dle. Also avoid closing the rear

gate by pulling on the inside han-

dle from inside the cargo space.

There is a danger of your hand be-

ing caught and injured.

yTo prevent dangerous exhaust

gas from entering the vehicle, al-

ways keep the rear gate closed

while driving.

yDo not jam a plastic bag in or

place cellophane tape on the rear

gate stays or scratch the stays

while loading or unloading cargo.

That could cause leakage of gas

from the stays, which may result

in their inability to hold the rear

gate open.

yBe careful not to hit your head or

face on the rear gate when open-

ing or closing the rear gate and

when loading or unloading cargo.

200822

200194

Keys and doors

2-21

–

CONTINUED

–

Moonroof (if equipped)

1) Open/close switch

2) Open

3) Close

The moonroof operates only when the ig-

nition switch is in the “ON” position.

To open the moonroof

Push and quickly release the rear part of

the switch to open the moonroof. The sun

shade will also be opened together with

the moonroof. The moonroof will stop at a

position 20 in (50 cm) away from the fully

closed position. Push the switch again to

open the moonroof completely.

To stop the moonroof at a desired posi-

tion, simply push the opposite side of the

switch.

After washing the vehicle or after it rains,

wipe away water on the roof prior to open-

ing the moonroof to prevent drops of water

from falling into the passenger compart-

ment.

To close the moonroof

Push and quickly release the front part of

the switch to close the moonroof. The

moonroof will stop at a position 8 in (20

cm) away from the fully closed position.

Push the switch again to close the moon-

roof completely.

To stop the moonroof at a desired posi-

tion, simply push the opposite side of the

switch.

Anti-entrapment function

When the moonroof senses an object

trapped between its glass and the vehi-

cle’s roof during closure, it automatically

moves back by 6 in (15 cm) from that point

yNever let anyone’s hands, arms,

head or any objects protrude from

the moonroof. A person could be

seriously injured if the vehicle

stops suddenly or turns sharply

or if the vehicle is involved in an

accident.

To avoid serious personal injury

caused by entrapment, you must

do the following.

yBefore closing the moonroof,

make sure that no one’s hands,

arms, head or other objects will be

accidentally caught in the moon-

roof.

yBefore leaving the vehicle, always

remove the key from the ignition

switch for safety and never allow

an unattended child to remain in

the vehicle. Failure to follow this

procedure could result in injury to

a child operating the moonroof.

yNever try to check the anti-entrap-

ment function by deliberately

placing part of your body in the

moonroof.

yDo not sit on the edge of the open

moonroof.

yDo not operate the moonroof if

falling snow or extremely cold

conditions have caused it to

freeze shut.

200823

2-22

Keys and doors

and then stops. The anti-entrapment func-

tion may also be activated by a strong

shock on the moonroof even when there is

nothing trapped.

yFor the sake of safety, it is recom-

mended that you avoid driving with the

moonroof fully opened.

yDriving with the moonroof fully open

can cause an annoying sound to gen-

erate at high speeds. If such a condi-

tion has been encountered, use the

moonroof at the initial stop position of

20 in (50 cm).

yIf the moonroof cannot be closed

through switch operation because of

system failure, it can be closed manu-

ally using a hex-head wrench. For the

procedure, refer to “Moonroof – if the

moonroof cannot be closed” in Chap-

ter 9 “In case of emergency”.

TSun shade

The sun shade can be slid forward or

backward by hand while the moonroof is

closed.

If the moonroof is opened, the sun shade

also moves back.

200196

Instruments and controls

Ignition switch .................................................... 3-3

LOCK ....................................................................... 3-3

ACC .......................................................................... 3-4

ON ............................................................................ 3-4

START ...................................................................... 3-4

Key reminder chime ............................................... 3-5

Ignition switch light (if equipped) ......................... 3-5

Key interlock release (AT vehicles only) .............. 3-5

Hazard warning flasher ...................................... 3-6

Meters and gauges ............................................. 3-6

Speedometer ........................................................... 3-6

Odometer/Trip meter .............................................. 3-6

Tachometer ............................................................. 3-7

Fuel gauge ............................................................... 3-7

Temperature gauge ................................................ 3-8

Outside temperature indicator .............................. 3-8

Warning and indicator lights ............................. 3-9

Seatbelt warning light and chime .......................... 3-9

SRS airbag system warning light .......................... 3-10

Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF

indicators .............................................................. 3-11

CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction

indicator lamp ....................................................... 3-11

Charge warning light .............................................. 3-12

Oil pressure warning light ..................................... 3-12

AT OIL TEMPerature warning light

(AT vehicles) ......................................................... 3-12

ABS warning light ................................................... 3-13

Brake system warning light ................................... 3-13

Door open warning lights ...................................... 3-14

Low fuel warning light ............................................ 3-14

All-Wheel Drive warning light (AT vehicles) ......... 3-15

Shift position indicator (AT vehicles) ................... 3-15

Turn signal indicator lights .................................... 3-15

High beam indicator light ....................................... 3-15

Cruise control indicator light ................................. 3-15

Cruise control set indicator light .......................... 3-16

Clock .................................................................... 3-16

Light control switch ........................................... 3-17

Headlights ............................................................... 3-17

High/low beam change (dimmer) .......................... 3-17

Headlight flasher ..................................................... 3-18

Daytime running light system ............................... 3-18

Turn signal lever ................................................. 3-19

Illumination brightness control ......................... 3-19

Headlight beam leveler (Canada-spec.

2.5XT) ............................................................... 3-20

Parking light switch ........................................... 3-20

Front fog light button ......................................... 3-20

Wiper and washer ............................................... 3-21

Windshield wiper and washer switches ............... 3-22

Rear window wiper and washer switch ................ 3-23

Windshield wiper deicer (if equipped) .............. 3-24

Rear window defogger button ........................... 3-24

Mirrors ................................................................. 3-25

Inside mirror ............................................................ 3-25

Outside mirrors ....................................................... 3-27

Instruments and controls

Tilt steering wheel .............................................. 3-28

Horn ..................................................................... 3-29

Instruments and controls

3-3

–

CONTINUED

–

Instruments and c ontrols

Ignition switch

The ignition switch has four positions:

LOCK, ACC, ON and START.

yKeep the ignition switch in the

“LOCK” position when the engine is

not running.

yUsing electrical accessories for a

long time with the ignition switch in the

“ON” or “ACC” position can cause the

battery to go dead.

If the ignition switch will not move from

the “LOCK” position to the “ACC” po-

sition, turn the steering wheel slightly

to the left and right as you turn the ig-

nition switch.

yIf the key is attached to a keyholder

or to a large bunch of other keys, cen-

trifugal force may act on it as the vehi-

cle moves, resulting in unwanted turn-

ing of the ignition switch. Also, if a

large keyholder is attached to the key,

your knees or hands may accidentally

touch it in a way that turns the ignition

switch.

LOCK

The key can only be inserted or removed

in this position. The ignition switch will lock

the steering wheel when you remove the

key.

If turning the key is difficult, turn the steer-

ing wheel slightly to the right and left as

you turn the key.

TAutomatic transmission vehicles

yNever turn the ignition switch to

“LOCK” while the vehicle is being

driven or towed because that will

lock the steering wheel, prevent-

ing steering control. And when

the engine is turned off, it takes a

much greater effort than usual to

steer.

yBefore leaving the vehicle, always

remove the key from the ignition

switch for safety and never allow

an unattended child to remain in

the vehicle. Failure to follow this

procedure could result in injury to

a child or others. Children could

operate the power windows, the

sunroof or other controls or even

make the vehicle move.

300564

300565

3-4

Instruments and controls

The key can be turned from “ACC” to

“LOCK” only when the selector lever is in

the “P” position.

TManual transmission vehicles

The key can be turned from “ACC” to

“LOCK” only when the key is pushed in

while turning it.

ACC

In this position the electrical accessories

(radio, accessory power outlet, etc.) can

be used.

ON

This is the normal operating position after

the engine is started.

START

The engine is started in this position. The

starter cranks the engine to start it. When

the key is released (after the engine has

started), the key automatically returns to

the “ON” position.

TFor models with immobilizer

If you fail to start your engine with your

registered key, once pull out the key (at

this time, the security indicator light

blinks), and then insert the key in the igni-

tion switch and turn it to the “START” po-

sition and again try to start your engine.

NOTE

The engine may not start in the follow-

ing cases:

yThe key grip is touching another key

or a metallic key holder.

300566

300115

Do not turn the ignition switch to the

“START” position while the engine

is running.

300567

Instruments and controls

3-5

yThe key is near another key that con-

tains an immobilizer transponder.

Key reminder chime

The reminder chime sounds when the

driver’s door opens and the key is in the

“LOCK” or “ACC” positions. The chime

stops when the key is removed from the

ignition switch.

The ignition switch light flashes when

the reminder chime sounds.

Ignition switch light (if

equipped)

For easy access to the ignition switch in

the dark, the ignition switch light comes on

when the driver’s door is opened. After

closing the door, the light remains lit for 5

seconds and then dims before it goes out.

The light flashes if you insert the key into

the ignition switch with the driver’s door

open.

Key interlock release (AT ve-

hicles only)

If the key can not be turned to the “LOCK”

position even when the selector lever is in

the “P” position:

1. Take out the screwdriver.

2. Remove the cover under the steering

column using a Phillips screwdriver.

3. Turn the ignition key while pressing the

key interlock release lever.

Take your vehicle to the nearest SUBARU

dealer immediately to have the key inter-

lock system repaired.

300568

300569

300570

3-6

Instruments and controls

Hazard warning flasher

The hazard warning flasher is used to

warn other drivers when you have to park

your vehicle under emergency conditions.

The hazard warning flasher works with the

ignition switch in any position.

To turn on the hazard warning flasher,

push the hazard warning button on the in-

strument panel. To turn off the flasher,

push the button again.

When the hazard warning flasher is on,

the turn signals do not work.

Meters and gauges

Speedometer

The speedometer shows the vehicle

speed.

Odometer/Trip meter

1) Trip meter

2) Odometer

This meter displays the odometer and two

trip meters when the ignition switch is in

the “ON” position.

Even with the ignition switch in the

“OFF” or “LOCK” position, the odome-

ter and trip meters are displayed for 10

seconds when you press the knob.

TOdometer

The odometer shows the total distance

that the vehicle has been driven.

TDouble trip meter

1) A trip meter

2) B trip meter

The trip meter shows the distance that the

vehicle has been driven since you last set

it to zero.

To change the mode indication, briefly

push the knob.

Each press of the knob changes the func-

tion alternately.

To set the trip meter to zero, select the A

300117

2300571

300572

trip meter B trip meter

Instruments and controls

3-7

–

CONTINUED

–

trip or B trip meter by pushing the knob

and keep the knob pushed for more than

2 seconds.

If the connection between the combi-

nation meter and battery is broken for

any reason such as vehicle mainte-

nance or fuse replacement, the data re-

corded on the trip meter will be lost.

Tachometer

The tachometer shows the engine speed

in thousands of revolutions per minute.

Fuel gauge

1) Low fuel warning light

The fuel gauge shows the approximate

amount of fuel remaining in the tank.

The gauge does not return to “E” even

though the ignition switch is in the “ACC”

or “LOCK” position.

The gauge may move slightly during brak-

ing, turning or acceleration due to fuel lev-

el movement in the tank.

NOTE

You will see the “FUEL DOOR ” sign

near the fuel gauge.

This indicates that the fuel filler door

(lid) is located on the right side of the

vehicle.

TLow fuel warning light

The low fuel warning light comes on when

the tank is nearly empty [approximately

2.3 US gal (9.0 liters, 1.9 Imp gal)]. It only

operates when the ignition switch is in the

“ON” position.

To ensure safety, do not attempt to

change the function of the indicator

during driving, as an accident could

result.

Do not operate the engine with the

pointer of the tachometer in the red

zone. In this range, fuel injection will

be cut by the engine control module

to protect the engine from overrev-

ving. The engine will resume run-

ning normally after the engine

speed is reduced below the red

zone.

300573

300121

3-8

Instruments and controls

NOTE

This light does not go out unless the

tank is replenished up to an internal

fuel quantity of approximately 4.0 US

gal (15 liters, 3.3 Imp gal).

Temperature gauge

1) Normal operating range

The temperature gauge shows engine

coolant temperature when the ignition

switch is in the “ON” position.

The coolant temperature will vary in ac-

cordance with the outside temperature

and driving conditions.

We recommend that you drive moderately

until the pointer of the temperature gauge

reaches near the middle of the range. En-

gine operation is optimum with the engine

coolant at this temperature range and high

revving operation when the engine is not

warmed up enough should be avoided.

Outside temperature indica-

tor

MT vehicles

1) U.S.-spec. models

2) Canada-spec. models

Promptly put fuel in the tank when-

ever the low fuel warning light

comes on. Engine misfires as a re-

sult of an empty tank could cause

damage to the engine.

300574

If the pointer exceeds the normal

operating range, safely stop the ve-

hicle as soon as possible.

See “In case of emergency” in chap-

ter 9.

300575

Instruments and controls

3-9

–

CONTINUED

–

AT vehicles

1) U.S.-spec. models

2) Canada-spec. models

The outside temperature indicator is locat-

ed below the odometer/trip meter. The in-

dicator can indicate an outside tempera-

ture ranging from –22 to 122qF (–30 to

50qC).

The indicator can give a false reading un-

der any of the following conditions:

yWhen there is too much sun.

yDuring idling; while running at low

speeds in a traffic jam; when the engine is

restarted immediately following a shut-

down.

yWhen the actual outside temperature

falls outside the specified indicator range.

Warning and indicator lights

Several of the warning and indicator lights

come on momentarily and then go out

when the ignition switch is initially turned

to the “ON” position. This permits check-

ing the operation of the bulbs.

Apply the parking brake and turn the igni-

tion switch to the “ON” position. The fol-

lowing lights come on:

: Seatbelt warning light

: SRS airbag system warning light

/ : Front passenger’s frontal air-

bag ON indicator light

/ : Front passenger’s frontal

airbag OFF indicator light

: CHECK ENGINE warning light/

Malfunction indicator lamp

: Charge warning light

: Oil pressure warning light

: AT OIL temperature warning light

(AT vehicles)

/ : ABS warning light

/ : Brake system warning light

: All-Wheel Drive warning light (AT

vehicles)

: Cruise control indicator light

: Cruise control set indicator light

If any lights fail to come on, it indicates a

burned-out bulb or a malfunction of the

corresponding system.

Consult your authorized SUBARU dealer

for repair.

Seatbelt warning light

and chime

Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt

warning device at the driver’s seat, as re-

quired by current safety standards. There

is a seatbelt warning light in the combina-

tion meter.

If the driver has not yet fastened the seat-

belt when the ignition switch is turned to

the “ON” position, the seatbelt warning

light will flash for 6 seconds, to warn that

the seatbelt is unfastened. If the driver’s

seatbelt is not fastened, a chime will also

sound simultaneously.

If the driver’s seatbelt is still not fastened

300576

3-10

Instruments and controls

6 seconds later, the warning light will re-

main lit for 15 seconds. If the driver’s seat-

belt is still not fastened even 15 seconds

later (21 seconds after turning ON the ig-

nition switch), the warning lights will alter-

nate between flashing and steady illumi-

nation at 15-second intervals, and the

chime will sound while the warning light is

flashing.

Alternate flashing and steady illumination

of the warning lights and sounding of the

chime will continue until the driver fastens

the seatbelt.

yIf the driver unfastens the seatbelt af-

ter fastening, the seatbelt warning de-

vice operates as follows according to

the vehicle speed.

yAt speeds lower than approximate-

ly 9 mph (15 km/h)

The warning light will alternate be-

tween flashing and steady illumina-

tion at 15-second intervals. The

chime will not sound.

yAt speeds higher than approxi-

mately 9 mph (15 km/h)

The warning light will alternate be-

tween flashing and steady illumina-

tion at 15-second intervals and the

chime will sound while the warning

light is flashing.

yIt is possible to cancel the warning

operation that follows the 6-second

warning after turning ON the ignition

switch. When the ignition switch is

turned ON next time, however, the

complete sequence of warning opera-

tion resumes. For further details about

canceling the warning operation,

please contact your SUBARU dealer.

SRS airbag system warn-

ing light

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position, the SRS airbag system

warning light will come on for approxi-

mately 6 seconds and go out. This shows

the SRS frontal airbag and SRS side air-

bag and seatbelt pretensioners are in nor-

mal operation.

If the warning light exhibits any of

the following conditions, there may

be a malfunction in the seatbelt pre-

tensioners and/or SRS airbag sys-

tem. Immediately take your vehicle

to your nearest SUBARU dealer to

have the system checked. Unless

checked and properly repaired, the

seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS

airbags will operate improperly (e.g.

SRS airbags may inflate in a very mi-

nor collision or not inflate in a se-

vere collision), which may increase

the risk of injury.

yFlashing or flickering of the warn-

ing light

yNo illumination of the warning

light when the ignition switch is

first turned to the “ON” position

yContinuous illumination of the

warning light

yIllumination of the warning light

while driving

Instruments and controls

3-11

–

CONTINUED

–

Front passenger’s frontal air-

bag ON and OFF indicators

1) U.S.-spec. models

2) Canada-spec. models

or : Front passenger’s frontal

airbag ON indicator

or :Front passenger’s frontal

airbag OFF indicator

The front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

and OFF indicators show you the status of

the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag.

The indicators are located next to the

clock in the central portion of the instru-

ment panel.

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position, both the ON and OFF indi-

cators illuminate for 6 seconds during

which time the system is checked. Follow-

ing the system check, both indicators ex-

tinguish for 2 seconds. After this, one of

the indicators illuminates depending on

the status of the front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbag reached by the Subaru ad-

vanced frontal airbag system monitoring.

If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

is activated, the passenger’s frontal airbag

ON indicator will illuminate while the OFF

indicator will remain extinguished.

If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

is deactivated, the passenger’s frontal air-

bag ON indicator will remain extinguished

while the OFF indicator will illuminate.

With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”

position, if both the ON and OFF indica-

tors remain lit or extinguished simulta-

neously even after the system check peri-

od, the system is faulty. Contact your

SUBARU dealer immediately for an in-

spection.

CHECK ENGINE warn-

ing light/Malfunction in-

dicator lamp

If this light comes on steadily or blinks

while the engine is running, it may indicate

that there is a problem or potential prob-

lem somewhere in the emission control

system.

TIf the light comes on steadily:

If the light comes on steadily while driving

or does not go out after the engine starts,

an emission control system malfunction

has been detected.

1212

100547

If the CHECK ENGINE light comes

on while you are driving, have your

vehicle checked/repaired by your

SUBARU dealer as soon as possi-

ble. Continued vehicle operation

without having the emission control

system checked and repaired as

necessary could cause serious

damage, which may not be covered

by your vehicle’s warranty.

3-12

Instruments and controls

You should have your vehicle checked by

an authorized SUBARU dealer immedi-

ately.

This light also comes on when the fuel

filler cap is not tightened until it clicks.

If you have recently refueled your vehicle,

the cause of the CHECK ENGINE warning

light/malfunction indicator lamp coming on

could be a loose or missing fuel filler cap.

Remove the cap and retighten it until it

clicks. Make sure nothing is interfering

with the sealing of the cap. Tightening the

cap will not make the CHECK ENGINE

warning light turn off immediately. It may

take several driving trips. If the light does

not go out, take your vehicle to your au-

thorized SUBARU dealer immediately.

TIf the light is blinking:

If the light is blinking while driving, an en-

gine misfire condition has been detected

which may damage the emission control

system.

To prevent serious damage to the emis-

sion control system, you should do the fol-

lowing.

yReduce vehicle speed.

yAvoid hard acceleration.

yAvoid steep uphill grades.

yReduce the amount of cargo, if possi-

ble.

yStop towing a trailer as soon as possi-

ble.

The CHECK ENGINE warning light may

stop blinking and come on steadily after

several driving trips. You should have

your vehicle checked by an authorized

SUBARU dealer immediately.

Charge warning light

If this light comes on when the engine is

running, it may indicate that the charging

system is not working properly.

If the light comes on while driving or does

not go out after the engine starts, stop the

engine at the first safe opportunity and

check the alternator belt. If the belt is

loose, broken or if the belt is in good con-

dition but the light remains on, contact

your nearest SUBARU dealer immediate-

ly.

Oil pressure warning

light

If this light comes on when the engine is

running, it may indicate that the engine oil

pressure is low and the lubricating system

is not working properly.

If the light comes on while driving or does

not go out after the engine starts, stop the

engine at the first safe opportunity and

check the engine oil level. If the oil level is

low, add oil immediately. If the engine oil

is at the proper level but the light remains

on, contact your nearest SUBARU dealer

immediately.

AT OIL TEMPerature

warning light (AT vehi-

cles)

The AT oil temperature warning light

comes on when the ignition switch is

turned to the “ON” position and goes out

after the engine has started.

If this light comes on when the engine is

running, it may indicate that the automatic

transmission fluid temperature is too hot.

If the light comes on while driving, it is un-

necessary to stop the vehicle, but avoid

driving up steep grades or in stop and go

traffic.

TAutomatic transmission control

system warning

If the light flashes after the engine starts,

Do not operate the engine with the

oil pressure warning light on. This

may cause serious engine damage.

Instruments and controls

3-13

–

CONTINUED

–

it may indicate that the automatic trans-

mission control system is not working

properly. Contact your nearest SUBARU

dealer for service immediately.

ABS warning light

The ABS warning light comes on when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON” posi-

tion and goes out after approximately two

seconds.

This is an indication that the ABS system

is working properly.

The ABS warning light comes on together

with the brake system warning light if the

EBD system becomes faulty. For further

details of the EBD system fault warning,

refer to “Brake system warning light”.

If the warning light behavior is as de-

scribed in the following, the ABS sys-

tem may be considered normal.

yThe warning light comes on right af-

ter the engine is started but goes out

immediately, remaining off.

yThe warning light remains on after

the engine has been started, but it goes

out when the vehicle speed reaches

approximately 8 mph (12 km/h).

yThe warning light comes on during

driving, but it goes out immediately

and remains off.

When driving with an insufficient battery

voltage such as when the engine is jump

started, the ABS warning light may come

on. This is due to the low battery voltage

and does not indicate a malfunction.

When the battery becomes fully charged,

the light will go out.

Brake system

warning light

This light has the following three func-

tions:

If the warning light behaves as fol-

lows, the ABS system may not work

properly.

When the warning light is on, the

ABS function shuts down; however,

the conventional brake system con-

tinues to operate normally.

yThe warning light does not come

on when the ignition switch is

turned to the “ON” position.

(U.S.)

(Canada)

yThe warning light comes on when

the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position, but it does not go

out even when the vehicle speed

exceeds approximately 8 mph (12

km/h).

yThe warning light comes on dur-

ing driving.

If any of these conditions occur,

have the ABS system repaired at the

first available opportunity by your

SUBARU dealer.

yDriving with the brake system

warning light on is dangerous.

This indicates your brake system

may not be working properly. If

the light remains on, have the

brakes inspected by a SUBARU

dealer immediately.

yIf at all in doubt about whether the

brakes are operating properly, do

not drive the vehicle. Have your

vehicle towed to the nearest

SUBARU dealer for repair.

(U.S.)

(Canada)

3-14

Instruments and controls

TParking brake warning

The light comes on with the parking brake

applied while the ignition switch is in the

“ON” position. It goes out when the park-

ing brake is fully released.

TBrake fluid level warning

This light comes on when the brake fluid

level has dropped to near the “MIN” level

of the brake fluid reservoir with the ignition

switch in the “ON” position and with the

parking brake fully released.

If the brake system warning light should

come on while driving (with the parking

brake fully released and with the ignition

switch positioned in “ON”), it could be an

indication of leaking of brake fluid or worn

brake pads. If this occurs, immediately

stop the vehicle at the nearest safe place

and check the brake fluid level. If the fluid

level is below the “MIN” mark in the reser-

voir, do not drive the vehicle. Have the ve-

hicle towed to the nearest SUBARU deal-

er for repair.

TElectronic Brake Force Distribution

(EBD) system warning

The brake system warning light also illu-

minates if a malfunction occurs in the EBD

system. In that event, it comes on together

with the ABS warning light.

The EBD system may be malfunctioning if

the brake system warning light and ABS

warning light illuminate simultaneously

during driving.

Even if the EBD system fails, the conven-

tional braking system will still function.

However, the rear wheels will be more

prone to locking when the brakes are ap-

plied harder than usual and the vehicle’s

motion may therefore become somewhat

harder to control.

If the brake system warning light and ABS

warning light illuminate simultaneously,

take the following steps:

1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe, flat

place.

2. Shut down the engine, then restart it.

3. Release the parking brake. If both

warning lights go out, the EBD system

may be faulty.

Drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU

dealer and have the system inspected.

4. If both warning lights come on again

and stay illuminated after the engine has

been restarted, shut down the engine

again, apply the parking brake, and check

the brake fluid level.

5. If the brake fluid level is not below the

“MIN” mark, the EBD system may be

faulty. Drive carefully to the nearest SUB-

ARU dealer and have the system inspect-

ed.

6. If the brake fluid level is below the

“MIN” mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle. In-

stead, have the vehicle towed to the near-

est SUBARU dealer for repair.

Door open warning lights

The door open warning light comes on if

any door or the rear gate is not fully

closed.

Always make sure this light is out before

you start to drive.

Low fuel warning light

The low fuel warning light comes on when

the tank is nearly empty [approximately

2.3 US gal (9.0 liters, 1.9 Imp gal)]. It only

operates when the ignition switch is in the

“ON” position.

NOTE

This light does not go out unless the

tank is replenished up to an internal

fuel quantity of approximately 4.0 US

gal (15 liters, 3.3 Imp gal).

Instruments and controls

3-15

–

CONTINUED

–

All-Wheel Drive warn-

ing light (AT vehicles)

The All-Wheel Drive warning light comes

on when the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position and goes out after the en-

gine has started.

This light comes on when All-Wheel Drive

is disengaged and the drive mechanism is

switched to Front Wheel Drive for mainte-

nance or similar purposes.

This light flashes if the vehicle is driven

with tires of different diameters or with the

air pressure excessively low in any of its

tires.

Shift position indicator (AT

vehicles)

This indicator shows the position of the

shift lever.

Turn signal indicator

lights

These lights show the operation of the

turn signal or lane change signal.

If the indicator lights do not blink or blink

rapidly, the turn signal bulb may be

burned out. Replace the bulb as soon as

possible. Refer to the “Replacing bulbs”

section in chapter 11.

High beam indicator

light

This light shows that the headlights are in

the high beam mode.

This indicator light also comes on when

the headlight flasher is operated.

Cruise control indica-

tor light

The cruise control indicator light comes on

when the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position and goes out after approxi-

mately three seconds.

This light comes on when the “CRUISE”

main switch is pressed.

NOTE

yIf you move the cruise control lever

or press the main switch button while

turning the ignition switch “ON”, the

cruise control function is deactivated

and the “CRUISE” indicator light flash-

es. To reactivate the cruise control

function, turn the ignition switch back

to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position, and

then turn it again to the “ON” position.

yIf this indicator light and the “ ”

indicator light flash simultaneously

during driving, have the vehicle

checked by your nearest SUBARU

dealer.

Continued driving with the AWD

warning light flashing can lead to

powertrain damage. If the AWD

warning light flashes, promptly park

in a safe place then check whether

all four tires are the same diameter

and whether any of the tires has a

puncture or has lost air pressure for

some other reason.

300124

3-16

Instruments and controls

Cruise control set indica-

tor light

The cruise control set indicator light

comes on when the ignition switch is

turned to the “ON” position and goes out

after approximately three seconds.

This light comes on when vehicle speed

has been set.

Clock

To adjust the clock, open the small article

storage compartment in the dashboard

with the vehicle parked in a safe place.

To set the hour, press the “H” button. To

set the minutes, press the “M” button. To

reset the minutes to “00” with a radio time

signal, push the “Reset” button.

The clock uses a liquid-crystal display.

You will find time indications hard to

see if you wear polarized glasses.

300578

HM RESET

300579

To ensure safety, do not attempt to

set the time while driving, as an ac-

cident from inadequate attention to

the road could result.

Instruments and controls

3-17

–

CONTINUED

–

Light control switch

The light switch operates only when the

ignition switch is in the “ON” position.

Headlights

To turn on the headlights, turn the knob on

the end of the turn signal lever.

first position:

Parking lights, instrument panel illumina-

tion, front side marker lights, tail lights and

license plate light are on.

second position:

Headlights, parking lights, instrument pan-

el illumination, front side marker lights, tail

lights, and license plate light are on.

High/low beam change (dim-

mer)

To change from low beam to high beam,

push the turn signal lever forward. When

the headlights are on high beam, the high

beam indicator light “ ” on the instru-

ment panel is also on.

To switch back to low beam, pull the lever

back to the detent position.

To prevent battery discharge result-

ing from accidentally leaving your

lights on when your vehicle is

parked, the light switch operates

only when the ignition switch is in

the “ON” position. In any other posi-

tion, the vehicle’s lights will be out.

If you park your vehicle on a road-

side at night, use the hazard warn-

ing flasher to alert the other drivers.

300127

300128

3-18

Instruments and controls

Headlight flasher

To flash the headlights, pull the lever to-

ward you and then release it. The high

beam will stay on for as long as you hold

the lever. The headlight flasher works

even though the lighting switch is in the

“OFF” position.

When the headlights are on high beam,

the high beam indicator light “ ” on

the instrument panel also comes on.

Daytime running light system

TCanada-spec. 2.5XT

The low beam headlights and tail lights

will automatically come on when the en-

gine has started, under the following con-

ditions:

yThe parking brake is fully released.

yThe light switch is in the “OFF” or

“ ” position.

yThe automatic transmission selector le-

ver is set at other than the “P” position.

TAll models except Canada-spec.

2.5XT

The low beam headlights will automatical-

ly come on at reduced brightness when

the engine has started, under the follow-

ing conditions:

yThe parking brake is fully released.

yThe light switch is in the “OFF” or

“ ” position.

yThe automatic transmission selector le-

ver is set at other than the “P” position.

Do not hold the lever in the flashing

position for more than just a few

seconds.

300129

The parking lights, and side marker

lights are not turned on by the day-

time running light system. The light

switch must always be turned to the

“ ” position when it is dark out-

side.

The tail lights, parking lights, and

side marker lights are not turned on

by the daytime running light system.

The light switch must always be

turned to the “ ” position when

it is dark outside.

Instruments and controls

3-19

Turn signal lever

1) Right turn

2) Left turn

3) Lane change for right

4) Lane change for left

To activate the right turn signal, push the

turn signal lever up. To activate the left

turn signal, push the turn signal lever

down. When the turn is finished, the lever

will return automatically. If the lever does

not return after cornering, return the lever

to the neutral position by hand.

To signal a lane change, push the turn sig-

nal lever up or down slightly and hold it

during the lane change. The turn signal in-

dicator lights will flash in the direction of

the turn or lane change. The lever will re-

turn automatically to the neutral position

when you release it. Illumination brightness con-

trol

When the headlight switch is in the

“ ” or “ ” position, you can ad-

just brightness of the instrument panel illu-

mination for better visibility.

To brighten, turn the control dial upward.

To darken, turn the control dial downward.

300601

300131

3-20

Instruments and controls

Headlight beam leveler

(Canada-spec. 2.5XT)

The 2.5XT has High-Intensity Discharge

(HID) headlights on the low beam setting.

The HID headlights generate more light

than conventional halogen headlights.

Therefore a driver of an oncoming vehicle

may experience too much glare when

your headlight beam height adjustment is

high due to the vehicle carrying a heavy

load.

The headlight beam leveler can be used

to adjust beam height to avoid such a con-

dition.

The higher the number the switch is

turned to, the lower the beam height be-

comes.

Parking light switch

The parking light switch operates regard-

less of the ignition switch position.

By pushing the front end of this switch, fol-

lowing lights will come on.

– Parking lights

– Front side marker lights

– Tail lights

– License plate lights

To turn off, push the rear end of the park-

ing light switch.

Avoid leaving these lights on for a long

time because that will run down the bat-

tery.

Front fog light button

The front fog lights operate only when the

headlights are on low beam. Push the

front fog light button to turn the front fog

lights on.

However, the front fog lights turn off when

the headlights are switched to high beam.

Press the button again to turn them off.

The indicator light located on the button

will illuminate when the front fog lights are

on.

300133

300134 300135

Instruments and controls

3-21

–

CONTINUED

–

Wiper and washer

yThe wiper operates only when the ig-

nition switch is in the “ON” or “ACC”

position.

yClean your wiper blades and window

glass periodically with a washer solu-

tion to prevent streaking, and to re-

move accumulations of road salt or

road film. Keep the washer button de-

pressed at least for 1 second so that

washer solution will be sprinkled all

over the windshield or rear window.

yGrease, wax, insects or other materi-

al on the windshield or the wiper blade

results in jerky wiper operation and

In freezing weather, do not use the

windshield washer until the wind-

shield is sufficiently warmed by the

defroster.

Otherwise the washer fluid can

freeze on the windshield, blocking

your view.

yDo not operate the washer contin-

uously for more than ten seconds,

or when the washer fluid tank is

empty. This may cause overheat-

ing of the washer motor. Check

the washer fluid level frequently,

such as at fuel stops.

yDo not operate the wipers when

the windshield or rear window is

dry. This may scratch the glass,

damage the wiper blades and

cause the wiper motor to burn out.

Before operating the wiper on a

dry windshield or rear window, al-

ways use the windshield washer.

yIn freezing weather, be sure that

the wiper blades are not frozen to

the windshield or rear window be-

fore switching on the wipers. At-

tempting to operate the wiper with

the blades frozen to the window

glass could cause not only the

wiper blades to be damaged but

also the wiper motor to burn out. If

the wiper blades are frozen to the

window glass, be sure to operate

the defroster, windshield wiper

deicer (if equipped) or rear win-

dow defogger before turning on

the wiper.

yIf the wipers stop during opera-

tion because of ice or some other

obstruction on the window, the

wiper motor could burn out even if

the wiper switch is turned off. If

this occurs, promptly stop the ve-

hicle in a safe place, turn the igni-

tion switch to the “LOCK” posi-

tion and clean the window glass

to allow proper wiper operation.

yUse clean water if windshield

washer fluid is unavailable. In ar-

eas where water freezes in winter,

use SUBARU Windshield Washer

Fluid or the equivalent. (See the

“Windshield washer fluid” section

in chapter 11.)

Also, when driving the vehicle

when there are freezing tempera-

tures, use non-freezing type wiper

blades.

yDo not clean the wiper blades with

gasoline or a solvent, such as

paint thinner or benzene. This will

cause deterioration of the wiper

blades.

3-22

Instruments and controls

streaking on the glass. If you cannot

remove those streaks after operating

the washer or if the wiper operation is

jerky, clean the outer surface of the

windshield or rear window and the wip-

er blades using a sponge or soft cloth

with a neutral detergent or mild-abra-

sive cleaner. After cleaning, rinse the

window glass and wiper blades with

clean water. The glass is clean if no

beads form on the glass when you

rinse with water.

yIf you cannot eliminate the streaking

even after following this procedure, re-

place the wiper blades with new ones.

Refer to the “Replacement of wiper

blades” section (chapter 11) for re-

placement instructions.

Windshield wiper and washer

switches

TWindshield wipers

OFF : Park

: Intermittent

LO : Low speed

HI : High speed

To turn the wipers on, push the wiper con-

trol lever down.

To turn the wipers off, return the lever to

the “OFF” position.

TWiper intermittent time control (if

equipped)

When the wiper switch is in the “ ” po-

sition, turn the dial to adjust the operating

interval of the wiper.

The operating interval can be adjusted

continuously from the shortest interval to

the longest.

Two click stop positions of the dial may

help you to aim at your desired interval.

OFF

300795

300138

Instruments and controls

3-23

TMist (for a single wipe)

For a single wipe of the wipers, pull the le-

ver toward you. The wipers operate until

you release the lever.

TWasher

To wash the windshield, push the washer

button at the end of the wiper control le-

ver. The washer fluid sprays until you re-

lease the washer button. The wipers oper-

ate while you push the button.

Rear window wiper and wash-

er switch

: Washer (accompanied by wiper

operation)

ON : Normal

INT : Intermittent

OFF : Park

: Washer

TRear wiper

To turn the rear wiper on, turn the knob on

the end of the wiper control lever upward.

INT: Intermittent

ON: Normal

To turn the wiper off, return the knob on

the end of the lever to the “OFF” position.

TWasher

To wash the rear window while the rear

wiper is operating, turn the knob on the

end of the wiper control lever counter-

clockwise to the “ ” position. The

washer fluid sprays until you release the

knob.

To wash the rear window when the rear

wiper is not in use, turn the knob on the

end of the wiper control lever clockwise to

the “ ” position. The washer fluid

sprays and the wiper operates until you

release the knob.

300796

300797

REAR

OFF

INT

OFF

300141

3-24

Instruments and controls

Windshield wiper deicer (if

equipped)

The windshield wiper deicer operates only

when the ignition switch is in the “ON” po-

sition.

Before turning on the windshield wiper de-

icer, remove any snow from the wind-

shield. To turn on the windshield wiper de-

icer, push the button. The indicator light

located on the button lights up while the

windshield wiper deicer is operating.

The windshield wiper deicer will automati-

cally shut off after approximately 15 min-

utes. If the wiper blades have been deiced

completely before that time, push the but-

ton to turn it off. It also turns off when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ACC” or

“LOCK” position. If deicing is not com-

plete, you have to push the button to turn

the deicer on again.

If your vehicle is equipped with the out-

side mirror defogger, the outside mir-

ror defogger operates while the wind-

shield wiper deicer is operating.

Rear window defogger but-

ton

Manual climate control system

Automatic climate control system

To prevent the battery from being

discharged, do not operate the

windshield wiper deicer continuous-

ly for any longer than necessary.

300143

300151

300142

Instruments and controls

3-25

–

CONTINUED

–

The rear window defogger operates only

when the ignition switch is in the “ON” po-

sition.

The rear window defogger button is locat-

ed on the climate control panel.

To turn on the defogger, push the button.

To turn it off, push the button again.

The indicator light located on the button

lights up while the rear window defogger is

operating.

The defogger will automatically shut off af-

ter approximately 15 minutes. If the win-

dow clears before that time, push the but-

ton to turn it off. It also turns off when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ACC” or

“LOCK” position. If defrosting or defogging

is desired when you restart your vehicle,

you have to push the button to turn it on

again.

Turn on the rear window defogger if the

wiper is frozen to the glass.

Mirrors

Always check that the inside and outside

mirrors are properly adjusted before you

start driving.

Inside mirror

The inside mirror has a day and night po-

sition. Pull the tab at the bottom of the mir-

ror toward you for the night position. Push

it away for the day position. The night po-

sition reduces glare from headlights.

yDo not use sharp instruments or

window cleaner containing abra-

sives to clean the inner surface of

the rear window. They may dam-

age the conductors printed on the

window.

yTo prevent the battery from being

discharged, do not operate the de-

fogger continuously for any long-

er than necessary.

300145

3-26

Instruments and controls

TAuto-dimming mirror/compass (if

equipped)

1) Left button

2) Auto dimming indicator

3) Photosensor

4) Right button

The auto-dimming mirror/compass has an

anti-glare feature which automatically re-

duces glare coming from headlights of ve-

hicles behind you. It also contains a built-

in compass.

yBy pressing and releasing the left but-

ton, the automatic dimming function is tog-

gled on or off. When the automatic dim-

ming function is on, the auto dimming indi-

cator light (green) located to the right of

the button will illuminate.

yBy pressing and releasing the right but-

ton, the compass display is toggled on or

off. When the compass is on, an illuminat-

ed compass reading will appear in the

lower part of the mirror.

Even with the mirror in anti-glare mode,

the mirror surface turns bright if the trans-

mission is shifted into reverse. This is to

ensure good rearward visibility during re-

versing.

VPhotosensors

The mirror has a photosensor attached on

both the front and back sides. If the glare

from the headlights of vehicles behind you

strikes the mirror, these sensors detect it

and make the reflection surface of the mir-

ror dimmer to help prevent you from being

blinded. For this reason, use care not to

cover the sensors with stickers, or other

similar items. Periodically wipe the sen-

sors clean using a piece of dry soft cotton

cloth or an applicator.

VCompass calibration

1. For optimum calibration, switch off all

nonessential electrical accessories (rear

window defogger, heater/air conditioning

system, spotlight, etc.) and ensure all

doors are shut.

2. Drive to an open, level area away from

large metallic objects or structures and

make certain the ignition switch is in the

“ON” position.

3. Press and hold the left button for 3 sec-

onds then release, and the compass will

enter the calibration mode. “CAL” and di-

rection will be displayed.

4. Drive slowly in a circle until “CAL” dis-

appears from the display (approximately

two or three circles).

5. The compass is now calibrated. Fur-

ther calibration is not required. The com-

pass will automatically calibrate from this

point forward.

300517

300518

Instruments and controls

3-27

–

CONTINUED

–

VCompass zone adjustment

Compass calibration zones

1. The zone setting is factory preset to

Zone 8. Refer to the “Compass calibration

zone” map shown above or one attached

to the end of this manual to verify that the

compass zone setting is correct for your

geographical location.

2. Press and hold the right button for 3

seconds then release, and the word

“ZONE” will briefly appear and then the

zone number will be displayed.

3. Press the right-hand button repeatedly

to cycle the display through all possible

zone settings. Stop cycling when the cor-

rect zone setting for your location is dis-

played.

4. Releasing the button for 3 seconds will

exit the zone setting mode.

Outside mirrors

TConvex mirror (passenger side)

TRemote control mirror switch

1) Selection switch

2) Direction control switch

The remote control mirrors operate only

when the ignition switch is in the “ON” or

“ACC” position.

1. Press either end of the selection

switch, “L” for the left, “R” for the right.

2. Move the direction control switch in the

direction you want to move the mirror.

3. Return the selection switch to the neu-

tral position to prevent unintentional oper-

ation.

The mirrors can also be adjusted manual-

ly.

300580

Objects look smaller in a convex

mirror and farther away than when

viewed in a flat mirror. Do not use

the convex mirror to judge the dis-

tance of vehicles behind you when

changing lanes. Use the inside mir-

ror (or glance backwards) to deter-

mine the actual size and distance of

objects that you view in convex mir-

ror.

300146

300581

3-28

Instruments and controls

TOutside mirror defogger (if

equipped)

1) Outside mirror defogger button (if

equipped)

2) Outside mirror defogger and windshield

wiper deicer button (if equipped)

The outside mirror defogger operates only

when the ignition switch is in the “ON” po-

sition.

To turn on the outside mirror defogger,

push the button. To turn it off, push the

button again. The indicator light located

on the button lights up while the outside

mirror defogger is operating.

The defogger will automatically shut off af-

ter approximately 15 minutes. If the mirror

clears before that time, push the button to

turn it off. It also turns off when the ignition

switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK”

position. If defrosting or defogging is de-

sired when you restart your vehicle, you

have to push the button to turn it on again.

NOTE

On vehicles equipped with a wind-

shield wiper deicer, the windshield

wiper deicer switch is also used to op-

erate the outside mirror defogger.

Tilt steering wheel

1. Adjust the seat position. Refer to the

“Front seats” section (chapter 1).

2. Push the tilt lock lever down.

3. Move the steering wheel to the desired

level.

4. Pull the lever up to lock the steering

wheel in place.

5. Make sure that the steering wheel is

securely locked by moving it up and down.

To prevent the battery from being

discharged, do not operate the de-

fogger continuously for any longer

than necessary.

300582

Do not adjust the steering wheel tilt

position while driving. This may

cause loss of vehicle control and re-

sult in personal injury.

300149

Instruments and controls

3-29

Horn

To sound the horn, push the horn pad.

300150

Climate control

Ventilator ............................................................. 4-2

Air flow selection .................................................... 4-2

Center and side ventilators .................................... 4-3

Manual climate control system (if equipped) .. 4-3

Control panel .......................................................... 4-3

Heater operation ..................................................... 4-5

Air conditioner operation ....................................... 4-7

Automatic climate control system

(if equipped) .................................................... 4-8

Control panel .......................................................... 4-8

To use as full-automatic climate control

system ................................................................... 4-8

To use as semi-automatic climate control

system ................................................................... 4-8

Fan speed control dial ........................................... 4-9

Temperature control dial ........................................ 4-9

Air flow control dial ................................................ 4-9

Air inlet selection button ........................................ 4-10

Air conditioner button ............................................ 4-10

Temperature sensors ............................................. 4-11

Operating tips for heater and air

conditioner ...................................................... 4-11

Cleaning ventilation grille ...................................... 4-11

Efficient cooling after parking in direct

sunlight ................................................................. 4-11

Lubrication oil circulation in the refrigerant

circuit .................................................................... 4-12

Checking air conditioning system before

summer season .................................................... 4-12

Cooling and dehumidifying in high humidity and

low temperature weather conditions .................. 4-12

Air conditioner compressor shut-off when

engine is heavily loaded ...................................... 4-12

Refrigerant for your climate control system ........ 4-12

Air filtration system (if equipped) ..................... 4-12

Replacing an air filter ............................................. 4-13

4-2

Climate control

Ventilator

Air flow selection

400138

Climate control

4-3

–

CONTINUED

–

Center and side ventilators

TCenter ventilators

Move the tab up and down or right and left

to adjust the flow direction.

TSide ventilators

1) Open

2) Close

3) Thumb-wheel

Move the tab up and down or right and left

to adjust the flow direction.

To open or close the ventilator, turn the

thumb-wheel up or down.

Manual climate control sys-

tem (if equipped)

Control panel

1) Temperature control dial

2) Fan speed control dial

3) Air flow control dial

4) Rear window defogger button (Refer to

the “Rear window defogger button” in

chapter 3.)

5) Air conditioner button

6) Air inlet selection button

TTemperature control dial

This dial regulates the temperature of air

flow from the air outlets over a range from

the blue side (cool) to red side (warm).

400140

400545

123

456 400546

4-4

Climate control

TFan speed control dial

The fan operates only when the ignition

switch is turned to the “ON” position. The

fan speed control dial is used to select four

fan speeds.

TAir flow control dial

This dial has the following five positions:

: Air flows through the instrument panel

outlets.

: Air flows through the instrument panel

outlets and the foot outlets.

: Air flows through the foot outlets and

some through the windshield defroster

outlets.

: Air flows through the windshield de-

froster outlets and foot outlets.

: Air flows through the windshield de-

froster outlets.

When the dial is placed in the “ ”

or “ ” position, the air conditioner

compressor operates automatically re-

gardless of the position of the air con-

ditioner button to defog the windshield

quickly. However the indicator on the

air conditioner button will not come on.

At the same time, the air inlet selection

is automatically set to “outside air”

mode.

In this state, you cannot select “recir-

culation” mode by manually pressing

the air inlet selection button.

Also, you cannot stop the air condi-

tioner compressor by pressing the air

conditioner button.

TAir conditioner button

The air conditioner operates only when

the engine is running.

Push the air conditioner button while the

fan is in operation to turn on the air condi-

tioner. The indicator light will come on.

Push it again to turn off the air conditioner.

TAir inlet selection button

ON position (Recirculation): Interior air

is recirculated inside the vehicle. Push the

air inlet selection button to the ON posi-

tion. The indicator light will come on.

Place the air inlet selection button to the

ON position for fast cooling with the air

conditioner or when driving on a dusty

road.

OFF position (Outside air): Outside air is

drawn into the passenger compartment.

Push the air inlet selection button again to

the OFF position. The indicator light will

go off.

Place the air inlet selection button to the

OFF position when the interior has cooled

to a comfortable temperature and the road

is no longer dusty.

400144

400145

Climate control

4-5

–

CONTINUED

–

Heater operation

TDefrosting or defogging the wind-

shield

To direct warm air to the windshield and

front door windows:

1. Set the air flow control dial to the

“ ” position.

2. Turn the temperature control dial all the

way to the right.

3. Set the fan speed control dial to the

highest speed.

If your vehicle is equipped with an air con-

ditioner, when the “ ” or “ ” posi-

tion is selected, the air conditioner com-

pressor automatically operates regardless

of the position of the air conditioner button

to defog the windshield quickly.

However, the air conditioner indicator light

does not come on at this time.

NOTE

Warm air also comes out from the right

and left air outlets. To stop warm air

flow from these outlets, turn the corre-

sponding thumb-wheel down.

THeating and defrosting

To direct warm air toward the floor and the

windshield:

1. Set the air flow control dial to the “ ”

position.

2. Set the temperature control dial to the

most comfortable level.

3. Set the fan speed control dial to the de-

sired speed.

If your vehicle is equipped with an air con-

ditioner, when the “ ” or “ ” posi-

tion is selected, the air conditioner com-

pressor automatically operates regardless

of the position of the air conditioner button

to defog the windshield quickly.

However, the air conditioner indicator light

does not come on at this time.

Warm air also comes out from the right

and left air outlets. To stop warm air

flow from these outlets, turn the corre-

sponding thumb-wheel down.

Continued operation with the air in-

let selection button in the ON posi-

tion may fog up the windows.

Switch to the OFF position as soon

as the outside dusty condition

clears.

400146

400147

4-6

Climate control

THeating

To direct warm air toward the floor:

1. Set the air inlet selection button to the

OFF position.

2. Set the air flow control dial to the

“ ” position.

3. Set the temperature control dial to the

most comfortable level.

4. Set the fan speed control dial to the de-

sired speed.

Warm air also comes out from the right

and left air outlets. To stop warm air

flow from these outlets, turn the corre-

sponding thumb-wheel down.

TBi-level heating

This setting allows you to direct air of dif-

ferent temperatures from the instrument

panel and foot outlets. The air from the

foot outlets is slightly warmer than from

the instrument panel outlets.

1. Set the air inlet selection button to the

OFF position.

2. Set the air flow control dial to the

“ ” position.

3. Set the temperature control dial to the

desired temperature level.

4. Set the fan speed control dial to the de-

sired speed.

Setting the temperature control dial fully

turned to the red area or blue area de-

creases the temperature difference be-

tween the air from the instrument panel

outlets and the air from the foot outlets.

TVentilation

To force outside air through the instru-

ment panel outlets:

1. Set the air inlet selection button to the

OFF position.

2. Set the air flow control dial to the “ ”

position.

3. Set the temperature control dial all the

way left.

4. Set the fan speed control dial to the de-

sired speed.

When driving on a dusty road, set the air

inlet selection button to the “ON” position.

400148 400149

400150

Climate control

4-7

Air conditioner operation

TCooling or dehumidifying

1) ON position

For cooling and dehumidification of the

passenger compartment, performing the

following steps will allow air to flow

through the instrument panel outlets:

1. Set the air inlet selection button to the

OFF position.

2. Set the air flow control dial to the “ ”

position.

3. Set the air conditioner button to the

“ON” position.

4. Set the temperature control dial to the

blue side.

5. Set the fan speed control dial at the

highest speed.

TDefrosting or defogging

To direct warm air to the windshield and

front door windows:

1. Set the air flow control dial to the

“ ” position.

2. Set the temperature control dial to the

red side.

3. Set the fan speed control dial at the

highest speed.

The air conditioner compressor automati-

cally operates when the air flow control

dial set in the “ ” or “ ” position to

provide better defogging performance.

However, the air conditioner indicator light

does not come on at this time.

Continued operation with the air in-

let selection button in the ON posi-

tion may fog up the windows.

Switch to the OFF position as soon

as the outside dusty condition

clears.

1400547

400146

4-8

Climate control

Automatic climate control

system (if equipped)

Although this climate control system can

be used as a full-automatic climate control

system, it can also, if desired, be used as

a semi-automatic climate control system.

When it is used as a full-automatic climate

control system, the outlet air temperature,

fan speed, air flow distribution, air inlet

control, and air conditioner compressor

operation are all automatically controlled

to maintain a constant, comfortable tem-

perature inside the vehicle.

NOTE

yOperate the automatic climate con-

trol system when the engine is run-

ning.

yWhen the engine coolant is cold, the

blower does not run.

yIn the “AUTO” mode, when the air

temperature in the passenger compart-

ment is sufficiently cool, the air condi-

tioner compressor does not operate.

For efficient defogging or dehumidify-

ing in cold weather, press the “A/C”

button to operate the air conditioner

compressor.

yEven when cooling is not necessary,

setting the temperature much lower

than the current outlet air temperature

turns on the air conditioner compres-

sor automatically and the “A/C” indica-

tor light on the control panel comes on.

Control panel

1) Temperature control dial

2) Fan speed control dial

3) Air flow control dial

4) Rear window defogger button (Refer to

the “Rear window defogger button” in

chapter 3.)

5) Air inlet selection button

6) Air conditioner button

To use as full-automatic cli-

mate control system

Place the temperature control dial in the

position for your desired temperature,

then set the other dials and buttons as de-

scribed in the following. The system’s

functions will then switch to AUTO mode

and be controlled automatically.

yAir flow control dial: AUTO position

yFan speed control dial: AUTO position

yAir inlet selection button: Press for at

least 1 second. (Indicator will flash twice.)

yAir conditioner button: Press for at least

1 second. (Indicator will flash twice.)

To use as semi-automatic cli-

mate control system

Each function can be individually set to

AUTO mode independently of the others.

Any function set to AUTO mode is con-

trolled automatically. Any function not set

to AUTO mode can be manually adjusted

as desired.

The temperature can be set within a range

of 65 to 85qF (20 to 30qC).

546

400594

Climate control

4-9

–

CONTINUED

–

Fan speed control dial

The fan operates only with the ignition

switch in the ON position. The fan speed

control dial is used to select the AUTO

(automatic control) mode or to select the

desired fan speed. The dial’s positions

and their functions are as follows:

OFF: The fan does not operate.

AUTO: The fan speed is adjusted auto-

matically in accordance with the air tem-

perature inside and outside the passenger

compartment, the intensity of sunlight,

and other factors. SUBARU recommends

using the AUTO position.

Other positions: The fan speed can be

adjusted in seven steps.

With the fan speed control dial in the

AUTO position and the air flow control

dial in the “ ”, “ ”, or “ ” po-

sition, the fan does not operate during

engine warm-up until the engine cool-

ant temperature exceeds approx. 122qF

(50qC).

Temperature control dial

This dial is used to set the desired interior

temperature. With the dial set to your de-

sired temperature, the system automati-

cally adjusts the temperature of air sup-

plied from the outlets such that the desired

temperature is achieved and maintained.

If the dial is turned fully counterclockwise,

the system gives maximum cooling perfor-

mance. If the dial is turned fully clockwise,

the system gives maximum heating per-

formance.

Air flow control dial

This dial has the following six positions.

The outlets from which air is supplied in

each position are as follows:

AUTO: The air flow control is adjusted au-

tomatically in accordance with the air tem-

perature inside and outside the passenger

compartment, the intensity of sunlight,

and other factors. SUBARU recommends

using the AUTO position.

: Instrument panel outlets

: Instrument panel outlets and foot out-

lets

: Foot outlets and windshield defroster

outlets (relatively little air from windshield

400154

400549

400156

4-10

Climate control

defroster outlets)

: Windshield defroster outlets and foot

outlets

: Windshield defroster outlets

NOTE

When the dial is placed in the “ ”

or “ ” position, the air conditioner

compressor operates automatically to

defog the windshield quickly. At the

same time, the air inlet selection is au-

tomatically set to “outside air” mode.

Air inlet selection button

ON position (Recirculation): Interior air

is recirculated inside the vehicle. Push the

air inlet selection button to the ON position

for fast cooling with the air conditioner or

when driving on a dusty road. The indica-

tor light will come on.

OFF position (Outside Air): Outside air

is drawn into the passenger compartment.

Push the air inlet selection button to the

OFF position when the interior has cooled

to a comfortable temperature and the road

is no longer dusty. The indicator light will

go off.

AUTO: When the air inlet selection button

is pressed for at least 1 second, the indi-

cator flashes twice. The air inlet control is

then adjusted automatically in accordance

with the air temperature inside and out-

side the passenger compartment, the in-

tensity of sunlight, and other factors.

Pressing the air inlet selection button can-

cels the “AUTO” mode. SUBARU recom-

mends using the AUTO position.

Air conditioner button

The button’s positions and their functions

are as follows:

ON: The air conditioner operates while the

fan is running.

Push the button to select this position. The

indicator light will come on.

OFF: The air conditioner does not oper-

ate.

Push the button again to select this posi-

tion. The indicator light will go off.

AUTO: When the button is pressed for at

least 1 second, the indicator flashes twice.

The air conditioner compressor operation

is then adjusted automatically in accor-

dance with the air temperature inside and

outside the passenger compartment, the

intensity of sunlight, and other factors.

400157

Continued operation in the ON posi-

tion may fog up the windows.

Switch to the OFF position as soon

as the outside dusty condition

clears.

400550

Climate control

4-11

–

CONTINUED

–

Pressing the button cancels the “AUTO”

mode. SUBARU recommends using the

AUTO position.

The air conditioner’s compressor does

not operate with an outside tempera-

ture of 32qF (0qC) or lower.

Temperature sensors

1) Interior air temperature sensor

2) Solar sensor

The automatic climate control system em-

ploys several sensors. These sensors are

delicate. If they are not treated properly

and become damaged, the system may

not be able to control the interior tempera-

ture correctly. To avoid damaging the sen-

sors, observe the following precautions:

– Do not subject the sensors to impact.

– Keep water away from the sensors.

– Do not cover the sensors.

The sensors are located as follows:

– Solar sensor: beside the windshield de-

froster grille.

– Interior air temperature sensor: near the

ignition switch.

– Outside temperature sensor: behind the

front grille.

Operating tips for heater and

air conditioner

Cleaning ventilation grille

Always keep the front ventilation inlet

grille free of snow, leaves, or other ob-

structions to ensure efficient heating and

defrosting. Since the condenser is located

in front of the radiator, this area should be

kept clean because cooling performance

is impaired by any accumulation of insects

and leaves on the condenser.

Efficient cooling after parking

in direct sunlight

After parking in direct sunlight, drive with

the windows open for a few minutes to al-

400551

400552

4-12

Climate control

low outside air to circulate into the heated

interior. This results in quicker cooling by

the air conditioner. Keep the windows

closed during the operation of the air con-

ditioner for maximum cooling efficiency.

Lubrication oil circulation in

the refrigerant circuit

Operate the air conditioner compressor at

a low engine speed (at idle or low driving

speeds) a few minutes each month during

the off-season to circulate its oil.

Checking air conditioning

system before summer sea-

son

Check the air conditioner unit for refriger-

ant leaks, hose conditions, and proper op-

eration each spring. Have your SUBARU

dealer perform this check.

Cooling and dehumidifying in

high humidity and low tem-

perature weather conditions

Under certain weather conditions (high

relative humidity, low temperatures, etc.)

a small amount of water vapor emission

from the air outlets may be noticed. This

condition is normal and does not indicate

any problem with the air conditioning sys-

tem.

Air conditioner compressor

shut-off when engine is

heavily loaded

To improve acceleration and gas mileage,

the air conditioner compressor is de-

signed to temporarily shut off during air

conditioner operation whenever the accel-

erator is fully depressed such as during

rapid acceleration or when driving on a

steep upgrade.

Refrigerant for your climate

control system

Your air conditioner uses ozone friendly

refrigerant HFC134a. Therefore, the

method of adding, changing or checking

the refrigerant is different from the method

for CFC12 (freon). Consult your SUBARU

dealer for service. Repairs needed as a

result of using the wrong refrigerant are

not covered under warranty.

Air filtration system (if

equipped)

If your vehicle’s air conditioning system is

equipped with an air filtration system, re-

place the filter element according to the

replacement schedule shown in the fol-

lowing. This schedule should be followed

to maintain the filter’s dust collection abili-

ty. Under extremely dusty conditions, the

filter should be replaced more frequently.

It is recommended that you have your fil-

ter checked or replaced by your SUBARU

dealer. For replacement, use only a genu-

ine SUBARU air filter kit.

Replacement schedule:

Every 12 months or 7,500 miles (12,000

km) whichever comes first

Contact your SUBARU dealer if the

following occurs, even if it is not yet

time to change the filter:

– Reduction of the air flow through

the vents.

– Windshield gets easily fogged or

misted.

Climate control

4-13

–

CONTINUED

–

NOTE

The filter can influence the air condi-

tioning, heating and defroster perfor-

mance if not properly maintained.

Replacing an air filter

1. Remove the glove box.

1)Open the glove box.

2)Remove the nine screws securing the

glove box.

1) Air filter cover

2. Remove the air filter cover.

1) Air filter element

2) Arrow mark

3. Replace the air filter element with new

one.

1) Air filter cover

4. Reinstall the air filter cover.

400680

400553

12400554

The arrow mark on the filter must

point UP.

1400555

4-14

Climate control

5. Reinstall the glove box.

6. Close the glove box.

1) Service label

2) Caution label

7. LABEL installation

1) Fill out the information on the service

label (small).

2)Attach the service label to the driver

side door pillar and the caution label to

the driver side end of the instrument

panel.

400680

400557

Audio

Antenna system .................................................. 5-2

FM reception ........................................................... 5-2

Installation of accessories ................................ 5-2

Audio set ............................................................. 5-3

Type A audio set ..................................................... 5-3

Type B audio set ..................................................... 5-3

In-dash 6 CD auto changer (Optional audio

unit – if equipped) ................................................ 5-3

Type A audio set (if equipped) .......................... 5-4

Radio operation ...................................................... 5-4

Compact disc player operation ............................. 5-7

CD changer control (if optional in-dash CD

changer is connected) ......................................... 5-9

Type B audio set (if equipped) .......................... 5-11

Radio operation ...................................................... 5-11

Built-in CD changer control ................................... 5-15

Auxiliary unit operation .......................................... 5-20

In-dash 6 CD auto changer (if equipped) ......... 5-23

Loading and unloading compact discs ................ 5-23

Precautions to observe when handling a

compact disc ................................................... 5-25

5-2

Audio

Antenna system

The antenna is printed on the inner sur-

face of the left side rear quarter window

glass.

FM reception

Although FM is normally static free, recep-

tion can be affected by the surrounding ar-

ea, atmospheric conditions, station

strength and transmitter distance. Build-

ings or other obstructions may cause mo-

mentary static, flutter or station interfer-

ence. If reception continues to be unsatis-

factory, switch to a stronger station.

Installation of accessories

Always consult your SUBARU dealer be-

fore installing a citizen band radio or other

transmitting device in your vehicle. Such

devices may cause the electronic control

system to malfunction if they are incorrect-

ly installed or if they are not suited for the

vehicle.

Do not use sharp instruments or

window cleaner containing abra-

sives to clean the inner surface of

the window on which the antenna is

printed. Doing so may damage the

antenna printed on the window.

500011

Audio

5-3

Audio set

Your SUBARU may be equipped with one

of the following audio sets. See the pages

indicated in this section for operating de-

tails.

Type A audio set

yRadio operation: refer to page 5-4

yCompact disc player operation: refer to

page 5-7

yCD changer control: refer to page 5-9

Type B audio set

yRadio operation: refer to page 5-11

yBuilt-in CD changer operation: refer to

page 5-15

yAuxiliary unit operation: refer to page 5-

In-dash 6 CD auto changer

(Optional audio unit – if

equipped)

yInserting and removing a disc or all

discs: refer to page 5-23

500257

6CD CHANGER C-123

CD/AUX

FM/AM

DISP

SCAN

SEEK/TRACK/CAT

RPT/RDM

SOUND

PUSH

TUNE/FOLDER/CH

POWER/VOL

PUSH

BRIGHT

FOLDER DISC ST TRACK RPT RDM WMA MP3 CAT MUTE

123

456

SAT

CAT

LOAD

654321

500261

500216

5-4

Audio

Type A audio set (if equipped)

The radio will operate only when the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.

Radio operation

500258

(1) (2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(1) Power switch, Volume control, Tone/

Fader/Balance control dial

(2) BAND button

(3) Tuning buttons

(4) Preset buttons

(5) AUDIO button

(6) SCAN button

TPower switch and volume/bass/tre-

ble/fader/balance control (PWR/

VOL)

The dial (1) is used for both power (ON/

OFF) and volume control. The radio is

turned ON and OFF by pushing the dial

and the volume is controlled by turning the

dial.

VTone and balance control

The “VOLUME” control knob normally

function as volume control. This knob be-

come a control for Treble, Bass, Fader or

Balance when you select the appropriate

audio mode.

Choose desired volume level for each

mode by turning the “VOLUME” control

knob. The control function returns to vol-

ume control mode after approximately 5

seconds.

To change control modes: Each brief

press of the “AUDIO” button changes con-

trol modes in the following sequence start-

ing from volume control mode. (When the

Audio

5-5

–

CONTINUED

–

radio is first turned on, the control mode is

in the volume control.) Volume

(VOL)

Bass

(BAS)

Treble

(TRE)

Balance

(BAL)

Fader

(FAD)

Display Control mode

Turn counterclockwise Turn clockwise

VOL Volume control For less volume For more volume

BAS Bass control For less bass sound For more bass sound

TRE Treble control For less treble sound For more treble sound

BAL Balance control To increase left speaker volume and decrease right

speaker volume

To increase right speaker volume and decrease left

speaker volume

FAD Fader control To increase rear speaker volume and decrease front

speaker volume

To increase front speaker volume and decrease rear

speaker volume

500009

5-6

Audio

TFM/AM band selection button

(BAND)

Push the “BAND” button when the radio is

on to select FM1, FM2 or AM band recep-

tion. Each time this button is pressed, the

band will change in the following order:

The display indicates which one is cur-

rently selected.

TStereo indicator

The stereo indicator “ST” will come on

when an FM stereo broadcast is received.

TTuning (TUNE)

VManual tuning (TUNE)

Push the “ ” side of the tuning button

(3) to increase the tuning frequency and

press the “ ” side of the button to de-

crease it.

Each time the button is pressed, the fre-

quency changes 10 KHz in the AM wave-

band and 0.2 MHz in the FM waveband.

TSeek tuning

If the tuning button (3) is pressed for long-

er than half of a second, the radio will be-

gin to automatically search for receivable

frequencies and will stop at the first one

found. This function may not be available,

however, when radio signals are weak. In

such a situation, perform manual tuning to

select the desired station.

TAutomatic tuning (SCAN)

Press the “SCAN” button (6) to change the

radio to the SCAN mode. In this mode, the

radio scans through the radio band until a

station is found. The radio will stop at the

station for five seconds while displaying

the frequency, after which scanning will

continue until the entire band has been

scanned from the low end to the high end.

Press the “SCAN” button again to cancel

the SCAN mode and to stop on any dis-

played frequency.

When the “SCAN” button is pressed for

automatic tuning, stations are scanned in

the direction of low frequencies to high fre-

quencies only.

Automatic tuning may not function proper-

ly if the station reception is weakened by

distance from the station or proximity to

tall buildings and hills.

TSelecting preset stations

Presetting a station with a preset button

(4) allows you to select that station in a

single operation. Up to six AM, FM1 and

FM2 stations each may be preset.

THow to preset stations

1. Press the “BAND” selection button to

select AM, FM1 or FM2 reception.

2. Press the “SCAN” button (6) or tune

the radio manually until the desired station

frequency is displayed.

3. Press one of the preset buttons (4) for

at least 2 seconds to store the frequency.

At this time, there will momentarily be no

sound from the radio. If the button is

pressed for less than 2 seconds, the pre-

ceding selection will remain in memory.

yIf the connection between the radio

and battery is broken for any reason

such as vehicle maintenance or radio

removal, all stations stored in the pre-

set buttons are cleared. If this occurs,

it is necessary to reset the preset but-

tons.

yIf a cell phone is placed near the ra-

dio, it may cause the radio to emit

noise when it receives calls. This noise

does not indicate a radio fault.

FM1 FM2 AM

Audio

5-7

–

CONTINUED

–

Compact disc player operation

500259

(15) (7) (8) (9)

(10)(11)(12)(13)(14)

(7) Disc slot

(8) CD button

(9) Eject button

(10) Fast-forwarding and track up button

(11) Fast-reversing and track down button

(12) Random button

(13) Repeat button

(14) Scan button

(15) PWR (power) switch

TTo play back a compact disc

VWhen CD is not in the player

Hold a disc with a finger in the center hole

while gripping the edge of the disc, then

insert it in to the slot (with the label side

up) and the player will automatically pull

the disc into position.

A single CD (8 cm/3 inch CD) may also be

used without any adapter.

yMake sure to always insert a disc

with the label side up. If a disc is insert-

ed with the label side down, it might be

ejected or the player might shut off.

yAfter the last song finishes, the play-

er will automatically return to track 1

(the first song on the disc).

VWhen CD is in the player

Press the “CD” button (8). The display will

5-8

Audio

show “CD-IN” and the player will start

playback.

NOTE

After the last song finishes, playback

will automatically return to track 1 (the

first song on the disc).

TTo stop playback of a CD

When the “PWR” button (15) is pressed

during playback of a CD, the CD stops

playing temporarily. To let the CD resume

playing, press the button again.

TTo select a song from its beginning

VForward direction

Briefly press the “ ” side of the button

(10) to skip to the beginning of the next

track. Each time this side of the button is

pressed, the indicated track number will

increase.

VBackward direction

Briefly press the “ ” side of the button

(11) to skip to the beginning of the current

track. Each time this side of the button is

pressed, the indicated track number will

decrease.

TFast-forwarding and fast-reversing

VFast-forwarding

Press the “ ” side of the button (10)

continuously to fast-forward the disc.

Release the button to stop fast-forward-

ing.

VFast-reversing

Press the “ ” side of the button (11)

continuously to fast-reverse the disc.

Release the button to stop fast-reversing.

TRepeat playback

Briefly press the “RPT” button (13) while a

song is playing to play the song repeated-

ly. The “RPT” indicator will come on and

the song will be played continuously. To

cancel the repeat mode, press the button

again. Then the “RPT” indicator goes out,

and normal playback mode is restored.

TRandom playback

Briefly press the “RAND” button (12) while

a disc is being played back to play all

songs on the disc in a random order. The

“RAND” indicator will come on and all

songs on the disc will be played in a ran-

dom order.

To cancel the random mode, press the

button again. Then the “RAND” indicator

goes out, and normal playback mode is

restored.

TScan

Briefly press the “SCAN” button (14), and

you can hear the first 10 seconds of each

track to search for the desired program.

To continue listening to the program,

press the “SCAN” button again. After all

tracks on the disc has been scanned, nor-

mal playback mode is restored.

TTo eject a disc from the player

When a disc is being played back or when

a disc is in the player, press the eject but-

ton “ ” (9). The disc will be ejected.

The disc may be removed even when the

ignition switch is in the “LOCK” position.

Avoid driving the vehicle with a CD

sticking out, because vibration might

make it fall out.

Audio

5-9

–

CONTINUED

–

CD changer control (if optional in-dash CD changer is connect-

ed)

An optional CD changer can be connected to this audio unit. Consult the instructions that

accompany the CD changer for operating the CD changer itself (e.g., how to load or un-

load CDs). See your SUBARU dealer for more information.

500260

(16)

(17)(18)(19)(20)

(16) CD button

(17) Track selection buttons

(18) RAND (Random) button

(19) RPT (Repeat) button

(20) SCAN button

TTo start playback

When the “CD” button (16) is pressed, the

CD changer will start playback. The dis-

play shows the current disc number, track

number and the elapsed time during play-

back.

yIf a disc is in the player, the “DISC”

button is used to change from CD play-

er operation to DISC changer opera-

tion. Each time the “DISC” button is

pressed, the operating mode will

change alternately.

yAt the end of the disc, the player au-

tomatically continues with the next

disc.

yAfter playback on the last disc finish-

es, playback will automatically return

to the first disc.

yIf you have loaded fewer than 6

discs, any missing disc is automatical-

ly skipped.

TSelection of a desired disc

You can select a desired disc from among

5-10

Audio

the discs contained in the CD changer

only by pressing the corresponding num-

ber on one of the disc select buttons. If

you are to listen to the 5th disc in the CD

changer, press the “5” button of the disc

select buttons. All other discs in the CD

changer can also be selected in a similar

way.

NOTE

yNo disc change takes place if the

button corresponding to the storage

tray in which no disc is loaded is

pressed.

yIf the disc select button correspond-

ing to the disc now in playback is

pressed again, the disc will be replayed

from its beginning.

TTo select a song from its beginning

VForward direction

Briefly press the “ ” side of the button

(17) to skip to the beginning of the next

track. Each time this side of the button is

pressed, the indicated track number will

increase.

VBackward direction

Briefly press the “ ” side of the button

(17) to skip to the beginning of the current

track. Each time this side of the button is

pressed, the indicated track number will

decrease.

TFast-forwarding and fast-reversing

VFast-forwarding

Press the “ ” side of the button (17)

continuously to fast-forward the disc.

Release the button to stop fast-forward-

ing.

If you continue fast-forwarding to the end

of the disc, the CD changer will automati-

cally stop fast-forwarding and start play-

back beginning with the first track on the

current disc.

VFast-reversing

Press the “ ” side of the button (17)

continuously to fast-reverse the disc.

Release the button to stop fast-reversing.

If you continue fast-reversing to the begin-

ning of the disc, the CD changer will auto-

matically stop fast-reversing and start

playback beginning with the first track on

the current disc.

TRepeat playback

Press the “RPT” button (19) while a song

is playing to play the song repeatedly. The

“RPT” indicator will come on and the song

will be played continuously. To cancel the

repeat mode, press the button again.

Then the “RPT” indicator goes out, and

normal playback mode is restored.

TRandom playback

Press the “RAND” button (18) while a disc

is being played back to play all songs on

the disc in a random order. The “RAND”

indicator will come on and all songs on the

disc will be played in a random order.

To cancel the random mode, press the

button again. Then the “RAND” indicator

goes out, and normal playback mode is

restored.

TScan (a convenient way to become

familiar with a disc)

1. Press the “SCAN” button (20).

– The display shows “SCAN” and the

track number being scanned.

– You hear the first 10 seconds of each

track.

– The operation is automatically

cleared after playing all programs.

Then, normal playback starts.

2. Press the “SCAN” button again when

you hear a track you like.

– Normal playback resumes.

TTo stop playback

To stop playback and switch over to the

radio mode, press the “BAND” button.

Audio

5-11

–

CONTINUED

–

Type B audio set (if equipped)

The audio set will operate only when the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.

Radio operation

500325

(1) (2) (4)(3) (5)

(6)

(1) Power switch, Volume, Brightness

control dial

(2) FM/AM selection button

(3) Seek button

(4) Scan button

(5) Sound/Tune control dial

(6) Preset buttons

TPower switch and volume/bright-

ness control (POWER/VOL/BRIGHT)

The dial (1) is used for both power (ON/

OFF) and volume control. The radio is

turned ON and OFF by pushing the dial,

and the volume is controlled by turning the

dial.

TSound control and tune/folder se-

lect/channel control (SOUND/TUNE/

FOLDER/CH)

The dial (5) is used for selecting the sound

control mode with each brief press of the

dial, and for adjusting each level by turn-

ing it. It is also used for tuning the radio/

folder selection (only when playing MP3 or

WMA)/channel selection (satellite radio*)

when the “FM/AM”, “CD/AUX” and “SAT”

are selected.

(*: Use of satellite radio (Sirius) requires a

tuner, antenna and a service contract. For

details, please contact your SUBARU

dealer.)

5-12

Audio

VSound control

The dial (5) controls the Bass, Midrange,

Treble, Balance and Fader when you se-

lect the appropriate sound control mode.

Choose the desired setting for each mode

by depressing the “SOUND” control dial

(5). The control function returns to last

mode after approximately 5 seconds.

To change control modes: Each brief

press of the “SOUND” button (5) changes

control modes in the following sequence

starting from bass control mode.

Display Control mode

Turn counterclockwise Turn clockwise

BASS Bass control For less bass sound For more bass sound

MIDDLE Midrange control For less midrange sound For more midrange sound

TREBLE Treble control For less treble sound For more treble sound

FADER Fader control To increase rear speaker volume and decrease front

speaker volume

To increase front speaker volume and decrease rear

speaker volume

BALANCE Balance control To increase left speaker volume and decrease right

speaker volume

To increase right speaker volume and decrease left

speaker volume

VOLUME Volume control For less volume For more volume

500009

Audio

5-13

–

CONTINUED

–

VDisplay illumination dimness can-

cellation (BRIGHT)

The brightness of the radio display dims

when the light switch is in the “ ” or

“ ” position. If this makes the display

difficult to read, press the volume dial for

more than 2 seconds to return the display

to original brightness. Subsequently

pressing the volume dial again for more

than 2 seconds or if you can safely do so,

turning the light switch to the OFF position

and back to the “ ” or “ ” posi-

tion makes the radio display dim again.

TFM/AM selection button (FM/AM)

Push the “FM/AM” button (2) when the ra-

dio is on to select FM1, FM2 or AM recep-

tion. Each time this button is pressed, the

band will change in the following order:

The display indicates which one is cur-

rently selected.

TStereo indicator

The stereo indicator “ST” will come on

when an FM stereo broadcast is received.

TManual tuning (TUNE)

Turn the tuning dial (5) clockwise to in-

crease the tuning frequency and turn the

dial counterclockwise to decrease it. Each

click the dial is turned, the frequency

changes 10 kHz in the AM waveband and

0.2 MHz in the FM waveband.

TSeek tuning

When the “ ” side of the “SEEK/

TRACK/CAT” button (3) is depressed, the

radio will begin to automatically seek up

for receivable frequencies and will stop at

the first one found. For the “ ” side, the

radio will begin to automatically seek

down. This function may not be available,

however, when radio signals are weak. In

such a situation, perform manual tuning to

select the desired station.

TAutomatic tuning (SCAN)

Press the “SCAN” button (4) to change the

radio to the SCAN mode. In this mode, the

radio scans through the radio band until a

station is found. The radio will stop at a re-

ceivable station for 5 seconds while dis-

playing the frequency by blinking, after

which scanning will continue until the en-

tire band has been scanned from the low

end to the high end. Press the “SCAN”

button again to cancel the SCAN mode

and to stop on any displayed frequency.

When the “SCAN” button is pressed for

automatic tuning, stations are scanned in

the direction of low frequencies to high fre-

quencies only. Automatic tuning may not

function properly if the station reception is

weakened by distance from the station or

proximity to tall buildings and hills.

TSelecting preset stations

Presetting a station with a preset button

(6) allows you to select that station in a

single operation. Up to six AM, FM1 and

FM2 stations each may be preset.

THow to preset stations

1. Press the “FM/AM” button (2) to select

AM, FM1 or FM2 reception.

2. Press the "SCAN" button (4) or tune

the radio manually until the desired station

frequency is displayed.

3. Press one of the preset buttons (6) for

at least 2 seconds to store the frequency.

The frequency of the station will flash

once on the display at this time.

yIf the connection between the radio

and battery is broken for any reason

such as vehicle maintenance or radio

removal, all stations stored in the pre-

BALANCE

BASS

FADER

TREBLEMIDDLE

FM1 FM2 AM

5-14

Audio

set buttons are cleared. If this occurs,

it is necessary to reset the preset but-

tons.

yIf a cell phone is placed near the ra-

dio, it may cause the radio to emit

noise when the phone receives calls.

This noise does not indicate a problem

with the radio.

Audio

5-15

–

CONTINUED

–

Built-in CD changer control

500323

(7) (8) (9) (12)(11)(10) (14)(13)

(15)(16)

(7) CD button

(8) Eject button

(9) Disc slot

(10) Track selection buttons

(11) Repeat/Random button

(12) Disc number indicator

(13) Load button

(14) Folder selection dial

(15) Disc selection buttons

(16) Display button

NOTE

yMake sure to always insert a disc

with the label side up. If a disc is insert-

ed with the label side down, it might be

ejected or the player might shut off.

yIf a disc is inserted during a radio

broadcast, the disc will interrupt the

broadcast.

yThe player is designed to be able to

play music CD-Rs and music CD-RWs,

but it may not be able to play certain

ones.

y8 cm/3 inch CDs are not supported,

and if inserted, they will be immediate-

ly ejected.

5-16

Audio

THow to insert a CD(s)

VInserting a CD

1. Briefly press the “LOAD” button (13). If

the magazine in the player has an idle po-

sition where you can insert a disc, the disc

number indicator associated with the idle

position will blink. If no indicator blinks, it

means that there is no idle position in the

magazine.

2. When “IN” is displayed, insert the disc.

Once you have inserted the disc, the disc

number indicator will stop blinking. The

disc will be then automatically drawn in,

and the player will begin to play back the

first track of the disc.

yTo insert more discs in succession, re-

peat Steps 1 and 2. The magazine will be

loaded with discs in the ascending order

of position number. If you do not insert any

disc within 15 seconds after you have

pressed the “LOAD” button and “IN” is dis-

played, the player will begin to play back

the first track of the last disc you have in-

serted.

yWhile the player is in the loading mode,

if you press the “FM/AM” button (2), the

player will enter the standby mode. Press

the “CD/AUX” button (7) to start playback.

VInserting a disc in a desired position

1. Briefly press the “LOAD” button (13). If

the magazine in the player has an idle po-

sition where you can insert a disc, the disc

number indicator (12) associated with the

idle position will blink.

2. Press the disc selection button (15) at

the position where you want to insert a

disc. The associated disc number indica-

tor will blink.

3. If you insert a disc during the 15 sec-

ond period while “IN” is displayed, the disc

will be automatically drawn in, and the

player will start playback of the disc, be-

ginning with the first track.

yTo insert more discs in succession, re-

peat Steps 1 and 3.

yWhile the player is in the loading mode,

if you press the “FM/AM” button (2), the

player will enter standby mode. Press the

“CD/AUX” button (7) to start playback.

VLoading all the magazine (Full disc

loading mode)

1. If you continue to press the “LOAD”

button (13) for more than 2 seconds, the

player will enter the full disc loading mode.

2. The disc number indicator (12) associ-

ated with the idle position will blink. The

magazine will be loaded with discs in the

ascending order of position number.

3. When the loading of a disc is complete,

the next disc number indicator (12) will

blink. Then repeat Step 2.

4. When the magazine is filled with discs

by repeating Steps 2 and 3, the player will

start playback of the discs, beginning with

the one inserted first. If you fail to insert

any disc during each 15 seconds interval,

the full disc loading mode will be can-

celed, and the player will start playback of

the disc inserted first.

THow to play back a CD or make a

pause

VWhen there is no CD inserted:

Insert a CD by referring to “How to insert a

CD(s)”.

When a CD is loaded, the player will start

playback of the CD, beginning with the

first track.

VWhen there are CDs loaded:

Depress the “CD/AUX” button to turn on

the CD (when the last mode of the player

is CD) and press a desired one of the disc

select buttons (15). The player will then

start playback of the selected CD, begin-

ning with the first track.

TTo select a track from its beginning

VForward direction

Briefly press the “ ” side of the button

(10) to skip to the beginning of the next

Audio

5-17

–

CONTINUED

–

track. Each time the button is pressed, the

indicated track number will increase.

VBackward direction

Briefly press the “ ” side of the button

(10) to skip to the beginning of the current

track. Each time the button is pressed, the

indicated track number will decrease.

TTo select a folder (for MP3/WMA au-

dio)

Turn the “TUNE/FOLDER/CH” dial (14) to

select the folder.

TFast-forwarding and fast-reversing

VFast-forwarding

Press the “ ” side of the button (10)

continuously to fast-forward the disc. Re-

lease the button to stop fast-forwarding.

VFast-reversing

Press the “ ” side of the button (10)

continuously to fast-reverse the disc. Re-

lease the button to stop fast-reversing.

TRepeat playback

Depress the “RPT/RDM” button (11) while

a song is playing to play the song repeat-

edly. Each time this button is pressed, the

repeat play mode will change in the follow-

ing order:

The “RPT” indicator will come on and the

song will be played continuously. When

the repeat OFF is selected, the “RPT” in-

dicator goes out and normal playback

mode is restored.

yThe repeat play mode will be can-

celled if you perform any of the follow-

ing steps:

yPress the “RPT/RDM” button to se-

lect the repeat OFF.

yPress the eject button.

yPress the “LOAD” button.

ySelect the radio mode.

yTurn the "TUNE/FOLDER/CH" dial

(for MP3/WMA audio).

yTurn off the power of the audio

equipment.

yTurn the ignition switch to the “OFF”

position.

TRandom playback

Press the “RPT/RDM” button (11) for

more than 2 seconds while a disc is being

played back to play all songs on the disc

in a random order.

The “RDM” indicator will come on and all

songs on the disc will be played in a ran-

dom order. When the random OFF is se-

lected, the “RDM” indicator goes out and

normal playback mode is restored.

yThe random play mode will be can-

celled if you perform any of the follow-

ing steps:

yPress the “RPT/RDM” button to se-

lect the random OFF.

yPress the eject button.

yPress the “LOAD” button.

ySelect the radio mode.

yTurn the “TUNE/FOLDER/CH” dial

(for MP3/WMA audio).

yTurn off the power of the audio

equipment.

yTurn the ignition switch to the “OFF”

position.

THow to unload CDs from the player

VEjecting a CD from the player

Of the discs loaded, you can select and re-

move only one disc.

1. Press the disc select button (15) of the

disc whose disc number indicator (12) is

ON.

2. Press the eject button (8). Then the

disc number indicator associated with the

disc you have selected will blink, and the

disc will be ejected. To remove more discs

in succession, repeat Steps 1 and 2. If you

Track repeat

Disc repeatRepeat OFF

Folder repeat

(only for MP3/WMA audio)

Disc randomRandom OFF

5-18

Audio

press the eject button after turning OFF

the ignition switch, only one disc will be

ejected.

VEjecting all discs from the player

(All disc ejection mode)

1. If you continue to press the eject button

(8) for more than 2 seconds, the player will

enter the all disc ejection mode.

2. Remove the disc that has been eject-

ed, the display indicates “CD ALL EJECT”

(when the ignition switch is in the “Acc” po-

sition) and disc indicator will blink. The

other discs loaded will then be ejected one

after another. If you do not remove the

ejected disc within 15 seconds, the “All

disc ejection mode” will be canceled.

NOTE

Avoid driving the vehicle with a CD

sticking out, because vibration might

make it fall out.

TTitle display selection

If you briefly press the “DISP” button (16)

during playback, the indication will change

to the next one in the following sequence.

yFor MP3/WMA:

yFor Satellite radio:

The display mode that you selected will

not be changed until you select the display

mode again.

When you depress the “DISP” button for

more than 2 seconds, the title will be

scrolled so you can see all of it. You will

see 12 characters at a time.

yThe page scroll mode will be can-

celled if you perform any of the follow-

ing steps:

yWhen you do not operate any button

within 10 seconds.

yPress any button to select another

play mode.

yPress the eject button.

yPress the disc selection button.

ySelect the radio mode.

yPress the “ ” or “ ” button.

yTurn off the power of the audio

equipment.

yTurn the ignition switch to the “OFF”

position.

When the disc has no title, the display

indicates “NO TITLE”.

TWhen the following messages are

displayed

If one of the following messages is dis-

played while operating the CD player, de-

termine the cause based on the following

information. If you cannot clear those

messages, please contact your SUBARU

dealer.

VWhen “PUSH EJECT” is displayed

This message means that there is a me-

chanical error. Depress the eject button to

unload the disc. Check the disc for dam-

age or deformation, and also check that

the correct disc is inserted. Do not try to

unload the disc forcibly. 8 cm/3 inch CDs

are not supported, and if inserted, they will

be immediately ejected and this error

message will be displayed. If the disc can-

not be unloaded or the error message re-

mains displayed, please contact your

SUBARU dealer.

Do not attempt to insert two or more

discs into the slot at a time. Doing

so can cause mechanical damage to

the CD changer.

TITLE OFF FOLDER TITLE FILE TITLE

TRACK TITLE

ARTIST TITLE

ALBUM TITLE

TITLE OFF TRACK TITLE

ARTIST TITLE

ALBUM TITLE

Audio

5-19

–

CONTINUED

–

VWhen “CHECK DISC” is displayed

Press the eject button to unload the discs.

Check that the disc is not damaged or

scratched, and also check that the disc is

inserted correctly. Some CD-RW discs

may be causing this error message to ap-

pear. Check that the disc type (i.e., 8 cm/

3 inch CDs are not supported) and data

format are correct. This player can only

play MP3 and WMA data formats. If the

disc cannot be unloaded or the error mes-

sage remains displayed, please contact

your SUBARU dealer.

5-20

Audio

Auxiliary unit operation

500324

(17) (19)(18) (20) (21)

(22) (23)

(17) AUX button

(18) Category button

(19) Scan button

(20) Satellite radio* button

(21) Category selection button

(22) Preset buttons

(23) Channel selection dial

(*: Use of satellite radio (Sirius) requires a

tuner, antenna and a service contract. For

details, please contact your SUBARU

dealer.)

“Satellite Radio mode” and “AUX mode”

are available as well as the CD changer

mode when the unit is in the Auxiliary unit

mode.

NOTE

yFor use of the In-dash CD changer,

refer to the section of “In-dash 6 CD

auto changer (if equipped)” in this

chapter.

yUse of satellite radio (Sirius) requires

a tuner, antenna and a service con-

tract. For details, please contact your

SUBARU dealer.

yThe “AUX mode” can be used when

the appropriate device is connected to

the AUX terminal.

yThe output sound of the portable au-

dio player is not loud, and the sound

via the vehicle’s speakers that are con-

Audio

5-21

–

CONTINUED

–

nected to the vehicle audio set is very

quiet. If you turn up the volume of the

audio set, the volume becomes louder.

However, when you change the audio

to the radio mode or to a CD player, the

sound becomes a lot louder. Remem-

ber to turn down the volume when you

change between them.

TAUX audio jack (if equipped)

The AUX (auxiliary) audio jack is located

behind the lid under the climate controls.

Push gently on the lid to open it.

TSatellite Radio mode (if equipped)

Press the “SAT” button (20) to select the

“Satellite radio mode” (when the SR-BB is

connected).

Use of satellite radio (Sirius) requires a

tuner, antenna and a service contract.

For details, please contact your

SUBARU dealer.

Visit Sirius Satellite Radio at

sirius.com or call 1-888-539-SIRIUS

(7474) for more information. Sirius, the

Sirius dog logo, channel names and

logos are trademarks of SIRIUS Satel-

lite Radio Inc.

VSatellite radio reception

Satellite radio signals are best received in

areas with a clear view of the open sky. In

areas where there are tall buildings, trees,

tunnels or other structures that may ob-

struct the signal of the satellites, there

may be signal interruptions. Other circum-

stances that may result in signal loss in-

clude driving near a wall, steep cliff or hill,

or driving on the lower level of a multi-

tiered road or inside a parking garage.

To help reduce this condition, satellite ra-

dio providers have installed ground-based

repeaters in heavily populated areas.

500277

AUX

5-22

Audio

However, you may still experience recep-

tion problems in some areas.

VDisplaying Sirius ID of tuner

When you activate Sirius, you should

have your Sirius tuner ID ready because

each tuner is identified by its unique Sirius

tuner ID.

The Sirius ID will be needed when you ac-

tivate Sirius and receive Sirius customer

support.

The Sirius ID can be found on the audio

display by tuning the channel to “0”.

Turn the “TUNE/FOLDER/CH” dial (23) to

select the satellite radio channel.

VChannel selection

Turn the “TUNE/FOLDER/CH” dial (23) to

select the radio channel. Turn the tuning

dial clockwise to change the channel up-

ward and turn the dial counterclockwise to

change the channel downward with each

click of the dial.

VCategory selection

Press the “SEEK/TRACK/CAT” button

(18) to select the category of radio chan-

nel. Press the “” side of the button

(18) to change the category upward and

the “” side of the button to downward

with each press of the button.

VChannel preset

Presetting a channel with a preset button

(22) allows you to select that station in a

single operation. Up to six SR1, SR2 and

SR3 channels each may be preset.

Press one of the preset buttons for at

least 2 seconds to store the channel. The

number of the channel will flash once on

the display, and the unit produces a beep

sound at this time.

VChannel scan

Press the “SCAN” button (19) to change

the radio to the SCAN mode. In this mode,

the radio scans through the channel until

a station is found. The radio will stop at the

station for 5 seconds while displaying the

channel number, after which scanning will

continue until the entire channel has been

scanned from the low end to the high end.

Press the “SCAN” button (19) again to

cancel the SCAN mode and to stop on any

displayed station.

When the “SCAN” button is pressed for

automatic tuning, stations are only

scanned in an upward direction.

VCategory mode

Press the “CAT” button (21) for at least 2

seconds to turn the category mode on. In

this mode, the radio operations (channel

selection, channel scan) are performed

only in the selected category. To cancel

the category mode, press the “CAT” but-

ton (21) for at least 2 seconds again.

VBand selection

Push the “SAT” button (20) when the radio

is on to select SR1, SR2 or SR3 reception.

Each time this button is pressed, the band

will change in the following order:

TAUX mode

Press the “CD/AUX” button (17) to select

the “AUX mode” (when the AUX unit is

connected to the AUX terminal).

SR1 SR2 SR3

Audio

5-23

–

CONTINUED

–

In-dash 6 CD auto changer (if equipped)

Loading and unloading compact discs

(5) (1) (2)

(4) (3)

500222

(1) Disc slot

(2) Disc indicators (disc No.1 to 6)

(3) Disc select buttons (disc No.1 to 6)

(4) Eject button

(5) Disc slot indicator

5-24

Audio

TTo insert a disc

1. Press one of the disc select buttons (3)

(numbered from 1 to 6) for which the disc

indicator light (2) is “OFF”.

The disc indicator lights are located direct-

ly above the corresponding disc select

buttons.

2. The indicator will begin blinking. The

blinking will last for 15 seconds.

During this period, insert a desired disc,

and the disc will begin to play. (If any disc

is not inserted during this period, the “Disc

slot” (1) door will close. Repeat Step 1.)

Be sure to hold a disc with the label side

(the side where titles are printed) up.

3. To insert another disc, repeat Steps 1

and 2 choosing a different disc select but-

ton.

TTo insert six discs at a time

1. Press and hold the disc select button

number 1 until all disc indicators begin

blinking (approximately 1.5 seconds).

2. The indicators will blink for 15 seconds.

During this period, insert desired six discs.

3. When all discs are loaded, the first disc

will begin to play. (If no disc is inserted

within this 15 seconds, the entire disc load

sequence will be canceled.)

TTo remove a disc

1. Press the desired one of the disc select

buttons (3) (numbered from 1 to 6) for

which the disc indicator light is on.

2. Press the eject button (4). The selected

disc will be ejected and the indicator light

will begin blinking.

3. To remove another disc, repeat Steps

1 and 2 choosing a different disc select

button.

(To remove discs when the ignition switch

is in the “Lock” position, press the eject

button, and the first disc will be ejected.

Press the eject button again, and the next

disc will be ejected and so on. At this time,

the disc select buttons are disabled.)

TTo remove all discs at one time

1. Press and hold the eject button (4) until

all “Disc” indicators begin blinking (ap-

proximately 1.5 seconds), and the first

disc will be ejected.

2. When the disc is removed, the next

one will be ejected, and so on.

TTo replace a playing disc with an-

other

Simply press the desired one of disc se-

lect buttons (3) (numbered from 1 to 6) or

press the disc select button on the radio

unit to select the desired disc, and the disc

will begin to play.

TDisc indicators

Lit: when the corresponding storage tray

is occupied by a disc.

Blinking: Disc player is either in loading,

eject or changing mode.

yDo not attempt to insert two or

more discs into the slot at a time.

Doing so can cause mechanical

damage to the CD changer.

yUse only music CDs identified by

a mark.

yDo not use CDs listed in the fol-

lowing which could cause dam-

age to the CD player.

– 3 inch (8 cm) compact disc

– Any disc with a peel-off or seal

on it

–Bent disc

– Cleaning disc

– CD accessory (E.g., 3 inch (8

cm) disc adapter)

yDo not insert or remove any disc

when the automatic transmission

selector lever is in the park posi-

tion; the selector lever in that po-

sition can interfere with disc in-

sertion or removal, causing

scratches on the disc surface (for

AT vehicles).

Audio

5-25

–

CONTINUED

–

OFF: No disc is loaded or the ignition

switch is in the “LOCK” position.

VOpen/Closed disc slot indicator

When the disc slot is open, the disc indica-

tors on both sides of the slot illuminate.

TFunction control

Refer to CD changer control operating in-

structions described in the “Type A audio

set (if equipped)” section.

Precautions to observe when

handling a compact disc

Use only compact discs (CDs) that have

the mark shown in the following illustra-

tion.

You may also use compact discs (CD-Rs

and CD-RWs) that have the following

marks, but you may not use some discs if

they were produced using writing methods

not compatible with your vehicle’s audio

system.

yYou cannot use a DualDisc in the CD

player. If you insert a DualDisc into the

player, the disc may not come out again,

possibly causing the player to malfunc-

tion.

yIn cold and/or rainy weather, dew can

500033

500010

DualDisc

500396

5-26

Audio

form inside the CD player, preventing nor-

mal operation. If this happens, eject the

CD and wait for the player to dry out.

ySkipping may occur when the CD player

is subjected to severe vibration (for exam-

ple, when the vehicle is driven on a rough

surface).

yTo remove a disc from the case, press

the center of the case and hold both edg-

es of the disc. If the disc surface is

touched directly, contamination could

cause poor tone quality. Do not touch the

disc surface.

yUse a clean disc whenever possible. If

there are deposits, wipe the disc surface

from the center outward with a dry, soft

cloth. Be sure not to use a hard cloth, thin-

ner, benzene, alcohol, etc.

yDo not use any disc that is scratched,

deformed, or cracked. Also, do not use

any disc that has a non-standard shape

(for example, a heart shape). Malfunctions

or problems might result.

yA disc is vulnerable to heat. Never keep

it either in places exposed to direct sun-

light, near heaters or in vehicles parked in

the sun or on hot days.

500034

Interior equipment

Interior lights ...................................................... 6-2

Dome light ............................................................... 6-2

Cargo area light ..................................................... 6-2

Map lights ........................................................... 6-3

Sun visors ........................................................... 6-3

Vanity mirror ........................................................... 6-3

Storage compartments ...................................... 6-4

Glove box ................................................................ 6-4

Center console ........................................................ 6-4

Overhead console .................................................. 6-6

Dashboard storage compartment ......................... 6-6

Convenience net ..................................................... 6-6

Pocket (if equipped) ............................................... 6-7

Cup holders ........................................................ 6-7

Front passenger’s cup holder ............................... 6-8

Rear passenger’s cup holder ................................ 6-8

Accessory power outlets ................................... 6-8

Use with a cigarette lighter

(Canada only, if equipped) .................................. 6-10

Ashtray (Canada only, if equipped) .................. 6-11

Floor mat ............................................................. 6-12

Coat hook ............................................................ 6-12

Cargo area cover (if equipped) ......................... 6-13

Using the cover ....................................................... 6-13

To remove the cover housing ................................ 6-13

Stowage of the cover ............................................. 6-13

To install the cover housing .................................. 6-13

Shopping bag hook ............................................ 6-14

Cargo tie-down hooks ........................................ 6-14

Cargo area bars .................................................. 6-14

Under-floor storage compartment .................... 6-15

6-2

Interior equipment

Interior eq uipment

Interior lights

When leaving your vehicle, make sure the

light goes out to avoid battery discharge.

Dome light

The dome light switch has three positions:

ON: The light stays on continuously.

DOOR (middle position): The dome light

comes on when any of the doors or the

rear gate is opened. The light remains on

for several seconds and gradually goes

out after all doors and the rear gate are

closed.

If a door or the rear gate is left open,

the light flashes and a chime sounds

about 30 minutes later and then the

light is turned off automatically.

The light also can be turned on by use of

the keyless entry transmitter. See the “Re-

mote keyless entry system” section in

chapter 2 for detailed information.

OFF: The light stays off.

Cargo area light

The cargo area light switch has three po-

sitions:

ON: The light stays on continuously.

OFF: The light stays off.

DOOR: The light comes on only when the

rear gate is opened.

NOTE

If a door or the rear gate is left open,

the light flashes and a chime sounds

about 30 minutes later and then the

light is turned off automatically.

The light also can be turned on by use of

the keyless entry transmitter. See the “Re-

mote keyless entry system” section in

chapter 2 for detailed information.

DOOR

OFF

600078

OFF

DOOR

600079

Interior equipment

6-3

Map lights

To turn on the map light, push the switch.

To turn it off, push the switch again.

When leaving the vehicle, make sure the

light is turned off to avoid battery dis-

charge.

Sun visors

To block out glare, swing down the visors.

To use the sun visor at a side window,

swing it down and move it sideways.

Vanity mirror

To use the vanity mirror, swing down the

sun visor and open the vanity mirror cov-

er.

600080 600081

600082

6-4

Interior equipment

Storage compartments

Glove box

1) Lock

2) Unlock

To open the glove box, pull the handle. To

close it, push the lid firmly upward.

To lock the glove box, insert the key and

turn it clockwise.

Center console

The center console box provides a stor-

age space. In addition, the top of the con-

sole can be used as an armrest and as a

rear passenger’s cup holder.

To use as armrest:

1. Tip the console top forward from its

vertical position.

2. Push the armrest part of the console

top forward to the desired position while

pulling up the knob at the front end of the

armrest and lock it in position by releasing

the knob. Adjust the position of the arm-

rest to suit your driving position. Make

sure the armrest is securely retained.

When you slide the armrest back to its

original position, pull the knob upward as

you do so.

To return the console top to the vertical

position, pull upward the knob at the front

end of the armrest while raising the con-

sole top until it emits a click.

yAlways keep the storage compart-

ment closed while driving to re-

duce the risk of injury in the event

of sudden stops or an accident.

yDo not store spray cans, contain-

ers with flammable or corrosive

liquids or any other dangerous

items in the storage compartment.

600471

600519

600473

Interior equipment

6-5

–

CONTINUED

–

To use as rear passenger’s cup holder:

With the console top tipped toward the

rear seat, it can be used as a cup holder.

To use as storage space:

Raise the console top to the vertical posi-

tion or tip it toward the rear seat. Then, pull

up the lock button of the console box and

open the lid.

When closed, the lid can be used as a tray

for placing small items in it.

Do not step or sit on the armrest,

and do not place heavy objects on it.

The armrest could break, and you

could get hurt.

600520

yTo switch from using the console

top as an armrest to using it as a

rear passenger’s cup holder, raise

the console top to the vertical po-

sition before tipping it toward the

rear seat. Otherwise the console

top may break.

yDo not place any object weighing

more than 4.4 lbs (2 kg) on the ta-

ble.

yDo not have hot drinks or other

objects on the table while driving.

During hard braking or negotia-

tion of a curve, they could fall

from the table and cause a burn or

other injury.

yBefore opening the lid of the con-

sole box, raise the console top

completely to the vertical position

or tip it toward the rear seat. Oth-

erwise, the lid may be damaged

and an injury may occur.

600475

6-6

Interior equipment

Overhead console

To open the console, push on the console

lid lightly and the lid will automatically

open.

Dashboard storage compart-

ment

To open the dashboard compartment,

push the button on the lid and the lid will

automatically open. Be sure to close the

compartment fully before driving.

Convenience net

A net for storing small articles is provided

at the front passenger’s foot-well.

yBe careful not to trap your hands

between the console top and con-

sole box when raising and tipping

the console top.

yWhen there is an object on the

console box lid, do not tip the con-

sole top forward. Otherwise, the

console top or lid could be dam-

aged, and an injury could occur.

600085

When your vehicle is in the sun or

on a warm day, the inside of the

overhead console heats up. Avoid

storing plastic or other heat-vulner-

able or flammable articles such as a

lighter in the overhead console.

600086

When your vehicle is in the sun or

on a warm day, the inside of the

overhead console heats up. Avoid

storing plastic or other heat-vulner-

able or flammable articles such as a

lighter in the overhead console.

600087

Interior equipment

6-7

–

CONTINUED

–

Pocket (if equipped)

To use the pocket, push lightly on the lid

below the climate controls.

Cup holders TIn front door trim

The door pockets can be used to hold

beverage bottles and other items.

Do not use the pocket as an ashtray

or leave a lighted cigarette in the

pocket. This could cause a fire.

600561

yWhen not in use, always keep the

cup holder stored while driving to

reduce the risk of injury in the

event of a sudden stop or an acci-

dent.

yDo not pick up a cup from the cup

holder or put a cup in the holder

while you are driving, as this may

distract you and lead to an acci-

dent.

yTake care to avoid spills. Beverag-

es, if hot, might burn you or your

passengers. Spilled beverages

may also damage upholstery or

carpets. When placing a beverage in a door

pocket, make sure it is capped. Oth-

erwise, the beverage could spill

when opening/closing the door or

while driving and, if the beverage is

hot, it could scald you.

600608

6-8

Interior equipment

Front passenger’s cup holder

A dual cup holder is built in the center con-

sole, beside the parking brake lever.

Rear passenger’s cup holder

There are rear passenger’s cup holders at

the back of the center console as well as

on the reverse side of the console top.

To use the rear passenger’s cup holder lo-

cated at the back of the center console,

open the lid by pulling its upper edge.

To use the rear passenger’s cup holder lo-

cated on the reverse side of the console

top, refer to “Center console” in the “Stor-

age compartments” part of this chapter for

details.

Accessory power outlets

Power outlet beside front pocket

Power outlet in center console

600476

600092

600559

600477

Interior equipment

6-9

–

CONTINUED

–

Power outlet in cargo area

Accessory power outlets are provided be-

side the front pocket, in the center console

and in the cargo area. Electrical power

(12V DC) from the battery is available at

any of the outlets when the ignition switch

is in either the “ACC” or “ON” position.

You can use an in-car electrical appliance

by connecting it to an outlet.

The maximum power rating of an appli-

ance that can be connected varies among

outlets as shown in the following. Do not

use an appliance which exceeds the indi-

cated wattage for each outlet.

Outlet beside front pocket: 80W or less

Outlets in center console and cargo area:

120W or less

When using appliances connected to two

or more outlets simultaneously, the total

power consumed by them must not ex-

ceed 120W.

600094

yDo not attempt to use a cigarette

lighter in the center console and

cargo area power outlets.

yDo not place any foreign objects,

especially metal ones such as

coins or aluminum foil, into the

accessory power outlet. That

could cause a short circuit. Al-

ways put the cap on the accesso-

ry power outlet when it is not in

use.

yUse only electrical appliances

which are designed for 12V DC.

The maximum power rating of an

appliance that can be connected

varies among outlets as shown in

the following. Do not use an appli-

ance which exceeds the indicated

wattage for each outlet.

Outlet beside front pocket: 80W or

less

Outlets in center console and car-

go area: 120W or less

When using appliances connect-

ed to two or more outlets simulta-

neously, the total power con-

sumed by them must not exceed

120W. Overloading the accessory

power outlet can cause a short

circuit. Do not use double adapt-

ers or more than one electrical ap-

pliance.

yIf the plug on your electric appli-

ance is either too loose or too

tight for the accessory power out-

let, this can result in a poor con-

tact or cause the plug to get stuck.

Only use plugs that fit properly.

yUse of an electric appliance in the

accessory power outlet for a long

period of time while the engine is

not running can cause battery dis-

charge.

yBefore driving your vehicle, make

sure that the plug and the cord on

your electrical appliance will not

interfere with your shifting gears

and operating the accelerator and

brake pedals. If they do, do not

use the electrical appliance while

driving.

6-10

Interior equipment

When the lid of the center console is

closed, an opening remains between

the center console and the lid to allow

the power outlet in the center console

to be used. Pass the electrical appli-

ance’s cord through this opening.

Use with a cigarette lighter

(Canada only, if equipped)

To use the accessory power outlet beside

the front pocket as a cigarette lighter sock-

et, purchase the cigarette lighter plug,

which is an optional accessory.

A cigarette lighter plug is available from

your SUBARU dealer.

The cigarette lighter operates only when

the ignition switch is in the “ON” and

“ACC” positions.

To use the cigarette lighter, push in the

knob and wait a few moments. It will auto-

matically spring up when ready for use.

600478

600095

To avoid being burned, never grasp

the lighter by the end with the heat-

ing element. Doing so could result

in injury and could also damage the

heating element.

yDo not hold the lighter pushed in,

because it will overheat.

yThe electrical power socket locat-

ed on the lower part of the instru-

ment panel is originally designed

to use a genuine SUBARU ciga-

rette lighter plug. Do not use non-

genuine cigarette lighter plugs in

the socket. Doing so may cause a

short-circuit and overheating, re-

sulting in a fire.

Interior equipment

6-11

Ashtray (Canada only, if

equipped)

It is possible to install on ashtray, which is

an optional accessory, in the front pocket.

The ashtray is available from your SUBA-

RU dealer.

To open the ashtray, push lightly on the lid

below the climate controls.

Fully close the lid after using it to help re-

duce residual smoke.

To remove the ashtray for cleaning, hold

the right and left sides of the ashtray and

pull it out.

NOTE

Particles of ash and tobacco will accu-

mulate around the hinges of the ash-

tray’s inner lid. Clean them off using a

toothbrush or other narrow-ended im-

plement.

yIf the socket is ever used for a

plug-in accessory such as a cell

phone, that may damage the por-

tion of the socket’s internal mech-

anism that causes a cigarette

lighter plug to “pop out” after its

lighter element is heated. There-

fore, do not place a cigarette light-

er plug in a socket that has been

used, even once, to power a plug-

in accessory. Doing so may cause

the plug to stick and overheat,

creating a potential fire hazard.

Do not use ashtrays as waste recep-

tacles or leave a lighted cigarette in

an ashtray. This could cause a fire.

600096

600097

6-12

Interior equipment

Floor mat

A retaining pin is located on the driver’s

side of the vehicle next to the fuel filler

door release.

The floor mat is secured using the built-in

grommet, by placing the grommet over the

pin and pushing downward.

Coat hook

The coat hook is attached to the rear left

passenger’s hand grip.

600480

Make sure the driver’s floor mat is

placed back in its proper location

and correctly secured on its retain-

ing pin. If the floor mat slips forward

and interferes with the movement of

the pedals during driving, it could

cause an accident.

600481

Never hang anything on the coat

hook that might obstruct the driv-

er’s view or that could cause injury

in sudden stops or in a collision.

And do not hang items on the coat

hook that weigh 2.2 lbs (1 kg) or

more.

600098

Interior equipment

6-13

Cargo area cover (if

equipped)

The cargo area cover is provided for cov-

ering the cargo area and to protect its con-

tents from direct sunlight. This cover is de-

tachable to make room for additional car-

go.

Using the cover

To extend the cover, pull the end of the

cover out of the housing, then insert its

hooks into the catches as shown. To re-

wind it, unhook it from the catches and it

will rewind automatically. You should hold

on to the cover and guide it back into the

cover housing while it is rewinding.

To remove the cover housing

1. Rewind the cover.

2. To take the cover housing off the re-

tainer, lift it out.

3. Store the cover housing in the cargo

area.

Stowage of the cover

On models having a temporary spare tire,

the cargo area cover can be stowed under

the cargo floor.

To install the cover housing

To install the cover, insert both ends of the

cover housing into the retainers.

600099

Do not place anything on the ex-

tended cover. Putting excessive

weight on the extended cover can

break it and an object on the cover

could tumble forward in the event of

a sudden stop or collision. This

could cause serious injury.

600100

600101

6-14

Interior equipment

Shopping bag hook

In the cargo area, there are two retract-

able shopping bag hooks (one on each

side) and four non-retractable shopping

bag hooks (two on each side).

To use either of the retractable hooks, pull

the lower portion out.

Cargo tie-down hooks

The cargo area is equipped with four tie-

down hooks so that cargo can be secured

with a cargo net or ropes.

When using the hooks, raise them. When

not in use, lower the hooks.

Cargo area bars

1) Cargo area bar

In the cargo area, there are two bars (one

on each side) to which a net can be at-

tached.

Do not hang items on the shopping

bag hook that weigh 6.6 lbs (3 kg) or

more.

600492

The cargo tie-down hooks are de-

signed only for securing light cargo.

Never try to secure cargo that ex-

ceeds the capacity of the hooks. The

maximum load capacity is 44 lbs (20

kg) per a hook.

600103

Do not place objects with a total

weight exceeding 6.6 lbs (3 kg) on a

net attached to the cargo area bars.

600493

Interior equipment

6-15

–

CONTINUED

–

Under-floor storage compart-

ment

There are five trays in the storage com-

partment underneath the floor of the cargo

area. They can be used to store small

items.

yAlways keep the lids closed while

driving to reduce the risk of injury

in the event of sudden stop or an

accident.

yDo not store spray cans, contain-

ers with flammable or corrosive

liquids or any other dangerous

items in the storage compartment.

600657

6-16

Interior equipment

TFront, left and right side storage compartment

To open the lid, raise the cargo tie-down hooks and pull the tab up. The jack and jack

handle are stored in the left side storage compartment.

600105

TCenter storage compartment (Stor-

age bucket)

To open the lid, pull the handle up.

Canada-spec. non-turbo models:

The storage bucket is put on the spare

tire.

Except Canada-spec. non-turbo mod-

els:

Storage tray is placed on the spare tire.

600106

Interior equipment

6-17

When storing a flat tire, put the storage

tray in the luggage compartment (Ex-

cept Canada-spec. non-turbo models).

600108

Starting and operating

Fuel ...................................................................... 7-2

Fuel requirements .................................................. 7-2

Fuel filler lid and cap .............................................. 7-3

State emission testing (U.S. only) .................... 7-5

Preparing to drive .............................................. 7-6

Starting the engine ............................................. 7-7

Manual transmission vehicle ................................. 7-7

Automatic transmission vehicle ............................ 7-7

Stopping the engine ........................................... 7-8

Manual transmission ......................................... 7-9

Shifting speeds ....................................................... 7-9

Driving tips .............................................................. 7-10

Automatic transmission .................................... 7-10

Selector lever for automatic transmission ........... 7-11

Shift lock release .................................................... 7-14

Rear viscous limited slip differential (LSD) (if

equipped) ......................................................... 7-15

Power steering ................................................... 7-15

Braking ................................................................ 7-15

Braking tips ............................................................. 7-15

Brake system .......................................................... 7-16

Disc brake pad wear warning indicators .............. 7-16

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) .......................... 7-16

ABS system self-check .......................................... 7-17

ABS warning light ................................................... 7-17

Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)

system ............................................................. 7-18

Steps to take if EBD system fails .......................... 7-18

Parking your vehicle .......................................... 7-19

Parking brake .......................................................... 7-20

Parking tips ............................................................. 7-20

Hill holder (Manual transmission –

if equipped) ...................................................... 7-21

Cruise control ..................................................... 7-22

To set cruise control .............................................. 7-22

To temporarily cancel the cruise control ............. 7-23

To turn off the cruise control ................................. 7-23

To change the cruising speed ............................... 7-23

Self-leveling rear suspension (if equipped) ..... 7-25

7-2

Starting and operating

Starting and o perating

Fuel

Fuel requirements

TNon-turbo models

The 2.5-liter non-turbo engine is designed

to operate using unleaded gasoline with

an octane rating of 87 AKI or higher.

TTurbo models

The 2.5-liter turbo engine is designed to

operate using premium unleaded gasoline

with an octane rating of 91 AKI or higher.

If premium unleaded gasoline is not avail-

able, regular unleaded gasoline with an

octane rating of 87 AKI or higher may be

temporarily used. For optimum engine

performance and driveability, it is required

that you use premium grade unleaded

gasoline.

Be sure to use premium unleaded gas-

oline of 91 AKI or higher for a 2.5-liter

turbo engine model. If other gasoline

(lower than 91 AKI) is used, knocking,

reduced output and poor accelerator

response will result.

TFuel octane rating

This octane rating is the average of the

Research Octane and Motor Octane num-

bers and is commonly referred to as the

Anti Knock Index (AKI).

Using a gasoline with a lower octane rat-

ing can cause persistent and heavy

knocking, which can damage the engine.

Do not be concerned if your vehicle some-

times knocks lightly when you drive up a

hill or when you accelerate. See your

dealer or a qualified service technician if

you use a fuel with the specified octane

rating and your vehicle knocks heavily or

persistently.

TUnleaded gasoline

The neck of the fuel filler pipe is designed

to accept only an unleaded gasoline filler

nozzle. Under no circumstances should

leaded gasoline be used because it will

damage the emission control system and

may impair driveability and fuel economy.

TGasoline for California-certified LEV

Your vehicle was certified to California’s

low emission vehicle (LEV) standards as

indicated on the underhood tune-up label,

it is designed to optimize engine and

emission performance with gasoline that

meets the clean burning low-sulfur Califor-

nia gasoline specifications. If you live in

any other state than California, your vehi-

cle will operate on gasoline meeting Fed-

eral specifications. Gasoline sold outside

California is permitted to have higher sul-

fur levels, which may affect the perfor-

mance of your vehicle’s catalytic convert-

er and may produce a sulfur exhaust odor

or smell. SUBARU recommends that you

try a different brand of unleaded gasoline

having lower sulfur to determine if the

problem is fuel related before returning

your vehicle to an authorized dealer for

service.

TMMT

Some gasoline contains an octane-en-

hancing additive called MMT (Methylcy-

clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl). If

you use such fuels, your emission control

system performance may deteriorate and

the CHECK ENGINE warning light/Mal-

function indicator lamp may turn on. If this

happens, return to your authorized

SUBARU Dealer for service. If it is deter-

mined that the condition is caused by the

type of fuel used, repairs may not be cov-

ered by your warranty.

Use of a fuel which is low in quality

or use of an inappropriate fuel addi-

tive may cause engine damage.

Starting and operating

7-3

–

CONTINUED

–

TGasoline for cleaner air

Your use of gasoline with detergent addi-

tives will help prevent deposits from form-

ing in your engine and fuel system. This

helps keep your engine in tune and your

emission control system working properly,

and is a way of doing your part for cleaner

air. If you continuously use a high quality

fuel with the proper detergent and other

additives, you should never need to add

any fuel system cleaning agents to your

fuel tank.

Many gasolines are now blended with ma-

terials called oxygenates. Use of these fu-

els can also help keep the air cleaner. Ox-

ygenated blend fuels, such as MTBE (Me-

thyl Tertiary Butyl ether) or ethanol (ethyl

or grain alcohol) may be used in your ve-

hicle, but should contain no more than

15% MTBE or 10% ethanol for the proper

operation of your SUBARU.

In addition, some gasoline suppliers are

now producing reformulated gasolines,

which are designed to reduce vehicle

emissions. SUBARU approves the use of

reformulated gasoline.

If you are not sure what the fuel contains,

you should ask your service station oper-

ators if their gasolines contain detergents

and oxygenates and if they have been re-

formulated to reduce vehicle emissions.

As additional guidance, only use fuels

suited for your vehicle as explained in the

following.

yFuel should be unleaded and have an

octane rating no lower than that specified

in this manual.

yMethanol (methyl or wood alcohol) is

sometimes mixed with unleaded gasoline.

Methanol can be used in your vehicle

ONLY if it does not exceed 5% of the fuel

mixture AND if it is accompanied by suffi-

cient quantities of the proper cosolvents

and corrosion inhibitors required to pre-

vent damage to the fuel system. Do not

use fuel containing methanol EXCEPT un-

der these conditions.

yIf undesirable driveability problems are

experienced and you suspect they may be

fuel related, try a different brand of gaso-

line before seeking service at your

SUBARU dealer.

yFuel system damage or driveability

problems which result from the use of im-

proper fuel are not covered under the

SUBARU Limited Warranty.

Fuel filler lid and cap

TRefueling

Do not let fuel spill on the exterior

surfaces of the vehicle. Fuels con-

taining alcohol may cause paint

damage, which is not covered under

the SUBARU Limited Warranty.

700029

7-4

Starting and operating

1. To open the fuel filler lid, pull the lid re-

lease lever. The lever is on the floor at the

left of the driver’s seat.

1) Open

2) Close

2. Remove the fuel filler cap by turning it

slowly counterclockwise.

3. Stop filling the tank after the fuel filler

pump automatically stops. Do not add any

more fuel.

4. Put the cap back on, turn it clockwise

until you hear a clicking noise. Be certain

not to catch the tether under the cap while

tightening.

5. Close the fuel filler lid completely.

If you spill any fuel on the painted surface,

rinse it off immediately. Otherwise, the

painted surface could be damaged.

NOTE

yYou will see the “ ”

that the fuel filler door (lid) is located

on the right side of the vehicle.

yIf the fuel filler cap is not tightened

until it clicks or if the tether is caught

under the cap, the CHECK ENGINE

warning light may come on. Refer to

the “Warning and indicator lights” sec-

tion located in chapter 3.

(Turbo model only) Promptly put fuel in

the tank whenever the low fuel warning

light comes on. Engine misfires as a re-

sult of an empty tank could cause dam-

age to the engine.

700030

700330

yGasoline vapor is highly flamma-

ble. Before refueling, always first

stop the engine and make sure

that there are no lighted ciga-

rettes, open flames or electrical

sparks in the adjacent area.

yWhen opening the cap, do not re-

move the cap quickly. Fuel may be

under pressure and spray out of

the fuel filler neck especially in

hot weather, which may cause in-

jury.

300121

Starting and operating

7-5

–

CONTINUED

–

State emission testing (U.S.

only)

At state inspection time, remember to

tell your inspection or service station

in advance not to place your SUBARU

AWD vehicle on a two-wheel dyna-

mometer. Otherwise, serious transmis-

sion damage will result.

Some states have started using dyna-

mometers in their state inspection pro-

grams in order to meet their obligation un-

der federal law to implement stricter vehi-

cle emission standards to reduce air pollu-

tion from cars. A dynamometer is a tread-

mill or roller-like testing device that allows

your vehicle’s wheels to turn while the ve-

hicle remains in one place. Depending on

the severity of a state’s air pollution prob-

lems, the states must adopt either a “ba-

sic” or “enhanced” vehicle emission in-

spection test. Normally, a portion of the

basic emission test consists of an emis-

sion inspector inserting an analyzer probe

into the exhaust pipe of an idling vehicle

for a short period of time. States with more

severe air pollution problems are required

to adopt an enhanced vehicle emission

test. This test simulates actual driving

conditions on a dynamometer and permits

more accurate measurement of tailpipe

emitted pollution than the basic emission

test.

The U.S. Environmental Protection Agen-

cy (EPA) and states using two-wheel dy-

namometers in their emission testing pro-

grams have EXEMPTED SUBARU AWD

vehicles from the portion of the testing

program that involves a two-wheel dyna-

mometer.

There are some states that use four-wheel

dynamometers in their testing programs.

When properly used, that equipment will

yNever add any cleaning agents to

the fuel tank. The addition of a

cleaning agent may cause dam-

age to the fuel system.

yMake sure that the cap is tight-

ened until it clicks to prevent fuel

spillage in the event of an acci-

dent.

yDo not let fuel spill on the exterior

surfaces of the vehicle. Fuels con-

taining alcohol may cause paint

damage, which is not covered un-

der the SUBARU Limited Warran-

ty.

yAlways use a genuine SUBARU

fuel filler cap. If you use the wrong

cap, it may not fit or have proper

venting, and your fuel tank and

emission control system might be

damaged.

Testing of an All-Wheel Drive vehi-

cle must NEVER be performed on a

single two-wheel dynamometer. At-

tempting to do so will result in un-

controlled vehicle movement and

may cause an accident or injuries to

persons nearby.

Resultant vehicle damage due to im-

proper testing is not covered under

the SUBARU Limited Warranty and

is the responsibility of the state in-

spection program or its contractors

or licensees.

7-6

Starting and operating

not damage an AWD SUBARU vehicle.

Under no circumstances should the rear

wheels be jacked off the ground, nor

should the driveshaft be disconnected for

state emission testing.

The EPA has issued regulations for in-

specting the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD)

system as part of the state emissions in-

spection. The OBD system is designed to

detect engine and transmission problems

that might cause vehicle emissions to ex-

ceed allowable limits. These inspections

apply to all 1996 model year and newer

passenger cars and light trucks. Over 30

states plus the District of Columbia have

implemented the OBD system inspection.

yThe inspection of the OBD system con-

sists of a visual operational check of the

“CHECK ENGINE” warning light/mal-

function indicator lamp (MIL) and an ex-

amination of the OBD system with an

electronic scan tool while the engine is

running

yA vehicle passes the OBD system in-

spection if proper the “CHECK ENGINE”

warning light/MIL illumination is observed,

there is no stored diagnostic trouble

codes, and the OBD system readiness

monitors are complete.

yA vehicle fails the OBD inspection if the

“CHECK ENGINE” warning light/MIL is

not properly operating or there is one or

more diagnostic trouble codes stored in

vehicle’s computer with the “CHECK EN-

GINE” warning light/MIL illuminated.

yA state emission inspection may reject

(not pass or fail) a vehicle if the number of

OBD system readiness monitors “Not

Ready” is greater than one. Under this

condition, the vehicle operator should be

instructed to drive his/her vehicle for a few

days to set the monitors and return for an

emission re-inspection.

yOwners of rejected or failing vehicles

should contact their SUBARU Dealer for

service.

Preparing to drive

You should perform the following checks

and adjustments every day before you

start driving.

1. Check that all windows, mirrors, and

lights are clean and unobstructed.

2. Check the appearance and condition of

the tires. Also check tires for proper infla-

tion.

3. Look under the vehicle for any sign of

leaks.

4. Check that the hood and rear gate are

fully closed.

5. Check the adjustment of the seat.

6. Check the adjustment of the inside and

outside mirrors.

7. Fasten your seatbelt. Check that your

passengers have fastened their seatbelts.

8. Check the operation of the warning and

indicator lights when the ignition switch is

turned to the “ON” position.

9. Check the gauges, indicator and warn-

ing lights after starting the engine.

NOTE

Engine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid,

washer fluid and other fluid levels

should be checked daily, weekly or at

fuel stops.

Starting and operating

7-7

–

CONTINUED

–

Starting the engine

Manual transmission vehicle

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Turn off unnecessary lights and acces-

sories.

3. Press the clutch pedal to the floor and

shift the shift lever into neutral. Hold the

clutch pedal to the floor while starting the

engine.

The starter motor will only operate when

the clutch pedal is pressed fully to the

floor.

4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” po-

sition and check the operation of the warn-

ing and indicator lights. Refer to the

“Warning and indicator lights” section

(chapter 3).

5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START”

position without depressing the accelera-

tor pedal. Release the key immediately af-

ter the engine has started.

If the engine does not start, try the follow-

ing.

1)Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF”

position and wait for at least 10 sec-

onds. After checking that the parking

brake is firmly set, turn the ignition

switch to the “START” position while de-

pressing the accelerator pedal slightly

(about a quarter of the full stroke). Re-

lease the accelerator pedal as soon as

the engine starts.

2)If this fails to start the engine, turn the

ignition switch back to the “OFF” posi-

tion and wait for at least 10 seconds.

Then fully depress the accelerator ped-

al and turn the ignition switch to the

“START” position. If the engine starts,

quickly release the accelerator pedal.

3)If this fails to start the engine, turn the

ignition switch again to the “OFF” posi-

tion. After waiting for 10 seconds or

longer, turn the ignition switch to the

“START” position without depressing

the accelerator pedal.

4)If the engine still refuses to start, con-

tact your nearest SUBARU dealer for

assistance.

6. Confirm that all warning and indicator

lights have gone off after the engine has

started. The fuel injection system auto-

matically lowers the idle speed as the en-

gine warms up.

NOTE

The engine may be difficult to start

when the battery has been disconnect-

ed and reconnected (for maintenance

or other purposes). This difficulty is

caused by the electronically controlled

throttle’s self-diagnosis function. To

overcome it, keep the ignition switch in

the “ON” position for approximately 10

seconds before starting the engine.

Automatic transmission vehi-

cle

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Turn off unnecessary lights and acces-

sories.

3. Shift the selector lever to the “P” or “N”

position (preferably “P” position).

The starter motor will only operate when

the select lever is at the “P” or “N” position.

4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” po-

sition and check the operation of the warn-

ing and indicator lights. Refer to the

“Warning and indicator lights” section

(chapter 3).

5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START”

position without depressing the accelera-

tor pedal. Release the key immediately af-

ter the engine has started.

If the engine does not start, try the follow-

ing.

Do not operate the starter motor

continuously for more than ten sec-

onds. If the engine fails to start after

operating the starter for five to ten

seconds, wait for ten seconds or

more before trying again.

7-8

Starting and operating

1)Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF”

position and wait for at least 10 sec-

onds. After checking that the parking

brake is firmly set, turn the ignition

switch to the “START” position while de-

pressing the accelerator pedal slightly

(about a quarter of the full stroke). Re-

lease the accelerator pedal as soon as

the engine starts.

2)If this fails to start the engine, turn the

ignition switch back to the “OFF” posi-

tion and wait for at least 10 seconds.

Then fully depress the accelerator ped-

al and turn the ignition switch to the

“START” position. If the engine starts,

quickly release the accelerator pedal.

3)If this fails to start the engine, turn the

ignition switch again to the “OFF” posi-

tion. After waiting for 10 seconds or

longer, turn the ignition switch to the

“START” position without depressing

the accelerator pedal.

4)If the engine still refuses to start, con-

tact your nearest SUBARU dealer for

assistance.

6. Confirm that all warning and indicator

lights have gone out after the engine has

started. The fuel injection system auto-

matically lowers the idle speed as the en-

gine warms up.

While the engine is warming up, make

sure that the selector lever is at the “P” or

“N” position and that the parking brake is

applied.

The engine may be difficult to start

when the battery has been disconnect-

ed and reconnected (for maintenance

or other purposes). This difficulty is

caused by the electronically controlled

throttle’s self-diagnosis function. To

overcome it, keep the ignition switch in

the “ON” position for approximately 10

seconds before starting the engine.

Stopping the engine

The ignition switch should be turned off

only when the vehicle is stopped and the

engine is idling.

If you restart the engine while the

vehicle is moving, shift the selector

lever into the “N” position. Do not

attempt to place the selector lever of

a moving vehicle into the “P” posi-

tion.

Do not stop the engine when the ve-

hicle is moving. This will cause loss

of power to the power steering and

the brake booster, making steering

and braking more difficult. It could

also result in accidental activation

of the “LOCK” position on the igni-

tion switch, causing the steering

wheel to lock.

Starting and operating

7-9

–

CONTINUED

–

Manual transmission

The manual transmission is a fully syn-

chromeshed, 5-forward-speed and 1-re-

verse-speed transmission.

The shift pattern is shown on the shift le-

ver knob. When shifting from 5th gear to

reverse gear, first return the shift lever to

the neutral position then shift into reverse

gear.

To change gears, fully depress the clutch

pedal, move the shift lever, and gradually

let up on the clutch pedal.

If it is difficult to shift into gear, put the

transmission in neutral, release the clutch

pedal momentarily, and then try again.

Shifting speeds

TRecommended shifting speeds

The best compromise between fuel econ-

omy and vehicle performance during nor-

mal driving is ensured by shifting up at the

speeds listed in the following table.

TMaximum allowable speeds

The following table shows the maximum

Do not drive the vehicle with the

clutch disengaged (i.e., when the

clutch pedal is depressed) or with

the shift lever in the neutral posi-

tion. Engine braking has no effect in

either of these conditions and the

risk of an accident is consequently

increased.

Shift into reverse ONLY when the

vehicle has completely stopped. It

may cause damage to the transmis-

sion to try shifting into reverse

when the vehicle is moving.

700386

531

Shift up mph (km/h)

1st to 2nd 15 (24)

2nd to 3rd 25 (40)

3rd to 4th 40 (65)

4th to 5th 45 (73)

When shifting down a gear, ensure

that the vehicle is not traveling at a

speed exceeding the Maximum Al-

lowable Speed for the gear which is

about to be selected. Failure to ob-

serve this precaution can lead to en-

gine over-revving and this in turn

can result in engine damage.

In addition, sudden application of

engine brakes when the vehicle is

travelling on a slippery surface can

lead to wheel locking; as a conse-

quence, control of the vehicle may

be lost and the risk of an accident in-

creased.

7-10

Starting and operating

speeds that are possible with each differ-

ent gear.

Never exceed the speed limit below for

each gear position except for brief accel-

eration in an emergency. The tachome-

ter’s needle will enter the red area if these

speeds are exceeded. Failure to observe

this precaution can lead to excessive en-

gine wear and poor fuel economy.

mph (km/h)

Driving tips

Do not drive with your foot resting on the

clutch pedal and do not use the clutch to

hold your vehicle at a standstill on an up-

grade. Either of those actions may cause

clutch damage.

Do not drive with your hand resting on the

shift lever. This may cause wear on the

transmission components.

When it is necessary to reduce vehicle

speed due to slow traffic, turning corners,

or driving up steep hills, downshift to a

lower gear before the engine starts to la-

bor.

On steep downgrades, downshift the

transmission to 4th, 3rd or 2nd gear as

necessary; this helps to maintain a safe

speed and to extend brake pad life.

In this way, the engine provides a braking

effect. Remember, if you “ride” (over use)

the brakes while descending a hill, they

may overheat and not work properly.

Automatic transmission

The automatic transmission is electroni-

cally controlled and provides 4 forward

speeds and 1 reverse speed.

Non-turbo

models

Turbo models

1st 30 (49) 28 (46)

2nd 51 (82) 52 (83)

3rd 73 (117) 73 (118)

Do not shift from the “P” or “N” po-

sition into the “D”, “3”, “2”, “1” or

“R” position while depressing the

accelerator pedal. This may cause

the vehicle to jump forward or back-

ward.

yShift into the “P” or “R” position

only after the vehicle is complete-

ly stopped. Shifting while the ve-

hicle is moving may cause dam-

age to the transmission.

yDo not race the engine for more

than five seconds in any position

except the “N” or “P” position

when the brake is set or when

chocks are used in the wheels.

This may cause the automatic

transmission fluid to overheat.

Starting and operating

7-11

–

CONTINUED

–

yWhen the engine coolant tempera-

ture is still low, your vehicle’s automat-

ic transmission will up-shift at higher

engine speeds than when the coolant

temperature is sufficiently high in or-

der to shorten the warm-up time and

improve driveability. The gearshift tim-

ing will automatically shift to the nor-

mal timing after the engine has warmed

up.

yImmediately after ATF (automatic

transmission fluid) is replaced, you

may feel that the automatic transmis-

sion operation is somewhat unusual.

This results from invalidation of data

the on-board computer has collected

and stored in memory to allow the

transmission to shift at the most ap-

propriate times for the current condi-

tion of your vehicle. Optimized shifting

will be restored as the vehicle contin-

ues to be driven for a while.

Selector lever for automatic

transmission

: With the brake pedal depressed,

move the lever along the gate.

: Move the lever along the gate.

The selector lever has seven positions.

TP (Park)

This position is for parking the vehicle and

starting the engine.

In this position, the transmission is me-

chanically locked to prevent the vehicle

from rolling freely.

When you park the vehicle, first set the

parking brake fully, then shift into the “P”

position. Do not hold the vehicle with only

the transmission.

A shift interlock function is employed in

the automatic transmission system to en-

yAvoid shifting from one of the for-

ward driving positions into the

“R” position or vice versa until the

vehicle has completely stopped.

Such shifting may cause damage

to the transmission.

yWhen parking the vehicle, first se-

curely apply the parking brake

and then place the selector lever

in the “P” position.

700034

700332

7-12

Starting and operating

sure safe starting of the vehicle.

To shift the selector lever from the “P” to

the any other position, you have to de-

press the brake pedal fully when the igni-

tion switch is in the “ON” position. This

prevents the vehicle from lurching when it

is started.

If the shift lever does not move from the

“P” position with the brake pedal de-

pressed, refer to the “Shift lock release”

section in this chapter.

TR (Reverse)

This position is for backing the vehicle.

To shift from the “N” to “R” position, first

stop the vehicle completely then move the

lever to the “R” position.

TN (Neutral)

This position is for restarting a stalled en-

gine.

In this position the wheels and transmis-

sion are not locked. In this position, the

transmission is neutral; the vehicle will roll

freely, even on the slightest incline unless

the parking brake or foot brake is on.

Avoid coasting with the transmission neu-

tral.

During coasting, there is no engine brak-

ing effect.

NOTE

If you stop the engine with the selector

lever in the “N” position, move the se-

lector lever to the “P” position immedi-

ately. Otherwise, you may find that the

selector lever soon cannot be moved

to the “P” position. If you find that the

selector lever cannot be moved from

the “N” position to the “P” position,

turn the ignition switch to the “ON” po-

sition and try again.

TD (Drive)

This position is for normal driving.

The transmission automatically shifts into

a suitable gear from 1st to 4th according to

the vehicle speed and the acceleration

you require.

When more acceleration is required in this

position, press the accelerator pedal fully

to the floor and hold that position. The

transmission will automatically downshift

to 3rd, 2nd or 1st gear. When you release

the pedal, the transmission will return to

the original gear position.

VWhile climbing a grade

When driving up hill, undesired upshift to

4th gear is prevented from taking place

when the accelerator pedal is released.

This minimizes the chances of subse-

quent downshifting to a lower gear when

accelerating again. This prevents repeat-

ed upshifting and downshifting resulting in

a smoother operation of the vehicle.

The transmission may downshift to

2nd or 1st gear, depending on the way

the accelerator pedal is pressed to ac-

celerate the vehicle again.

VWhile going down a hill

When descending a steep hill, depressing

the brake pedal will cause the transmis-

sion to downshift to 3rd gear, thus apply-

ing engine braking. Reacceleration for a

short time will cause the transmission to

upshift normally.

NOTE

In some cases, depressing the brake

pedal on a downhill grade does not re-

sult in an automatic downshift to 3rd

gear. This can happen when the auto-

matic transmission fluid temperature is

very low, for example, during driving

Do not drive the vehicle with the se-

lector lever in the “N” (neutral) posi-

tion. Engine braking has no effect in

this condition and the risk of an ac-

cident is consequently increased.

Starting and operating

7-13

–

CONTINUED

–

shortly after the vehicle has been

parked for an extended period of time.

When the ATF temperature has risen to

a certain level, automatic downshift

normally takes place. In the meantime,

downshift manually for engine braking

as required.

Also, downshifting when braking

downhill will not occur at speeds

above approximately 48 mph (78 km/h).

T3 (Third)

This position is for using engine braking

when going down a hill or for climbing a

grade.

The transmission automatically shifts into

a suitable gear from 1st to 3rd according

to the vehicle speed and the acceleration

you require.

When more acceleration is required in this

position, press the accelerator pedal fully

to the floor and hold that position. The

transmission will automatically downshift

to 2nd or 1st gear. When you release the

pedal, the transmission will return to the

original gear position.

T2 (Second)

This position is for using engine braking

when going down a hill or for climbing a

steep grade.

In this position, the transmission holds in

the 2nd gear.

Use this position when starting off from a

standstill on slippery road surfaces such

as mud or snow. It will ensure greater trac-

tion.

T1 (First)

This position is for driving up or down very

steep grades, or driving through mud or

sand, or on slippery surfaces. In this posi-

tion, the transmission holds in the 1st

gear.

TMaximum speeds

The following tables show the maximum

speeds that are possible with each differ-

ent gear.

When shifting down a gear, it is important

to confirm that the current vehicle speed is

not in excess of the Maximum Allowable

Speed of the gear which is about to be se-

lected.

mph (km/h)

In order to prevent over-revving during

deceleration of the vehicle, the trans-

mission will remain in the current gear

if the speed of the vehicle is in excess

of the Maximum Allowable Speed for

the gear to which the selector lever has

been moved.

TDriving tips

yAlways apply the foot or parking brake

when the vehicle is stopped in the “D”, “3”,

“2”, “1” or “R” position.

When shifting down a gear, ensure

that the vehicle is not travelling at a

speed exceeding the Maximum Al-

lowable Speed for the gear which is

about to be selected. Failure to ob-

serve this precaution can lead to en-

gine over-revving and this in turn

can result in engine damage.

In addition, sudden application of

engine brakes when the vehicle is

travelling on a slippery surface can

lead to wheel locking; as a conse-

quence, control of the vehicle may

be lost and the risk of an accident in-

creased.

Non-turbo

models

Turbo models

1st 28 (45) 28 (45)

2nd 63 (100) 65 (104)

3rd 98 (156) 104 (167)

7-14

Starting and operating

yAlways set the parking brake when

parking your vehicle. Do not hold the vehi-

cle with only the transmission.

yDo not keep the vehicle in a stationary

position on an uphill grade by using the

“D”, “3”, “2”, or “1” position. Use the brake

instead.

Shift lock release

If the selector lever does not move from

the “P” position with the brake pedal de-

pressed and the ignition switch in the “ON”

position, perform the following steps:

To override the shift lock:

1. Set the parking brake and stop the en-

gine.

2. Take out the screwdriver.

3. Remove the cover by prying on the

edge with the screwdriver.

4. Insert the screwdriver into the hole.

5. Push down on the screwdriver and

move the selector lever from the “P” to the

“N” position.

6. Remove the screwdriver from the hole.

Depress the brake pedal and start the en-

gine.

Take your vehicle to the nearest SUBARU

dealer immediately to have the system re-

paired.

700059

700060

Starting and operating

7-15

–

CONTINUED

–

Rear viscous limited slip dif-

ferential (LSD) (if equipped)

The LSD provides optimum distribution of

power according to the difference in revo-

lutions between the right and left rear

wheels that may be caused by certain

driving conditions, thereby improving driv-

ing stability on snow-covered, muddy or

other slippery roads.

Power steering

The power steering system operates only

when the engine is running.

If you lose power steering assist because

the engine stops or the system fails to

function, you can steer but it will take

much more effort.

NOTE

Right after the engine has been started

and before it has warmed up, you may

hear a noise coming from areas adja-

cent to the power steering pump which

is located at the right-front area of the

engine compartment. This noise is nor-

mal. It does not indicate power steering

system trouble.

Braking

Braking tips

TWhen the brakes get wet

When driving in rain or after washing the

vehicle, the brakes may get wet. As a re-

sult, brake stopping distance will be long-

er. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at

a safe speed while lightly depressing the

brake pedal to heat up the brakes.

TUse of engine braking

Remember to make use of engine braking

in addition to foot braking. When descend-

ing a grade, if only the foot brake is used,

the brakes may start working improperly

because of brake fluid overheating,

caused by overheated brake pads. To

help prevent this, shift into a lower gear to

get stronger engine braking.

TBraking when a tire is punctured

Do not depress the brake pedal suddenly

yNever start the engine while a tire

on one side is jacked up, as the

vehicle may move.

yIf one rear tire is spinning in mud,

avoid continued spinning at high

speed as this could adversely af-

fect the LSD.

yIf a different size rear tire is tem-

porarily used (as in an emergen-

cy), it will adversely affect the

LSD. Always replace it with a reg-

ular size tire as soon as possible.

Do not hold the steering wheel at the

fully locked position left or right for

more than five seconds. This may

damage the power steering pump.

Never rest your foot on the brake

pedal while driving. This can cause

dangerous overheating of the

brakes and needless wear on the

brake pads and linings.

7-16

Starting and operating

when a tire is punctured. This could cause

a loss of control of the vehicle. Keep driv-

ing straight ahead while gradually reduc-

ing speed. Then slowly pull off the road to

a safe place.

Brake system

TTwo separate circuits

Your vehicle has two separate circuit

brake systems. Each circuit works diago-

nally across the vehicle. If one circuit of

the brake system should fail, the other half

of the system still works. If one circuit fails,

the brake pedal will go down much closer

to the floor than usual and you will need to

press it down much harder. And a much

longer distance will be needed to stop the

vehicle.

TBrake booster

The brake booster uses engine manifold

vacuum to assist braking force. Do not

turn off the engine while driving because

that will turn off the brake booster, result-

ing in poor braking power.

The brakes will continue to work even

when the brake booster completely stops

functioning. If this happens, however, you

will have to push the pedal much harder

than normal and the braking distance will

increase.

Disc brake pad wear warning

indicators

The disc brake pad wear warning indica-

tors on the disc brakes give a warning

noise when the brake pads are worn.

If a squeaking or scraping noise is heard

from the disc brakes while braking, imme-

diately have your vehicle checked by your

SUBARU dealer.

ABS (Anti-lock Brake Sys-

tem)

700040

Always use the utmost care in driv-

ing – overconfidence because you

are driving with an ABS equipped

vehicle could easily lead to a seri-

ous accident.

yThe ABS system does not always

decrease stopping distance. You

should always maintain a safe fol-

lowing distance from other vehi-

cles.

yWhen driving on badly surfaced

roads, gravel roads, icy roads, or

over deep newly fallen snow,

stopping distances may be longer

for a vehicle with the ABS system

than one without. When driving

under these conditions, therefore,

reduce your speed and leave am-

ple distance from other vehicles.

Starting and operating

7-17

–

CONTINUED

–

The ABS system prevents the lock-up of

wheels which may occur during sudden

braking or braking on slippery road surfac-

es. This helps prevent the loss of steering

control and directional stability caused by

wheel lock-up.

When the ABS system is operating, you

may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight

vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal

when the ABS operates.

The ABS system will not operate when the

vehicle speed is below approximately 6

mph (10 km/h).

ABS system self-check

You may feel a slight shock in the brake

pedal and hear the operating sound of

ABS from the engine compartment just af-

ter the vehicle is started. This is caused by

an automatic functional test of the ABS

system being carried out and does not in-

dicate any abnormal condition.

ABS warning light

1) U.S.-spec. models

2) Canada-spec. models

The ABS warning light comes on when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON” posi-

tion and goes out after approximately two

seconds.

This is an indication that the ABS system

is working properly.

When driving with an insufficient battery

voltage such as when the engine is jump

started, the ABS warning light may come

on. This is due to the low battery voltage

and does not indicate a malfunction.

When the battery becomes fully charged,

the light will go out.

If the warning light behavior is as de-

scribed in the following, the ABS sys-

tem may be considered normal.

yThe warning light comes on right af-

ter the engine is started but goes out

yWhen you feel the ABS system

operating, you should maintain

constant brake pedal pressure.

Do not pump the brake pedal

since doing so may defeat the op-

eration of the ABS system.

700333

If the warning light behaves as fol-

lows, the ABS system may not be

working properly.

When the warning light is on, the

ABS function shuts down; however,

the conventional brake system con-

tinues to operate normally.

yThe warning light does not come

on when the ignition switch is

turned to the “ON” position.

yThe warning light comes on when

the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position, but it does not go

out even when the vehicle speed

exceeds approximately 8 mph (12

km/h).

yThe warning light comes on dur-

ing driving.

If these occur, have the ABS system

repaired at the first available oppor-

tunity by your SUBARU dealer.

7-18

Starting and operating

immediately, remaining off.

yThe warning light remains on after

the engine has been started, but it goes

out when the vehicle speed reaches

approximately 8 mph (12 km/h).

yThe warning light comes on during

driving, but it goes out immediately

and remains off.

Electronic Brake Force Dis-

tribution (EBD) system

The EBD system maximizes the effective-

ness of the brakes by allowing the rear

brakes to supply a greater proportion of

the braking force. It functions by adjusting

the distribution of braking force to the rear

wheels in accordance with the vehicle’s

loading condition and speed.

The EBD system is an integral part of the

ABS system and uses some of the ABS

system’s components to perform its func-

tion of optimizing the distribution of brak-

ing force. If any of the ABS components

used by the EBD function fails, the EBD

system also stops working.

When the EBD system is operating, you

may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight

vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal

and does not indicate a malfunction.

Steps to take if EBD system

fails

1) U.S.-spec. models

2) Canada-spec. models

If a malfunction occurs in the EBD system,

the system stops working and the brake

system warning light and ABS warning

light come on simultaneously.

The EBD system may be faulty if the brake

system warning light and ABS warning

light illuminate simultaneously during driv-

ing.

Even if the EBD system fails, the conven-

tional braking system will still function.

However, the rear wheels will be more

prone to locking when the brakes are ap-

plied harder than usual and the vehicle’s

700334

Starting and operating

7-19

–

CONTINUED

–

motion may therefore become somewhat

harder to control.

If the brake system warning light and ABS

warning light illuminate simultaneously,

take the following steps:

1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe, flat

place.

2. Shut down the engine, then restart it.

3. Release the parking brake. If both

warning lights go out, the EBD system

may be faulty.

Drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU

dealer and have the system inspected.

4. If both warning lights come on again

and stay illuminated after the engine has

been restarted, shut down the engine

again, apply the parking brake, and check

the brake fluid level.

5. If the brake fluid level is not below the

“MIN” mark, the EBD system may be

faulty. Drive carefully to the nearest

SUBARU dealer and have the system in-

spected.

6. If the brake fluid level is below the

“MIN” mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle. In-

stead, have the vehicle towed to the near-

est SUBARU dealer for repair.

Parking your vehicle

yDriving with the brake system

warning light on is dangerous.

This indicates your brake system

may not be working properly. If

the light remains on, have the

brakes inspected by a SUBARU

dealer immediately.

yIf at all in doubt about whether the

brakes are operating properly, do

not drive the vehicle. Have your

vehicle towed to the nearest SUB-

ARU dealer for repair.

yNever leave unattended children

or pets in the vehicle. They could

accidentally injure themselves or

others through inadvertent opera-

tion of the vehicle. Also, on hot or

sunny days, the temperature in a

closed vehicle could quickly be-

come high enough to cause se-

vere or possibly fatal injuries to

people.

yDo not park the vehicle over flam-

mable materials such as dry

grass, waste paper or rags, as

they may burn easily if they come

near hot engine or exhaust sys-

tem parts.

yBe sure to stop the engine if you

take a nap in the vehicle. If engine

exhaust gas enters the passenger

compartment, occupants in the

vehicle could die from carbon

monoxide (CO) contained in the

exhaust gas.

7-20

Starting and operating

Parking brake

To set the parking brake, press the brake

pedal firmly and hold it down while fully

pulling up the parking brake lever.

To release the parking brake, pull the le-

ver up slightly, press the release button,

then lower the lever while keeping the but-

ton pressed.

When the parking brake is set while the

engine is running, the parking brake warn-

ing light comes on. After starting the vehi-

cle, be sure that the warning light has

gone out before the vehicle is driven. Re-

fer to the “Warning and indicator lights”

section (chapter 3).

Parking tips

When parking your vehicle, always set the

parking brake firmly and put the shift lever

in the “1” (1st) for an upgrade or “R” (Re-

verse) for a downgrade for manual trans-

mission vehicles, or in the “P” (Park) posi-

tion for automatic transmission vehicles.

Always set the parking brake firmly when

parking your vehicle. Never rely on the

transmission alone to hold the vehicle.

When parking on a hill, always turn the

steering wheel. When the vehicle is head-

ed up the hill, the front wheels should be

turned away from the curb.

When facing downhill, the front wheels

should be turned into the curb.

Never drive while the parking brake

is set because this will cause unnec-

essary wear on the brake linings.

Before starting to drive, always

make sure that the parking brake

has been fully released.

700336

700044

700045

Starting and operating

7-21

Hill holder (Manual transmis-

sion – if equipped)

The Hill holder is a device to make starting

on an uphill grade easier.

On an uphill grade, when the clutch pedal

is depressed while the brake pedal is also

depressed, braking power is maintained

temporarily by the Hill holder when the

brake pedal is released. The driver is

therefore able to start the vehicle the

same way as on a level grade, just using

the clutch and accelerator pedal.

The Hill holder does not operate when the

vehicle is facing downhill. And the Hill

holder may not operate on slight grades.

When starting in reverse and using the Hill

holder, a braking effect may be felt even

after the brake pedal has been released.

However, this braking effect should disap-

pear once the clutch pedal is released.

A slight jolt may be felt when the vehicle

begins to move forward after being re-

versed.

If the braking power of the Hill holder is in-

sufficient after the brake pedal is released,

apply more braking power by pressing the

brake pedal again.

The Hill Holder is a device only for

helping the driver to START the ve-

hicle on an uphill grade. To prevent

accidents when the vehicle is

parked on a slope, be sure to firmly

set the parking brake. When setting

the parking brake, make sure that

the vehicle remains stationary when

the clutch pedal is released.

700046

700047

7-22

Starting and operating

Cruise control

Cruise control enables you to maintain a

constant vehicle speed without holding

your foot on the accelerator pedal and it is

operative when the vehicle speed is 25

mph (40 km/h) or more. Make sure the

main switch is turned “OFF” when the

cruise control is not in use to avoid unin-

tentionally setting the cruise control.

If you move the cruise control lever or

press the main switch button while

turning the ignition switch “ON”, the

cruise control function is deactivated

and the “CRUISE” indicator light flash-

es. To reactivate the cruise control

function, turn the ignition switch back

to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position, and

then turn it again to the “ON” position.

To set cruise control

1. Push the main switch button.

The “ ” indicator light on the com-

bination meter will come on.

2. Depress the accelerator pedal until the

vehicle reaches the desired speed.

3. Push the control lever downward in the

“SET/COAST” direction and release it.

Then release the accelerator pedal.

At this time, the “ ” indicator light is il-

luminated in the combination meter.

Do not use the cruise control under

any of the following conditions. This

may cause loss of vehicle control:

ydriving up or down a steep grade

ydriving on slippery or winding

roads

ydriving in heavy traffic

300332

700049

300333

700051

Starting and operating

7-23

–

CONTINUED

–

The vehicle will maintain the desired

speed.

Vehicle speed can be temporarily in-

creased while driving with the cruise con-

trol activated. Simply depress the acceler-

ator pedal to accelerate the vehicle. When

the accelerator pedal is released, the ve-

hicle will return to and maintain the previ-

ous cruising speed.

To temporarily cancel the

cruise control

There are five ways to cancel the cruise

control temporarily:

yPull the control lever in the “CANCEL”

direction.

yDepress the brake pedal.

yDepress the clutch pedal (manual trans-

mission vehicles only).

yShift the selector lever into the “N” posi-

tion (automatic transmission vehicles

only).

yShift the shift lever into neutral (manual

transmission vehicles only).

The “ ” indicator light in the combina-

tion meter goes off when the cruise control

is cancelled.

To resume the cruise control after it has

been temporarily canceled and with vehi-

cle speed of approximately 20 mph (32

km/h) or more, push the control lever up-

ward in the “RES/ACC” direction to return

to the original cruising speed automatical-

ly.

The “ ” indicator light in the combina-

tion meter will automatically come on at

this time.

To turn off the cruise control

There are two ways to turn off the cruise

control:

yPush the main switch again.

yTurn the ignition switch to the “ACC” or

“LOCK” position (but only when the vehi-

cle is completely stopped).

To change the cruising speed

TTo increase the speed (by control le-

ver)

Push the control lever upward in the

“RES/ACC” direction and hold it until the

vehicle reaches the desired speed. Then,

release the control lever. The vehicle

speed at that moment will be memorized

and treated as the new set speed.

When the difference between the actual

vehicle speed and the set speed is less

than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the set speed can

be increased 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time

by pressing the control lever upward in the

“RES/ACC” direction quickly.

700161

300334

7-24

Starting and operating

TTo increase the speed (by accelera-

tor pedal)

1. Depress the accelerator pedal to accel-

erate the vehicle to the desired speed.

2. Push the control lever downward in the

“SET/COAST” direction once. Now the

desired speed is set and the vehicle will

keep running at that speed without de-

pressing the accelerator pedal.

If the difference between the actual ve-

hicle speed when the control lever is

pushed downward and the speed last

time you set is less than 4 mph (6.8 km/

h), the vehicle speed will be lowered by

1 mph (1.6 km/h). This occurs because

the cruise control system unit regards

this lever operation as that intended to

decrease the vehicle speed.

TTo decrease the speed (by control

lever)

Push the control lever downward in the

“SET/COAST” direction and hold it until

the vehicle reaches the desired speed.

Then, release the control lever. The vehi-

cle speed at that moment will be memo-

rized and treated as the new set speed.

When the difference between the actual

vehicle speed and the set speed is less

than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the set speed can

be lowered 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time by

pressing the control lever downward in the

“SET/COAST” direction quickly.

TTo decrease the speed (by brake

pedal)

1. Depress the brake pedal to release

cruise control temporarily.

2. When the speed decreases to the de-

sired speed, press the control lever down-

ward in the “SET/COAST” direction once.

Now the desired speed is set and the ve-

hicle will keep running at that speed with-

out depressing the accelerator pedal.

300333

Starting and operating

7-25

Self-leveling rear suspension

(if equipped)

The self-leveling suspension adjusts the

vehicle body position automatically to

keep it level at all times irrespective of the

number of occupants and the amount of

cargo.

The self-leveling system is incorporated in

the rear suspension shock absorber and

operates only when the vehicle is in mo-

tion.

Owing to the self-leveling suspension, the

vehicle body is adjusted to the proper po-

sition after several drive trips, even if the

rear of the vehicle is lowered by loaded

cargos or a coupled trailer.

If cargos are unloaded all at once, the ve-

hicle height may become higher than the

normal level. This is because that the hy-

draulic pressure in the self-leveling sus-

pension was increased for leveling the

body when the cargos were loaded. In

such a case, the vehicle height will return

to the original level after several driving

trips.

If the rear axle is loaded excessively,

the vehicle body may not be adjusted

to the proper position.

700054

700055

Driving tips

New vehicle break-in driving – the first

1,000 miles (1,600 km) .................................... 8-2

Fuel economy hints ........................................... 8-2

Engine exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) ........ 8-2

Catalytic converter ............................................. 8-3

Periodic inspections .......................................... 8-4

Driving in foreign countries .............................. 8-4

Driving tips for AWD vehicles ........................... 8-5

Off road driving .................................................. 8-6

Winter driving ..................................................... 8-7

Operation during cold weather .............................. 8-7

Driving on snowy and icy roads ............................ 8-9

Corrosion protection .............................................. 8-10

Snow tires ............................................................... 8-10

Tire chains ............................................................... 8-10

Rocking the vehicle ................................................ 8-11

Loading your vehicle ......................................... 8-11

Vehicle capacity weight ......................................... 8-12

GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

and Gross Axle Weight Rating) ........................... 8-12

Roof rail and crossbar (if equipped) ..................... 8-13

Trailer hitch (if equipped) .................................. 8-16

Connecting a trailer ................................................ 8-16

When you do not tow a trailer ............................... 8-17

Trailer towing ...................................................... 8-18

Warranties and maintenance ................................. 8-18

Maximum load limits .............................................. 8-18

Trailer hitches ......................................................... 8-21

Connecting a trailer ................................................ 8-22

Trailer towing tips ................................................... 8-23

8-2

Driving tips

New vehicle break-in driving

– the first 1,000 miles (1,600

km)

The performance and long life of your ve-

hicle are dependent on how you handle

and care for your vehicle while it is new.

Follow these instructions during the first

1,000 miles (1,600 km):

yDo not race the engine. And do not al-

low engine speed to exceed 4,000 rpm ex-

cept in an emergency.

yDo not drive at one constant engine or

vehicle speed for a long time, either fast or

slow.

yAvoid starting suddenly and rapid accel-

eration, except in an emergency.

yAvoid hard braking, except in an emer-

gency.

The same break-in procedures should be

applied to an overhauled engine, newly

mounted engine or when brake pads or

brake linings are replaced with new ones.

Fuel economy hints

The following suggestions will help to

save your fuel.

ySelect the proper gear position for the

speed and road conditions.

yAvoid sudden acceleration or decelera-

tion. Always accelerate gently until you

reach the desired speed. Then try to main-

tain that speed for as long as possible.

yDo not pump the accelerator and avoid

racing the engine.

yAvoid unnecessary engine idling.

yKeep the engine properly tuned.

yKeep the tires inflated to the correct

pressure shown on the tire placard, which

is located under the door latch on the driv-

er’s side. Low pressure will increase tire

wear and fuel consumption.

yUse the air conditioner only when nec-

essary.

yKeep the front and rear wheels in prop-

er alignment.

yAvoid carrying unnecessary cargo.

Engine exhaust gas (Carbon

monoxide)

yNever inhale engine exhaust gas.

Engine exhaust gas contains car-

bon monoxide, a colorless and

odorless gas which is dangerous,

or even lethal, if inhaled.

yAlways properly maintain the en-

gine exhaust system to prevent

engine exhaust gas from entering

the vehicle.

yNever run the engine in a closed

space, such as a garage, except

for the brief time needed to drive

the vehicle in or out of it.

yAvoid remaining in a parked vehi-

cle for a lengthy time while the en-

gine is running. If that is unavoid-

able, then use the ventilation fan

to force fresh air into the vehicle.

yAlways keep the front ventilator

inlet grille free from snow, leaves

or other obstructions to ensure

that the ventilation system always

works properly.

Driving tips

8-3

–

CONTINUED

–

Due to the expansion and contraction

of the metals used in the manufacture

of the exhaust system, you may hear a

crackling sound coming from the ex-

haust system for a short time after the

engine has been shut off. This sound is

normal.

Catalytic converter

Turbo model

Non-turbo model

The catalytic converter is installed in the

exhaust system. It serves as catalyst to

reduce HC, CO and NOx in exhaust gas-

es, thus providing cleaner exhaust.

To avoid damage to the catalytic convert-

er:

yUse only unleaded fuel. Even a small

amount of leaded fuel will damage the cat-

alytic converter.

yNever start the engine by pushing or

pulling the vehicle.

yAvoid racing the engine.

yNever turn off the ignition switch while

the vehicle is moving.

yKeep your engine tuned-up. If you feel

the engine running rough (misfiring, back-

firing or incomplete combustion), have

yIf at any time you suspect that ex-

haust fumes are entering the vehi-

cle, have the problem checked

and corrected as soon as possi-

ble. If you must drive under these

conditions, drive only with all win-

dows fully open.

yKeep the rear gate closed while

driving to prevent exhaust gas

from entering the vehicle.

yAvoid fire hazards. Do not drive or

park the vehicle anywhere near

flammable materials (e.g. grass,

paper, rags or leaves), because

the catalytic converter operates at

very high temperatures.

yKeep everyone and flammable

materials away from the exhaust

pipe while the engine is running.

The exhaust gas is very hot.

800232

800218

8-4

Driving tips

your vehicle checked and repaired by an

authorized SUBARU dealer.

yDo not apply undercoating or rust pre-

vention treatment to the heat shield of cat-

alytic converter and the exhaust system.

Periodic inspections

To keep your vehicle in the best condition

at all times, always have the recommend-

ed maintenance services listed in the

maintenance schedule in the “Warranty

and Maintenance Booklet” performed at

the specified time or mileage intervals.

Driving in foreign countries

When planning to use your vehicle in an-

other country:

yConfirm the availability of the correct fu-

el. (Refer to the “Fuel requirements” sec-

tion in chapter 7.)

yComply with all regulations and require-

ments of each country.

Driving tips

8-5

Driving tips for AWD vehicles

All-Wheel Drive distributes the engine

power to all four wheels. AWD vehicles

provide better traction when driving on

slippery, wet or snow-covered roads and

when moving out of mud, dirt and sand. By

shifting power between the front and rear

wheels, SUBARU AWD can also provide

added traction during acceleration and

added engine braking force during decel-

eration.

Therefore, your SUBARU AWD vehicle

may handle differently than an ordinary

two wheel drive vehicle and it contains

some features unique to AWD. For safety

purposes as well as to avoid damaging

the AWD system, you should keep the fol-

lowing tips in mind:

yAn AWD vehicle is better able to climb

steeper roads under snowy or slippery

conditions than a two wheel drive vehicle.

There is little difference in handling, how-

ever, during extremely sharp turns or sud-

den braking. Therefore, when driving

down a slope or turning corners, be sure

to reduce your speed and maintain an am-

ple distance from other vehicles.

yWhen replacing a tire, make sure you

use only the same size, construction,

brand, and load range as the original tires

listed on the tire placard. Using other sizes

or construction may result in severe me-

chanical damage to the drive train of your

vehicle and may affect ride, handling,

braking, speedometer/odometer calibra-

tion, and clearance between the body and

tires. It also may be dangerous and lead to

loss of vehicle control.

yAlways check the cold tire pressure be-

fore starting to drive. The recommended

tire pressure is provided on the tire plac-

ard, which is located under the door latch

on the driver’s side.

yTire chains should always be placed on

the front wheels only.

yThere are some precautions that you

must observe when towing your vehicle.

For detail information, see the “Towing”

section in chapter 9.

yAlways maintain a safe driving

speed according to the road and

weather conditions in order to

avoid having an accident on a

sharp turn, during sudden braking

or under other similar conditions.

yAlways use the utmost care in

driving – overconfidence because

you are driving an All-Wheel Drive

vehicle could easily lead to a seri-

ous accident.

800004

8-6

Driving tips

Off road driving

Because of the AWD feature and higher

ground clearance, your SUBARU can be

driven on ordinary roads or off-road. But

please keep in mind that an AWD SUBA-

RU is a passenger car and is neither a

conventional off-road vehicle nor an all-

terrain vehicle. If you do take your SUBA-

RU off-road, certain common sense pre-

cautions such as the following should be

taken:

yMake certain that you and all of your

passengers are wearing seatbelts.

yCarry some emergency equipment,

such as a towing rope or chain, a shovel,

wheel blocks, first aid kit and cell phone or

citizens band radio.

yDrive carefully. Do not take unneces-

sary risks by driving in dangerous areas or

over rough terrain.

ySlow down and employ extra caution at

all times. When driving off-road, you will

not have the benefit of marked traffic

lanes, banked curves, traffic signs and the

like.

yDo not drive across steep slopes. In-

stead, drive either straight up or straight

down the slopes. A vehicle can much

more easily tip over sideways than it can

end over end. Avoid driving straight up or

down slopes that are too steep.

yAvoid sharp turning maneuvers, espe-

cially at higher speeds.

yDo not grip the inside or spokes of the

steering wheel. A bad bump could jerk the

wheel and injure your hands. Instead drive

with your fingers and thumbs on the out-

side of the rim.

yIf driving through water, such as when

crossing shallow streams, first check the

depth of the water and the bottom of the

stream bed for firmness and ensure that

the bed of the stream is flat. Drive slowly

and completely through the stream. The

water should be shallow enough that it

does not reach the vehicle’s undercar-

riage. Water entering the engine air intake

or the exhaust pipe or water splashing

onto electrical parts may damage your ve-

hicle and may cause it to stall. Never at-

tempt to drive through rushing water; re-

gardless of its depth, it can wash away the

ground from under your tires, resulting in

possible loss of traction and even vehicle

rollover.

yAlways check your brakes for effective-

ness immediately after driving in sand,

mud or water. Do this by driving slowly

and stepping on the brake pedal. Repeat

that process several times to dry out the

brake discs and brake pads.

yDo not drive or park over or near flam-

mable materials such as dry grass or fall-

en leaves, as they may burn easily. The

exhaust system is very hot while the en-

gine is running and right after the engine

stops. This could create a fire hazard.

yAfter driving through tall grass, mud,

rocks, sand, rivers, etc., check that there

is no grass, bush, paper, rags, stones,

sand, etc. adhering to or trapped on the

underbody. Clear off any such matter from

the underbody. If the vehicle is used with

these materials trapped or adhering to the

underbody, a mechanical breakdown or

fire could occur.

ySecure all cargo carried inside the vehi-

cle and make certain that it is not piled

higher than the seatbacks. During sudden

stops or jolts, unsecured cargo could be

yAlways maintain a safe driving

speed according to the road and

weather conditions in order to

avoid having an accident on a

sharp turn, during sudden braking

or under other similar conditions.

yAlways use the utmost care in

driving – overconfidence because

you are driving an All-Wheel Drive

vehicle could easily lead to a seri-

ous accident.

Driving tips

8-7

–

CONTINUED

–

thrown around in the vehicle and cause in-

jury. Do not pile heavy loads on the roof.

Those loads raise the vehicle’s center of

gravity and make it more prone to tip over.

yIf you must rock the vehicle to free it

from sand or mud, depress the accelera-

tor pedal slightly and move the selector le-

ver back and forth between “D” and “R” re-

peatedly. Do not race the engine. For the

best possible traction, avoid spinning the

wheels when trying to free the vehicle.

When the road surface is extremely slip-

pery, you can obtain better traction by

starting the vehicle with the transmission

in 2nd than 1st (both for MT and AT).

yNever equip your vehicle with tires larg-

er than those specified in this manual.

yFrequent driving of an AWD vehicle un-

der hard-driving conditions such as rough

roads or off roads will necessitate more

frequent replacement of engine oil, brake

fluid and transmission oil than that speci-

fied in the maintenance schedule de-

scribed in the “Warranty and Maintenance

Booklet”.

Remember that damage done to your

SUBARU while operating it off-road and

not using common sense precautions

such as those listed above is not eligible

for warranty coverage.

yWash the vehicle’s underbody after off-

road driving. Suspension components are

particularly prone to dirt buildup, so they

need to be washed thoroughly. Winter driving

Operation during cold weath-

Carry some emergency equipment, such

as tire chains, a window scraper, a bag of

sand, flares, a small shovel, and jumper

cables.

Check the battery and cables. Cold tem-

peratures reduce battery capacity. The

battery must be in good condition to pro-

vide enough power for cold winter starts.

Use an engine oil of proper grade and vis-

cosity for cold weather. Heavy summer oil

will cause harder starting.

Keep the door locks from freezing by

800219

8-8

Driving tips

squirting them with deicer or glycerin.

Forcing a frozen door open may damage

or separate the rubber weather strips

around the door. If the door is frozen, use

hot water to melt the ice, and afterwards

thoroughly wipe the water away.

Use a windshield washer fluid that con-

tains an antifreeze solution. Do not use

engine antifreeze or other substitutes be-

cause they may damage the paint of the

vehicle.

SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid con-

tains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5%

surfactant, by volume. Its freezing temper-

ature varies according to how much it is di-

luted, as indicated in the following table.

In order to prevent freezing of washer flu-

id, check the freezing temperatures in the

table above when adjusting the fluid con-

centration to the outside temperature.

If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with

a different concentration from the one

used previously, purge the old fluid from

the piping between the reservoir tank and

washer nozzles by operating the washer

for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if

the concentration of the fluid remaining in

the piping is too low for the outside tem-

perature, it may freeze and block the noz-

zles.

TBefore driving your vehicle

Before entering the vehicle, remove any

snow or ice from your shoes because that

could make the pedals slippery and dan-

gerous.

While warming up the vehicle before driv-

ing, check that the accelerator pedal,

brake pedal, and all other controls operate

smoothly.

Clear away ice and snow that has accu-

mulated under the fenders to avoid mak-

ing steering difficult. During severe winter

driving, stop when and where it is safe to

do so and check under the fenders period-

ically.

TParking in cold weather

Do not use the parking brake when park-

ing for long periods in cold weather since

it could freeze in that position. Instead, ob-

serve the following.

1. Place the shift lever in “1” or “R” for

manual transmission vehicles, and in “P”

for automatic transmission vehicles.

2. Use tire stops under the tires to prevent

the vehicle from moving.

When the vehicle is parked in snow or

when it snows, raise the wiper blades off

the glass to prevent damage to them.

When the vehicle has been left parked af-

ter use on roads heavily covered with

snow, or has been left parked during a

snowstorm, icing may develop on the

brake system, which could cause poor

braking action. Check for snow or ice

Washer Fluid Con-

centration

Freezing Tempera-

ture

30% 10.4qF (–12qC)

50% –4qF (–20qC)

100% –49qF (–45qC)

Adjust the washer fluid concentra-

tion appropriately for the outside

temperature. If the concentration is

inappropriate, sprayed washer fluid

may freeze on the windshield and

obstruct your view, and the fluid

may freeze in the reservoir tank.

Snow can trap dangerous exhaust

gases under your vehicle. Keep

snow clear of the exhaust pipe and

from around your vehicle if you park

the vehicle in snow with the engine

running.

Driving tips

8-9

–

CONTINUED

–

buildup on the suspension, disc brakes

and brake hoses underneath the vehicle.

If there is caked snow or ice, remove it,

being careful not to damage the disc

brakes and brake hoses and ABS har-

ness.

TRefueling in cold weather

To help prevent moisture from forming in

the fuel system and the risk of its freezing,

use of an antifreeze additive in the fuel

tank is recommended during cold weath-

er.

Use only additives that are specifically de-

signed for this purpose. When an anti-

freeze additive is used, its effect lasts

longer if the tank is refilled whenever the

fuel level reaches half empty.

If your SUBARU is not going to be used for

an extended period, it is best to have the

fuel tank filled to capacity.

Driving on snowy and icy

roads

To prevent skidding and slipping, avoid

sudden braking, abrupt acceleration, high-

speed driving, and sharp turning when

driving on snowy or icy roads.

Always maintain ample distance between

your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you

to avoid the need for sudden braking.

To supplement the foot brake, use the en-

gine brake effectively to control the vehi-

cle speed. (Shift into a lower gear when

necessary.)

Avoid shifting down abruptly. Such behav-

ior can cause the wheels to lock, possibly

leading to loss of vehicle control.

An anti-lock brake system (ABS) enhanc-

es your vehicle’s braking performance on

snowy and icy roads. Refer to the “ABS

(Anti-lock Brake System)” section in chap-

ter 7 for information on braking on slippery

surfaces.

TWiper operation when snowing

Before driving in cold weather, make sure

the wiper blades are not frozen to the

windshield or rear window. If the wiper

blades are frozen to the windshield or rear

window, use the defroster with the airflow

control button/dial in the “ ” position

and the temperature control dial set for

maximum warmth until the wiper blades

are completely thawed out. If your vehicle

is equipped with a wiper deicer, it is helpful

to thaw the windshield wiper blades. To

thaw out the rear wiper blade, use the rear

window defogger.

When driving in snow, if frozen snow

starts to stick on the surface of the wind-

shield despite wiper operation, use the de-

froster with the airflow control button/dial

in “ ” and the temperature control dial

set for maximum warmth. After the wind-

shield gets warmed enough to melt the

frozen snow on it, wash it away using the

windshield washer.

Snow stuck on the wiper arm prevents the

wiper from working effectively. If snow is

stuck on the wiper arm, pull off the road to

a safe place, then remove it. If you stop

the vehicle at road side, use the hazard

warning flasher to alert other drivers.

We recommend use of non-freezing type

wiper blades (winter blades) during the

seasons you could have snow and sub-

Do not use the cruise control on

slippery roads such as snowy or icy

roads. This may cause loss of vehi-

cle control.

Avoid prolonged continuous driving

in snowstorms. Snow will enter the

engine’s intake system and may

hinder the air flow, which could re-

sult in engine shutdown or even

breakdown.

8-10

Driving tips

zero temperatures. Blades of this type

give superior wiping performance in

snowy conditions. Be sure to use blades

that are suitable for your vehicle.

NOTE

When the season requiring non-freez-

ing type wiper blades is over, replace

them with standard wiper blades.

Corrosion protection

Refer to the “Corrosion protection” section

(chapter 10).

Snow tires Your vehicle is equipped with “all season

tires” as original equipment, which are de-

signed to provide an adequate measure of

traction, handling and braking perfor-

mance in year-round driving. In winter, it

may be possible to enhance performance

through use of tires designed specifically

for winter driving conditions.

When you choose to install winter tires on

your vehicle, be sure to use the correct tire

size and type. You must install four winter

tires that are of the same size, construc-

tion, brand and load range and you should

never mix radial, belted bias or bias tires

since this may result in dangerous han-

dling characteristics. When you choose a

tire, make sure that there is enough clear-

ance between the tire and vehicle body.

Remember to drive with care at all times

regardless of the type of tires on your ve-

hicle.

Tire chains

Driving on snowy grades or icy roads may

require the use of tire chains, in which

case put the chains on the front wheels

only. Use only SAE class S type chains

that are of the correct size for your tires so

as not to damage the vehicle body or sus-

pension.

When driving with tire chains, drive at

During high-speed driving, non-

freezing type wiper blades may not

perform as well as standard wiper

blades. If this happens, reduce the

vehicle speed.

yWhen replacing original tires with

winter (snow) tires, make sure you

use only the same size, construc-

tion and load range as the original

tires listed on the tire placard. Us-

ing other sizes and construction

may affect speedometer/odome-

ter calibration and clearance be-

tween the body and tires. It also

may be dangerous and lead to

loss of vehicle control.

yYou must install four winter tires

that are of the same size, con-

struction, brand, and load range.

Mixing other sizes or construc-

tions may result in severe me-

chanical damage to the drive train

of your vehicle and may affect

ride, handling, braking and speed-

ometer/odometer calibration. It

also may be dangerous and lead

to loss of vehicle control.

yDo not use a combination of radi-

al, belted bias or bias tires since it

may cause dangerous handling

characteristics and lead to an ac-

cident.

Driving tips

8-11

–

CONTINUED

–

speeds below 19 mph (30 km/h).

Always use the utmost care when driving

with tire chains – overconfidence because

you are driving with tire chains could eas-

ily lead to a serious accident.

Rocking the vehicle

If you must rock the vehicle to free it from

snow, sand, or mud, depress the acceler-

ator pedal slightly and move the selector

lever back and forth between “D” and “R”

repeatedly. Do not race the engine. For

the best possible traction, avoid spinning

the wheels when trying to free the vehicle.

When the road surface is extremely slip-

pery, you can obtain better traction by

starting the vehicle with the transmission

in 2nd than 1st (both for MT and AT).

Refer to the “Automatic transmission” sec-

tion in chapter 7 for information on holding

the transmission in 2nd position.

Loading your vehicle

yNever allow passengers to ride on

a folded rear seatback or in the

cargo area. Doing so may result in

serious injury.

yNever stack luggage or other car-

go higher than the top of the seat-

back because it could tumble for-

ward and injure passengers in the

event of a sudden stop or acci-

dent. Keep luggage or cargo low,

as close to the floor as possible.

100094

yWhen you carry something inside

the vehicle, secure it whenever

you can to prevent it from being

thrown around inside the vehicle

during sudden stops, sharp turns

or in an accident.

yDo not pile heavy loads on the

roof. These loads raise the vehi-

cle’s center of gravity and make it

more prone to tip over.

ySecure lengthy items properly to

prevent them from shooting for-

ward and causing serious injury

during a sudden stop.

yNever exceed the maximum load

limit. If you do, some parts on

your vehicle can break, or it can

change the way your vehicle han-

dles. This could result in loss of

control and cause personal injury.

Also, overloading can shorten the

life of your vehicle.

yDo not place anything on the ex-

tended cargo area cover. Such

items could tumble forward in the

event of a sudden stop or a colli-

sion. This could cause serious in-

jury.

8-12

Driving tips

For better fuel economy, do not carry

unneeded cargo.

Vehicle capacity weight

The load capacity of your vehicle is deter-

mined by weight, not by available cargo

space. The maximum load you can carry

in your vehicle is shown on the vehicle

placard attached to the driver’s side door

pillar. It includes the total weight of the

driver and all passengers and their be-

longings, any optional equipment such as

a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike carrier,

etc., and the tongue load of a trailer.

GVWR and GAWR (Gross Ve-

hicle Weight Rating and

Gross Axle Weight Rating)

The certification plate attached to the driv-

er’s side door jamb shows GVWR (Gross

Vehicle Weight Rating) and GAWR

(Gross Axle Weight Rating).

The GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) must

never exceed the GVWR. GVW is the

combined total of weight of the vehicle, fu-

el, driver, all passengers, luggage, any

optional equipment and trailer tongue

load. Therefore, the GVW changes de-

pending on the situation. The GVWR

equals Curb Weight (actual weight of your

vehicle – including standard equipment,

fluids, emergency tools and spare tire as-

sembly) plus the vehicle capacity weight.

Do not carry spray cans, containers

with flammable or corrosive liquids

or any other dangerous items inside

the vehicle.

800220

800221

D00000

Driving tips

8-13

–

CONTINUED

–

In addition, the total weight applied to

each axle (GAW) must never exceed the

GAWR. The front and rear GAWs can be

adjusted by relocating luggage inside the

vehicle.

Even if the total weight of your luggage is

lower than the vehicle capacity weight, ei-

ther front or rear GAW may exceed the

GAWR, depending on the distribution of

the luggage.

When possible, the load should be evenly

distributed throughout the vehicle.

If you carry heavy loads in the vehicle, you

should confirm that GVW and front and

rear GAWs are within the GVWR and

GAWR by putting your vehicle on a vehi-

cle scale, found at a commercial weighing

station.

Do not use replacement tires with a lower

load range than the originals because

they may lower the GVWR and GAWR

limitations. Replacement tires with a high-

er load range than the originals do not in-

crease the GVWR and GAWR limitations.

Roof rail and crossbar (if

equipped)

The roof rail is not designed to carry cargo

by itself. Cargo can be carried after secur-

ing the roof crossbar kit to the roof rail and

installing the appropriate carrying attach-

ment. When installing the roof crossbar

kit, follow the manufacturer’s instructions.

When you carry cargo on the roof using

the roof crossbar kit and a carrying attach-

ment, never exceed the maximum load

limit explained in the following. You should

also be careful that your vehicle does not

exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR) and front and rear Gross Axle

Weight Rating (GAWR). See the “Loading

your vehicle” section in this chapter for in-

formation on loading cargo into or onto

your vehicle. The maximum load limit of

the cargo, crossbars and carrying attach-

ment must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg).

Place the heaviest load at the bottom,

nearest the roof, and evenly distribute the

cargo. Always properly secure all cargo.

TInstalling carrying attachments on

the crossbars

When installing any carrying attachment

such as a bike carrier, ski carrier, kayak

carrier, cargo basket, etc. on the cross-

bars, follow the manufacturer’s instruc-

tions and make sure that the attachment is

securely fixed to the crossbars. Use only

attachments designed specifically for the

crossbars. A set of crossbars is designed

to carry loads (cargo and attachment) of

not more than 150 lbs (68 kg). Before op-

erating the vehicle, make sure that the

cargo is properly secured on the attach-

ment.

Remember that the vehicle’s center of

gravity is altered with the weight of the

yFor cargo carrying purposes, the

roof rail must be used together

with a roof crossbar kit and the

appropriate carrying attachment.

The roof rail must never be used

alone to carry cargo. Otherwise,

damage to the roof or paint or a

dangerous road hazard due to

loss of cargo could result.

yWhen using the roof crossbar kit,

make sure that the total weight of

the crossbars, carrying attach-

ment and cargo does not exceed

the maximum load limit. Overload-

ing may cause damage to the ve-

hicle and create a safety hazard.

8-14

Driving tips

load on the roof, thus affecting the

driving characteristics.

Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, hard

cornering and abrupt stops. Crosswind

effects will be increased.

TRemoval and installation of the

crossbars

The crossbars can be removed when you

do not use the roof to carry cargo.

VTo remove the crossbar

1) Crossbar end support

2) T-30 torx® head screw

1. Loosen and remove the T-30 torx®

head screw from the top of each crossbar

end support.

2. Move the end support and inner clamp

to unhook each side of the crossbar from

the roof rail.

3. Carefully raise the crossbar from roof

rails.

It may be necessary to move the Front

crossbar rearward, near the center of

the roof rail for easier removal. Use

care not to cross-thread the screw in

the insert if it has been removed.

VTo install the crossbar

Front crossbar:

Front crossbar has 150 LBS. Load Label

on right-hand side.

1) Crossbar end support

2) T-30 torx® head screw

1. Before placing the crossbar on the roof

rails, make sure that the T-30 torx® head

screw is fully loosened from each end

support.

2. Spread the inner clamp and the end

support as far apart as possible.

800222

800223

800222

Driving tips

8-15

1) Load label

2) Direction arrow label

3) 6 in (150 mm)

3. With the front direction arrow label on

the top right side of the crossbar pointing

toward the front of the vehicle, carefully

place the crossbar across the top of the

vehicle so that the crossbar end supports

rest on the top of the roof rails approxi-

mately 6 inches (150 mm) rearward in the

front radius of the roof rail.

4. Move the end support and inner clamp

to hook under the end of the roof rail on

both sides and loosely assemble the T-30

torx® head screw with the tool provided

into the threaded insert in the inner clamp

on each end of the crossbar.

NOTE

It may be necessary to start the inner

clamp and end support at the center of

the roof rail for easier installation, then

move the crossbar forward. Use care

not to cross-thread the screw in the in-

sert if it has been removed.

5. Adjust the alignment of the crossbar on

the roof rails, and if available, use a T-30

torx® bit and torque wrench and tighten

the T-30 torx® head screws to 30 to 35

lbf·in (3.4 to 4.0 N·m, 0.35 to 0.41 kgf·m)

of torque (or tighten securely with the

torx® wrench provided).

Rear crossbar:

1) T-30 torx® head screw

2) Front arrow label

3) 6 in (150 mm)

Install the rear crossbar in the same man-

ner as the front crossbar.

NOTE

The rear crossbar should be posi-

tioned 6 inches (150 mm) forward of

the rear radius in the roof rail.

NOTE

Before each use of the roof crossbar,

make sure the four T-30 crossbar

clamp screws have been checked, and

retightened if necessary to 30 to 35

lbf·in (3.4 to 4.0 N·m, 0.35 to 0.41 kgf·m),

as outlined in Step #5 above.

FRONT

MAXIMUM LOAD 100 LBS. EVENLY DISTRIBUTED

800224

FRONT

3800225

Do not carry cargo on the roof when

the crossbars are removed. Lug-

gage on the roof will be thrown for-

ward or backward in sudden stops

or rapid accelerations, resulting in a

dangerous road hazard.

8-16

Driving tips

Trailer hitch (if equipped)

The trailer hitch is designed to tow a Class

1 rated load.

When you tow a trailer, follow the instruc-

tions in the next section “Trailer towing”.

Connecting a trailer

1. Remove the receiver cover from the

hitch receiver tube. Then insert the ball

mount into the hitch receiver tube.

2. Insert the hitch pin into the hole on the

hitch receiver tube so that the pin passes

through the ball mount.

3. Insert the safety pin securely into the

hitch pin.

4. Pull the ball mount to make sure it does

yNever exceed the maximum

weight specified for the trailer

hitch. Exceeding the maximum

weight could cause an accident

resulting in serious personal inju-

ries. Permissible trailer weight

changes depending on the situa-

tion. Refer to the next section

“Trailer towing” for possible rec-

ommendations and limitations.

yTrailer brakes are required when

the towing load exceeds 1,000 lbs

(453 kg). Be sure your trailer has

safety chains and that each chain

will hold the trailer’s maximum

gross weight. Towing trailers

without safety chains could create

a traffic safety hazard if the trailer

separates from the hitch due to

coupling damage or hitch ball

damage.

yBe sure to check the hitch pin and

safety pin for positive locking

placement before towing a trailer.

If the ball mount comes off the

hitch receiver, the trailer could get

loose and create a traffic safety

hazard.

yUse only the ball mount supplied

with this hitch. Use the hitch only

as a weight carrying hitch. Do not

use with any type of weight dis-

tributing hitch. 800226

800227

Driving tips

8-17

not come off the hitch receiver.

1) Hitch ball installation point

2) Hooks for safety chains

5. Use only a hitch ball that is appropriate

for the ball mount and your trailer. The

hitch ball must be securely installed on the

ball mount.

6. Connect your trailer to the hitch ball.

7. Connect the trailer and the hitch with

safety chains that will hold the trailer’s

maximum gross weight. The chains

should cross under the trailer tongue to

prevent the tongue from dropping onto the

ground in case it should disconnect from

the hitch ball. Allow sufficient slack in the

chains taking tight-turn situations into ac-

count; however, be careful not to let them

drag on the ground.

Hitch harness connector

8. Connect the hitch wire harness’s black

four-pin wire connector to the towing trail-

er’s wire harness

9. Confirm proper function of the hitch

wire harness by individually activating the

brake, right turn signal, left turn signal,

stop, and parking lights on the trailer.

NOTE

Always disconnect the trailer wire har-

ness before launching or retrieving a

watercraft.

When you do not tow a trailer

yRemove the ball mount from the hitch

receiver tube and insert the receiver cover

onto the hitch receiver tube.

yPlace the dust cap over the fou-pin con-

nector of the hitch wire harness to protect

against possible damage.

yOccasionally lubricate terminals of the

four-pin connector using terminal grease.

800228

Do not connect safety chains to part

of the vehicle other than the safety

chain hooks.

800210

8-18

Driving tips

Trailer towing

Your vehicle is designed and intended to

be used primarily as a passenger-carrying

vehicle. Towing a trailer puts additional

loads on your vehicle’s engine, drivetrain,

brakes, tires and suspension and has an

adverse effect on fuel economy.

If you do decide to tow a trailer, your safe-

ty and satisfaction depend upon proper

use of correct equipment and cautious op-

eration of your vehicle. Seek the advice of

your SUBARU dealer to assist you in pur-

chasing a hitch and other necessary tow-

ing equipment appropriate for your vehi-

cle. In addition, be sure to follow the in-

structions on correct installation and use

provided by the trailer and other towing

equipment manufacturers.

SUBARU assumes no responsibility for in-

juries or vehicle damage that result from

trailer towing equipment, or from any er-

rors or omissions in the instructions ac-

companying such equipment or for your

failure to follow the proper instructions.

Warranties and maintenance

SUBARU warranties do not apply to vehi-

cle damage or malfunction caused by trail-

er towing. If you use your vehicle to tow a

trailer, more frequent maintenance will be

required due to the additional load. (Refer

to “Maintenance schedule under severe

driving conditions” in the “Warranty and

Maintenance Booklet”.)

Under no circumstances should a trailer

be towed with a new vehicle or a vehicle

with any new powertrain component (en-

gine, transmission, differential, wheel

bearings, etc.) for the first 1,000 miles

(1,600 km) of driving.

Maximum load limits

TTotal trailer weight

Total trailer weight

The total trailer weight (trailer weight plus

its cargo load) must never exceed the

maximum weight shown in the following

table.

Never exceed the maximum load

limits explained in the following. Ex-

ceeding the maximum load limits

could cause personal injury and/or

vehicle damage.

yAdequate size trailer brakes are

required when the trailer and its

cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

total weight.

yBefore towing a trailer, check the

trailer total weight, GVW, GAWs

and tongue load. Make sure the

load and its distribution in your

vehicle and trailer are acceptable.

800211

Driving tips

8-19

–

CONTINUED

–

TGross Vehicle Weight (GVW) and

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR)

Gross Vehicle Weight

The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) must

never exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight

Rating (GVWR).

Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) is the com-

bined total of the weight of the vehicle,

driver, passengers, luggage, trailer hitch,

trailer tongue load and any other optional

equipment installed on your vehicle.

Therefore, the GVW changes depending

on the situation. Determine the GVW each

time before going on a trip by putting your

vehicle and trailer on a vehicle scale.

Certification plate

GVWR is shown on the certification plate

located on the driver’s side door jamb.

Model Conditions Maximum

total trailer

weight

MT models When towing a

trailer without

brakes.

1,000 lbs

(453 kg)

When towing a

trailer with

brakes.

2,400 lbs

(1,087 kg)

AT models When towing a

trailer without

brakes.

1,000 lbs

(453 kg)

When towing a

trailer with

brakes.

2,400 lbs

(1,087 kg)

When towing a

trailer on a long

uphill grade con-

tinuously for over

5 miles (8 km)

with an outside

temperature of

104qF (40qC) or

above.

1,000 lbs

(453 kg)

800009

D00000

8-20

Driving tips

TGross Axle Weight (GAW) and

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

Gross Axle Weight

The total weight applied to each axle

(GAW) must never exceed the Gross Axle

Weight Rating (GAWR). The front and

rear GAWs can be adjusted by relocating

passengers and luggage inside the vehi-

cle. The front and rear GAWR are also

shown on the certification plate.

To check both GVWR and GAWR and to

confirm that the total weight and weight

distribution are within safe driving limits,

you should have your vehicle and trailer

weighed at a commercial weighing sta-

tion.

Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to

prevent a change in weight distribution

while driving.

TTongue load

Tongue load

Ensure that the trailer tongue load is from

8 to 11 percent of the total trailer weight

and does not exceed the maximum value

of 200 lbs (90 kg).

1) Jack

2) Bathroom scale

The tongue load can be weighed with a

bathroom scale as shown in the illustra-

tion above. When weighing the tongue

load, be sure to position the towing cou-

pler at the height at which it would be dur-

ing actual towing, using a jack as shown.

800229

800214

800230

Driving tips

8-21

–

CONTINUED

–

F: Front of vehicle

The tongue load can be adjusted by prop-

er distribution of the load in the trailer.

Never load the trailer with more weight in

the back than in the front; approximately

60 percent of the trailer load should be in

the front and approximately 40 percent in

the rear. Also, distribute the load as even-

ly as possible on both the left and right

sides.

Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to

prevent a change in weight distribution

while driving.

Trailer hitches

Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and

trailer.

The use of a genuine SUBARU trailer

hitch is recommended. A genuine SUBA-

RU hitch is available from your SUBARU

dealer.

If use of a non-genuine hitch is unavoid-

able, be sure the hitch is suited to your ve-

hicle and trailer. Consult with a profes-

sional hitch supplier to assist you in

choosing an appropriate hitch for your ve-

hicle. Be sure to follow all of the hitch man-

ufacturer’s instructions for installation and

use.

Never use a hitch that mounts only to the

rear bumper. The bumper is not designed

to handle that type of load.

For all types of hitches, regularly check

that the hitch mounting bolts and nuts are

tight.

60% 40% 50% 50%

800216

If the trailer is loaded with more

weight in the back of trailer’s axle

than in the front, the load is taken off

the rear axle of the towing vehicle.

This may cause the rear wheels to

skid, especially during braking or

when vehicle speed is reduced dur-

ing cornering, resulting in over-

steer, spin out and/or jackknifing.

Never drill the frame or under-body

of your vehicle to install a commer-

cial trailer hitch. If you do, danger-

ous exhaust gas, water or mud may

enter the passenger compartment

through the drilled hole. Exhaust

gas contains carbon monoxide, a

colorless and odorless gas which is

dangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.

Also, drilling the frame or under-

body of your vehicle could cause

deterioration of strength of your ve-

hicle and cause corrosion around

the drilled hole.

yDo not modify the vehicle exhaust

system, brake system, or other

systems when installing a hitch or

other trailer towing equipment.

yDo not use axle-mounted hitches

as they can cause damage to the

axle housing, wheel bearings,

wheels or tires.

8-22

Driving tips

Connecting a trailer

TTrailer brakes

If your trailer’s total weight (trailer weight

plus its cargo weight) exceeds 1,000 lbs

(453 kg), the trailer is required to be

equipped with its own brake system. Elec-

tric brakes or surge brakes are recom-

mended, and must be installed properly.

Check that your trailer’s brakes conform

with Federal, state/province and/or other

applicable regulations. Your SUBARU’s

brake system is not designed to be tapped

into the trailer’s hydraulic brake system.

Please ask your SUBARU dealer and pro-

fessional trailer supplier for more informa-

tion about the trailer’s brake system.

TTrailer safety chains

In case the trailer hitch connector or hitch

ball should break or become disconnect-

ed, the trailer could get loose and create a

traffic safety hazard.

For safety, always connect the towing ve-

hicle and trailer with trailer safety chains.

Pass the chains crossing each other un-

der the trailer tongue to prevent the trailer

from dropping onto the ground in case the

trailer tongue should disconnect from the

hitch ball. Allow sufficient slack in the

chains taking tight-turn situations into ac-

count; however, be careful not to let them

drag on the ground.

For more information about the safety

chain connection, refer to the instructions

for your hitch and trailer.

TSide mirrors

After hitching a trailer to your vehicle,

check that the standard side mirrors pro-

vide a good rearward field of view without

significant blind spots. If significant blind

spots occur with the vehicle’s standard

side mirrors, use towing mirrors that con-

form with Federal, state/province and/or

other applicable regulations.

TTrailer lights

yAdequate size trailer brakes are

required when the trailer and its

cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

total weight.

yDo not directly connect your trail-

er’s hydraulic brake system to the

hydraulic brake system in your

vehicle. Direct connection would

cause the vehicle’s brake perfor-

mance to deteriorate and could

lead to an accident.

Always use safety chains between

your vehicle and the trailer. Towing

a trailer without safety chains could

create a traffic safety hazard if the

trailer separates from the hitch due

to coupling damage or hitch ball

damage.

Direct splicing or other improper

connection of trailer lights may

damage your vehicle’s electrical

system and cause a malfunction of

your vehicle’s lighting system.

800007

Driving tips

8-23

–

CONTINUED

–

Connection of trailer lights to your vehi-

cle’s electrical system requires modifica-

tions to the vehicle’s lighting circuit to in-

crease its capacity and accommodate wir-

ing changes. To ensure the trailer lights

are connected properly, please consult

your SUBARU dealer. Check for proper

operation of the turn signals, the brake

lights and parking lights each time you

hitch up.

TTires

Make sure that all the tires on your vehicle

are properly inflated to the pressure spec-

ified on the tire placard located on the driv-

er’s side center pillar.

Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and

proper inflation pressure should be in ac-

cordance with the trailer manufacturer’s

specifications.

Trailer towing tips

TBefore starting out on a trip

yCheck that the vehicle and vehicle-to-

hitch mounting are in good condition. If

any problems are apparent, do not tow the

trailer.

yCheck that the vehicle sits horizontally

with the trailer attached. If the vehicle is

tipped sharply up at the front and down at

the rear, check the total trailer weight,

GVW, GAWs and tongue load again, then

confirm that the load and its distribution

are acceptable.

yCheck that the tire pressures are cor-

rect.

yCheck that the vehicle and trailer are

connected properly. Confirm that

– the trailer tongue is connected prop-

erly to the hitch ball.

– the trailer lights connector is connect-

ed properly and trailer’s brake lights illu-

minate when the vehicle’s brake pedal

is pressed, and that the trailer’s turn sig-

nal lights flash when the vehicle’s turn

signal lever is operated.

– the safety chains are connected prop-

erly.

– all cargo in the trailer is secured safe-

ty in position.

– the side mirrors provide a good rear-

ward field of view without a significant

blind spot.

ySufficient time should be taken to learn

the “feel” of the vehicle/trailer combination

before starting out on a trip. In an area free

of traffic, practice turning, stopping and

backing up.

TDriving with a trailer

yYou should allow for considerably more

stopping distance when towing a trailer.

Avoid sudden braking because it may re-

sult in skidding or jackknifing and loss of

control.

yAvoid abrupt starts and sudden acceler-

ations. If your vehicle has a manual trans-

mission, always start out in first gear and

release the clutch at moderate engine rev-

Never tow a trailer when the tempo-

rary spare tire is used. The tempo-

rary spare tire is not designed to

sustain the towing load. Use of the

temporary spare tire when towing

can result in failure of the spare tire

and/or less stability of the vehicle.

yNever exceed 45 mph (72 km/h)

when towing a trailer in hilly coun-

try on hot days.

yWhen towing a trailer, steering,

stability, stopping distance and

braking performance will be dif-

ferent from normal operation. For

safety’s sake, you should employ

extra caution when towing a trail-

er and you should never speed.

You should also keep the follow-

ing tips in mind:

8-24

Driving tips

olution.

yAvoid uneven steering, sharp turns and

rapid lane changes.

ySlow down before turning. Make a long-

er than normal turning radius because the

trailer wheels will be closer than the vehi-

cle wheels to the inside of the turn. In a

tight turn, the trailer could hit your vehicle.

yCrosswinds will adversely affect the

handling of your vehicle and trailer, caus-

ing sway. Crosswinds can be due to

weather conditions or the passing of large

trucks or buses. If swaying occurs, firmly

grip the steering wheel and slow down im-

mediately but gradually.

yWhen passing other vehicles, consider-

able distance is required because of the

added weight and length caused by at-

taching the trailer to your vehicle.

1) Left turn

2) Right turn

yBacking up with a trailer is difficult and

takes practice. When backing up with a

trailer, never accelerate or steer rapidly.

When turning back, grip the bottom of the

steering wheel with one hand and turn it to

the left for a left turn, and turn it to the right

for a right turn.

yIf the ABS warning light illuminates

while the vehicle is in motion, stop towing

the trailer and have repairs performed im-

mediately by the nearest SUBARU dealer.

TDriving on grades

yBefore going down a steep hill, slow

down and shift into lower gear (if neces-

sary, use 1st gear) in order to utilize the

engine braking effect and prevent over-

heating of your vehicle’s brakes. Do not

make sudden downshifts.

yWhen driving uphill in hot weather, the

air conditioner may turn off automatically

to protect the engine from overheating.

yWhen driving uphill in hot weather, pay

attention to the water temperature gauge

pointer (for all vehicles) and AT OIL TEMP

warning light (for AT vehicles) since the

engine and transmission are relatively

prone to overheating under these condi-

tions. If the water temperature gauge

pointer approaches the OVERHEAT zone

or the AT OIL TEMP warning light illumi-

nates, immediately switch off the air con-

ditioner and stop the vehicle at the nearest

safe place. Refer to the “Engine overheat-

ing” section in chapter 9, and “Warning

and indicator lights” section in chapter 3.

yIf your vehicle has an automatic trans-

mission, avoid using the accelerator pedal

to stay stationary on an uphill slope in-

stead of using the parking brake or foot

brake. That may cause the transmission

fluid to overheat.

yIf your vehicle has an automatic trans-

mission, place the selector lever as fol-

lows:

Uphill slopes: “D” position

Downhill slopes: A low-speed gear posi-

tion to use engine braking

800231

Driving tips

8-25

TParking on a grade

Always block the wheels under both vehi-

cle and trailer when parking. Apply the

parking brake firmly. You should not park

on a hill or slope. But if parking on a hill or

slope cannot be avoided, you should take

the following steps:

1. Apply the brakes and hold the pedal

down.

2. Have someone place wheel blocks un-

der both the vehicle and trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel blocks are in place, re-

lease the regular brakes slowly until the

blocks absorb the load.

4. Apply the regular brakes and then ap-

ply the parking brake; slowly release the

regular brakes.

5. Shift into 1st or reverse gear (manual

transmission) or “P” (automatic transmis-

sion) and shut off the engine.

In case of emergency

If you park your vehicle in case of

an emergency .................................................. 9-2

Temporary spare tire (if equipped) ................... 9-2

Flat tires .............................................................. 9-3

Changing a flat tire ................................................. 9-3

Jump starting ...................................................... 9-7

How to jump start ................................................... 9-8

Engine overheating ............................................ 9-10

If steam is coming from the engine

compartment ......................................................... 9-10

If no steam is coming from the engine

compartment ......................................................... 9-10

Towing ................................................................. 9-10

Towing and tie-down hooks .................................. 9-11

Using a flat-bed truck ............................................. 9-12

Towing with all wheels on the ground .................. 9-12

Rear gate – if the rear gate cannot be

unlocked .......................................................... 9-13

Moonroof – if the moonroof cannot be

closed ............................................................... 9-13

Maintenance tools .............................................. 9-14

Jack and jack handle .............................................. 9-14

9-2

In case of emergency

In case of e merge ncy

If you park your vehicle in

case of an emergency

The hazard warning flasher should be

used in day or night to warn other drivers

when you have to park your vehicle under

emergency conditions.

Avoid stopping on the road. It is best to

safely pull off the road if a problem occurs.

The hazard warning flasher can be acti-

vated regardless of the ignition switch po-

sition.

Turn on the hazard warning by pushing

the hazard warning flasher switch. Turn it

off by pushing the switch again.

When the hazard warning flasher is on,

the turn signals do not work. Temporary spare tire (if

equipped)

The temporary spare tire is smaller and

lighter than a conventional tire and is de-

signed for emergency use only. Remove

the temporary spare tire and re-install the

conventional tire as soon as possible be-

cause the spare tire is designed only for

temporary use.

Check the inflation pressure of the tempo-

rary spare tire periodically to keep the tire

300117

Never tow a trailer when the tempo-

rary spare tire is used. The tempo-

rary spare tire is not designed to

sustain the towing load. Use of the

temporary spare tire when towing

can result in failure of the spare tire

and/or less stability of the vehicle

and may lead to an accident.

Never use any temporary spare tire

other than the original. Using other

sizes may result in severe mechani-

cal damage to the drive train of your

vehicle.

In case of emergency

9-3

–

CONTINUED

–

ready for use. The correct pressure is 60

psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kg/cm2).

When using the temporary spare tire, note

the following.

yDo not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).

yDo not put a tire chain on the temporary

spare tire. Because of the smaller tire

size, a tire chain will not fit properly.

yDo not use two or more temporary

spare tires at the same time.

yDo not drive over obstacles. This tire

has a smaller diameter, so road clearance

is reduced.

1) Tread wear indicator bar

2) Indicator location mark

yWhen the wear indicator appears on the

tread, replace the tire.

1) Spare fuse

2) FWD connector

(All AWD AT models) Before driving

your vehicle with the temporary spare

tire, put a spare fuse inside the FWD

connector in the main fuse box located

in the engine compartment and con-

firm that the Front-wheel drive warning

light “AWD” in the combination meter

comes on. The all wheel drive capabili-

ty of the vehicle has now deactivated.

After re-installing the conventional tire,

remove the spare fuse from the FWD

connector in order to reactivate all

wheel drive.

Flat tires

If you have a flat tire while driving, never

brake suddenly; keep driving straight

ahead while gradually reducing speed.

Then slowly pull off the road to a safe

place.

Changing a flat tire

900231

600435

yDo not jack up the vehicle on an

incline or a loose road surface.

The jack can come out of the jack-

ing point or sink into the ground

and this can result in a severe ac-

cident.

yUse only the jack provided with

your vehicle. The jack supplied

with the vehicle is designed only

for changing a tire. Never get un-

der the vehicle while supporting

the vehicle with this jack.

9-4

In case of emergency

1. Park on a hard, level surface, whenev-

er possible, then stop the engine.

2. Set the parking brake securely and

shift a manual transmission vehicle in re-

verse or an automatic transmission vehi-

cle in the “P” (Park) position.

3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher and

have everyone get out of the vehicle.

4. Put wheel blocks at the front and rear

of the tire diagonally opposite the flat tire.

1) Jack

2) Jack handle

3) Spare tire

5. Take out the spare tire, jack, and wheel

nut wrench.

The spare tire is stored under the floor of

the cargo area.

To remove the spare tire:

1. Open the lid and remove it.

2. Remove the storage compartment

bucket (Canada spec. non-turbo models).

3. Remove the storage compartment tray

(Except Canada spec. non-turbo models).

4. Turn the attaching bolt counterclock-

wise, then take spare tire out.

yAlways turn off the engine before

raising the flat tire off the ground

using the jack. Never swing or

push the vehicle supported with

the jack. The jack can come out of

the jacking point due to a jolt and

this can result in a severe acci-

dent.

900000

900237 900293

900232

In case of emergency

9-5

–

CONTINUED

–

5. The jack is stored under the left side of

the cargo floor.

To take out the jack:

Pull the tab to open the lid, turn the jack

screw counterclockwise to loosen it, then

remove the jack.

To take out the jack handle:

Open the rear-left and center lids in the

cargo area by pulling their tabs.

6. Loosen the wheel nuts using the wheel

nut wrench but do not remove the nuts.

7. Place the jack under the side sill at the

front or rear jack-up point closest to the flat

tire.

Turn the jackscrew by hand until the jack

head engages firmly into the jack-up point.

900003

900004

900005

900006

900007

9-6

In case of emergency

8. Insert the jack handle into the jack-

screw, and turn the handle until the tire

clears the ground. Do not raise the vehicle

higher than necessary.

9. Remove the wheel nuts and the flat

tire.

10.Before putting the spare tire on, clean

the mounting surface of the wheel and

hub with a cloth.

11.Put on the spare tire. Replace the

wheel nuts. Tighten them by hand.

12.Turn the jack handle counterclockwise

to lower the vehicle.

13.Use the wheel nut wrench to securely

tighten the wheel nuts to the specified

torque, following the tightening order in

the illustration.

The torque for tightening the nuts is 58 to

72 lbf·ft (80 to 100 N·m, 8 to 10 kgf·m).

This torque is equivalent to applying about

88 to 110 lbs (40 to 50 kg) at the top of the

wheel nut wrench. Never use your foot on

the wheel nut wrench or a pipe extension

on the wrench because you may exceed

the specified torque. Have the wheel nut

torque checked at the nearest automotive

service facility.

900008

900009

Do not use oil or grease on the

wheel studs or nuts when the spare

tire is installed. This could cause the

nuts to become loose and lead to an

accident.

900010

900011

In case of emergency

9-7

–

CONTINUED

–

14.Store the flat tire in the spare tire com-

partment.

Put the spacer and tighten the attaching

bolt firmly.

Also store the jack and wheel nut wrench

in their storage locations.

Jump starting

When your vehicle does not start due to a

run down (discharged) battery, the vehicle

may be jump started by connecting your

battery to another battery (called the

booster battery) with jumper cables.

Never place a tire or tire changing

tools in the passenger compartment

after changing wheels. In a sudden

stop or collisions, loose equipment

could strike occupants and cause

injury. Store the tire and all tools in

the proper place.

900012

yBattery fluid is SULFURIC ACID.

Do not let it come in contact with

the eyes, skin, clothing or the ve-

hicle.

If battery fluid gets on you, thor-

oughly flush the exposed area

with water immediately. Get medi-

cal help if the fluid has entered

your eyes.

If battery fluid is accidentally

swallowed, immediately drink a

large amount of milk or water, and

obtain immediate medical help.

Keep everyone including children

away from the battery.

yThe gas generated by a battery ex-

plodes if a flame or spark is

brought near it. Do not smoke or

light a match while jump starting.

yNever attempt jump starting if the

discharged battery is frozen. It

could cause the battery to burst or

explode.

yWhenever working on or around a

battery, always wear suitable eye

protectors, and remove metal ob-

jects such as rings, bands or oth-

er metal jewelry.

yBe sure the jumper cables and

clamps on them do not have loose

or missing insulation.

Do not jump start unless cables in

suitable condition are available.

yA running engine can be danger-

ous. Keep your fingers, hands,

clothing, hair and tools away from

the cooling fan, belts and any oth-

er moving engine parts. Remov-

ing rings, watches and ties is ad-

visable.

yJump starting is dangerous if it is

done incorrectly. If you are unsure

about the proper procedure for

jump starting, consult a compe-

tent mechanic.

9-8

In case of emergency

How to jump start

1. Make sure the booster battery is 12

volts and the negative terminal is ground-

ed.

2. If the booster battery is in another vehi-

cle, do not let the two vehicles touch.

3. Turn off all unnecessary lights and ac-

cessories.

4. Connect the jumper cables exactly in

the sequence illustrated.

In case of emergency

9-9

1) Booster battery

2) Engine lifting bracket

900239

1)Connect one jumper cable to the pos-

itive (+) terminal on the discharged bat-

tery.

2)Connect the other end of the jumper

cable to the positive (+) terminal of the

booster battery.

3)Connect one end of the other cable to

the negative (–) terminal of the booster

battery.

4)Connect the other end of the cable to

the engine lifting bracket.

Make sure that the cables are not near

any moving parts and that the cable

clamps are not in contact with any other

metal.

5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the

booster battery and run it at moderate

speed. Then start the engine of the vehi-

cle that has the discharged battery.

6. When finished, carefully disconnect

the cables in exactly the reverse order.

9-10

In case of emergency

Engine overheating

If the engine overheats, safely pull off the

road and stop the vehicle in a safe place.

If steam is coming from the

engine compartment

Turn off the engine and get everyone

away from the vehicle until it cools down.

If no steam is coming from

the engine compartment

1. Keep the engine running at idling

speed.

2. Open the hood to ventilate the engine

compartment.

Confirm that the cooling fan is turning. If

the fan is not turning, immediately turn off

the engine and contact your authorized

dealer for repair.

3. After the engine coolant temperature

has dropped, turn off the engine.

If the temperature gauge stays at the

overheated zone, turn off the engine.

4. After the engine has fully cooled down,

check the coolant level in the reserve

tank.

If the coolant level is below the “LOW”

mark, add coolant up to the “FULL” mark.

5. If there is no coolant in the reserve

tank, add coolant to the reserve tank.

Then remove the radiator cap and fill the

radiator with coolant.

If you remove the radiator cap from a hot

radiator, first wrap a thick cloth around the

radiator cap, then turn the cap counter-

clockwise slowly without pressing down

until it stops. Release the pressure from

the radiator. After the pressure has been

fully released, remove the cap by pressing

down and turning it.

Towing

If towing is necessary, it is best done by

your SUBARU dealer or a commercial

towing service. Observe the following pro-

cedures for safety.

Never attempt to remove the radia-

tor cap until the engine has been

shut off and has fully cooled down.

When the engine is hot, the coolant

is under pressure. Removing the

cap while the engine is still hot

could release a spray of boiling hot

coolant, which could burn you very

seriously.

Never tow AWD vehicles (both AT

and MT) with the front wheels raised

off the ground while the rear wheels

are on the ground, or with the rear

wheels raised off the ground while

the front wheels are on the ground.

This will cause the vehicle to spin

away due to the operation or deteri-

oration of the center differential.

900014

In case of emergency

9-11

–

CONTINUED

–

Towing and tie-down hooks

The towing hooks should be used only in

an emergency (e.g., to free a stuck vehicle

from mud, sand or snow).

Front towing hook:

Rear towing hook:

Tie-down hooks:

1) Tie-down hooks

2) Towing and tie-down hooks

yUse only the specified towing

hooks and tie-down hooks. Never

use suspension parts or other

parts of the body for towing or tie-

down purposes.

yNever use the tie-down hook clos-

est to the muffler under the vehi-

cle for towing purposes.

yTo prevent deformation to the

bumper and the towing hook, do

not apply excessive lateral load to

the towing hooks.

600441

900234

900238

9-12

In case of emergency

Using a flat-bed truck

This is the best way to transport your vehi-

cle. Use the following procedures to en-

sure safe transportation.

1. Shift the selector lever into the “P” po-

sition for automatic transmission vehicles

or “1st” for manual transmission vehicles.

2. Pull up the parking brake lever firmly.

3. Secure the vehicle onto the carrier

properly with safety chains. Each safety

chain should be equally tightened and

care must be taken not to pull the chains

so tightly that the suspension bottoms out.

Towing with all wheels on the

ground

1. Check the transmission and differential

oil levels and add oil to bring it to the upper

level if necessary.

2. Release the parking brake and put the

transmission in neutral.

3. The ignition switch should be in the

“ACC” position while the vehicle is being

towed.

4. Take up slack in the towline slowly to

prevent damage to the vehicle.

900018

yNever turn the ignition switch to

the “LOCK” position while the ve-

hicle is being towed because the

steering wheel and the direction

of the wheels will be locked.

yRemember that the brake booster

and power steering do not func-

tion when the engine is not run-

ning. Because the engine is

turned off, it will take greater ef-

fort to operate the brake pedal and

steering wheel.

900019

yIf transmission failure occurs,

transport your vehicle on a flat-

bed truck.

yDo not run the engine while being

towed using this method. Trans-

mission damage could result if

the vehicle is towed with the en-

gine running.

yFor vehicles with automatic trans-

mission, the traveling speed must

be limited to less than 20 mph (30

km/h) and the traveling distance

to less than 31 miles (50 km). For

greater speeds and distances,

transport your vehicle on a flat-

bed truck.

In case of emergency

9-13

–

CONTINUED

–

Rear gate – if the rear gate

cannot be unlocked

In the event that you cannot unlock the

rear gate by operating the power door

locking switches or the remote keyless en-

try system, you can unlock it from inside

the cargo area.

1. Remove the access cover at the bot-

tom-center of the rear gate trim.

2. Locate the rear gate lock release lever

behind the rear gate trim panel.

3. Unlock the rear gate by pressing the le-

ver inside the trim upward.

4. Open the rear gate from outside by

raising the rear gate handle.

Moonroof – if the moonroof

cannot be closed

If the moonroof cannot be closed with the

moonroof switch, you can close the moon-

roof manually.

1. Remove the plug on the roof trim locat-

ed to the rear of the moonroof by inserting

the end of the flat-head screwdriver be-

tween the roof and plug and prying it off.

900020

900021

900235

9-14

In case of emergency

2. Insert a hex-headed wrench in the end

of the motor shaft.

To close the moonroof, turn the wrench

counterclockwise.

Have your vehicle checked and repaired

by an authorized SUBARU dealer.

Maintenance tools

Your vehicle is equipped with the following

maintenance tools:

Screwdriver

Wheel nut wrench

Hex-head wrench (for vehicle with

moonroof)

Jack and jack handle

The jack is stored under the left side of the

cargo floor.

The jack handle is stowed under the rear-

left and center lids in the cargo area.

900236

900265

900003

900004

In case of emergency

9-15

For how to use the jack, refer to the “Flat

tires” section in this chapter.

Appearance care

Exterior care ....................................................... 10-2

Washing ................................................................... 10-2

Waxing and polishing ............................................. 10-3

Cleaning aluminum wheels .................................... 10-3

Corrosion protection .......................................... 10-3

Most common causes of corrosion ...................... 10-3

To help prevent corrosion ..................................... 10-4

Cleaning the interior .......................................... 10-4

Seat fabric ............................................................... 10-4

Leather seat materials ............................................ 10-5

Synthetic leather upholstery ................................. 10-5

Ashtray (Canada only, if equipped) ...................... 10-5

Climate control panel, audio panel, instrument

panel, console panel, switches, combination

meter, and other plastic surfaces ....................... 10-5

10-2

Appearance care

Exterior care

Washing

NOTE

When having your vehicle washed in

an automatic car wash, make sure be-

forehand that the car wash is of suit-

able type.

The best way to preserve your vehicle’s

beauty is frequent washing. Wash the ve-

hicle at least once a month to avoid con-

tamination by road grime.

Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty

of lukewarm or cold water. Do not wash

the vehicle with hot water and in direct

sunlight.

Salt, chemicals, insects, tar, soot, tree sap

and bird droppings should be washed off

by using a light detergent, as required. If

you use a light detergent, make certain

that it is a neutral detergent. Do not use

strong soap or chemical detergents. All

cleaning agents should be promptly

flushed from the surface and not allowed

to dry there. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly

with plenty of lukewarm water. Wipe the

remaining water off with a chamois or soft

cloth.

TWashing the underbody

Chemicals, salts and gravel used for deic-

ing road surfaces are extremely corrosive,

accelerating the corrosion of underbody

components, such as the exhaust system,

fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor

pan and fenders, and suspension.

Thoroughly flush the underbody and in-

side of the fenders with lukewarm or cold

water at frequent intervals to reduce the

harmful effects of such agents.

Mud and sand adhering to the underbody

components may accelerate their corro-

sion.

After driving off-road or muddy or sandy

roads, wash the mud and sand off the un-

derbody.

Carefully flush the suspension and axle

parts, as they are particularly prone to

mud and sand buildup. Do not use a

sharp-edged tool to remove caked mud.

NOTE

Be careful not to damage brake hoses,

sensor harnesses, and other parts

when washing suspension compo-

nents.

TUsing a warm water washer

yKeep a good distance of 12 in (30 cm)

or more between the washer nozzle and

the vehicle.

yDo not wash the same area continuous-

ly.

yIf a stain will not come out easily, wash

by hand. Some warm water washers are

yWhen washing the vehicle, the

brakes may get wet. As a result,

the brake stopping distance will

be longer. To dry the brakes, drive

the vehicle at a safe speed while

lightly pressing the brake pedal to

heat up the brakes.

yDo not wash the engine compart-

ment and area adjacent to it. If wa-

ter enters the engine air intake,

electrical parts or the power steer-

ing fluid reservoir, it will cause en-

gine trouble or faulty power steer-

ing respectively.

ySince your vehicle is equipped

with a rear wiper, automatic car-

wash brushes could become tan-

gled around it, damaging the wip-

er arm and other components.

Ask the automatic car-wash oper-

ator not to let the brushes touch

the wiper arm or to fix the wiper

arm on the rear window glass with

adhesive tape before operating

the machine.

Appearance care

10-3

–

CONTINUED

–

of the high temperature, high pressure

type, and they can damage or deform the

resin parts such as mouldings, or cause

water to leak into the vehicle.

Waxing and polishing

Always wash and dry the vehicle before

waxing and polishing.

Use a good quality polish and wax and ap-

ply them according to the manufacturer’s

instructions. Wax or polish when the paint-

ed surface is cool.

Be sure to polish and wax the chrome trim,

as well as the painted surfaces. Loss of

wax on a painted surface leads to loss of

the original luster and also quickens the

deterioration of the surface. It is recom-

mended that a coat of wax be applied at

least once a month, or whenever the sur-

face no longer repels water.

If the appearance of the paint has dimin-

ished to the point where the luster or tone

cannot be restored, lightly polish the sur-

face with a fine-grained compound. Never

polish just the affected area, but include

the surrounding area as well. Always pol-

ish in only one direction. A No. 2000 grain

compound is recommended. Never use a

coarse-grained compound. Coarser

grained compounds have a smaller grain-

size number and could damage the paint.

After polishing with a compound, coat with

wax to restore the original luster. Frequent

polishing with a compound or an incorrect

polishing technique will result in removing

the paint layer and exposing the under-

coat. When in doubt, it is always best to

contact your SUBARU dealer or an auto

paint specialist.

Be careful not to block the windshield

washer nozzles with wax when waxing

the vehicle.

Cleaning aluminum wheels

yPromptly wipe the aluminum wheels

clean of any kind of grime or agent. If dirt

is left on too long, it may be difficult to

clean off.

yDo not use soap containing grit to clean

the wheels. Be sure to use a neutral clean-

ing agent, and later rinse thoroughly with

water. Do not clean the wheels with a stiff

brush or expose them to a high-speed

washing device.

yClean the vehicle (including the alumi-

num wheels) with water as soon as possi-

ble when it has been splashed with sea

water, exposed to sea breezes, or driven

on roads treated with salt or other agents.

Corrosion protection

Your SUBARU has been designed and

built to resist corrosion. Special materials

and protective finishes have been used on

most parts of the vehicle to help maintain

fine appearance, strength, and reliable

operation.

Most common causes of cor-

rosion

The most common causes of corrosion

are:

1. The accumulation of moisture retaining

dirt and debris in body panel sections,

cavities, and other areas.

2. Damage to paint and other protective

coatings caused by gravel and stone

chips or minor accidents.

Corrosion is accelerated on the vehicle

when:

1. It is exposed to road salt or dust control

chemicals, or used in coastal areas where

there is more salt in the air, or in areas

where there is considerable industrial pol-

lution.

2. It is driven in areas of high humidity, es-

pecially when temperatures range just

above freezing.

3. Dampness in certain parts of the vehi-

cle remains for a long time, even though

10-4

Appearance care

other parts of the vehicle may be dry.

4. High temperatures will cause corrosion

to parts of the vehicle which cannot dry

quickly due to lack of proper ventilation.

To help prevent corrosion

Wash the vehicle regularly to prevent cor-

rosion of the body and suspension com-

ponents. Also, wash the vehicle promptly

after driving on any of the following surfac-

es:

yroads that have been salted to prevent

them from freezing in winter

ymud, sand, or gravel

ycoastal roads

After the winter has ended, it is recom-

mended that the underbody be given a

very thorough washing.

Before the beginning of winter, check the

condition of underbody components, such

as the exhaust system, fuel and brake

lines, brake cables, suspension, steering

system, floor pan, and fenders. If any of

them are found to be rusted, they should

be given an appropriate rust prevention

treatment or should be replaced. Contact

your SUBARU dealer to perform this kind

of maintenance and treatment if you need

assistance.

Repair chips and scratches in the paint as

soon as you find them.

Check the interior of the vehicle for water

and dirt accumulation under the floor mats

because that could cause corrosion. Oc-

casionally check under the mats to make

sure the area is dry.

Keep your garage dry. Do not park your

vehicle in a damp, poorly ventilated ga-

rage. In such a garage, corrosion can be

caused by dampness. If you wash the ve-

hicle in the garage or put the vehicle into

the garage when wet or covered with

snow, that can cause dampness.

If your vehicle is operated in cold weather

and/or in areas where road salts and other

corrosive materials are used, the door

hinges and locks, trunk lid lock, and hood

latch should be inspected and lubricated

periodically.

Cleaning the interior

Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate

control panel, audio equipment, instru-

ment panel, center console, combination

meter panel, and switches. (Do not use or-

ganic solvents.)

Seat fabric

Remove loose dirt, dust or debris with a

vacuum cleaner. If the dirt is caked on the

fabric or hard to remove with a vacuum

cleaner, use a soft blush then vacuum it.

Wipe the fabric surface with a tightly

wrung cloth and dry the seat fabric thor-

oughly. If the fabric is still dirty, wipe using

a solution of mild soap and lukewarm wa-

ter then dry thoroughly.

If the stain does not come out, try a com-

mercially-available fabric cleaner. Use the

cleaner on a hidden place and make sure

it does not affect the fabric adversely. Use

the cleaner according to its instructions.

NOTE

When cleaning the seat, do not use

benzine, paint thinner, or any similar

materials.

Appearance care

10-5

Leather seat materials

The leather used by SUBARU is a high

quality natural product which will retain its

distinctive appearance and feel for many

years with proper care.

Allowing dust or road dirt to build up on the

surface can cause the material to become

brittle and to wear prematurely. Regular

cleaning with a soft, moist, natural fiber

cloth should be performed monthly, taking

care not to soak the leather or allow water

to penetrate the stitched seams.

A mild detergent suitable for cleaning

woolen fabrics may be used to remove dif-

ficult dirt spots, rubbing with a soft, dry

cloth afterwards to restore the luster. If

your SUBARU is to be parked for a long

time in bright sunlight, it is recommended

that the seats and headrests be covered,

or the windows shaded, to prevent fading

or shrinkage.

Minor surface blemishes or bald patches

may be treated with a commercial leather

spray lacquer. You will discover that each

leather seat section will develop soft folds

or wrinkles, which is characteristic of gen-

uine leather.

Synthetic leather upholstery

The synthetic leather material used on the

SUBARU may be cleaned using mild soap

or detergent and water, after first vacuum-

ing or brushing away loose dirt. Allow the

soap to soak in for a few minutes and wipe

off with a clean, damp cloth. Commercial

foam-type cleaners suitable for synthetic

leather materials may be used when nec-

essary.

Strong cleaning agents such as sol-

vents, paint thinners, window cleaner

or gasoline must never be used on

leather or synthetic interior materials.

Ashtray (Canada only, if

equipped)

Particles of ash and tobacco will accumu-

late around the hinges of the ashtray’s in-

ner lid. Clean them off using a toothbrush

or other narrow-ended implement.

Climate control panel, audio

panel, instrument panel, con-

sole panel, switches, combi-

nation meter, and other plas-

tic surfaces

Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate

control panel, audio equipment, instru-

ment panel, center console, combination

meter panel, and switches. (Do not use or-

ganic solvents.)

Do not use organic solvents such as

paint thinners or gasoline, or strong

cleaning agents that contain those sol-

vents.

600097

Maintenance and service

Maintenance schedule ....................................... 11-3

Maintenance precautions .................................. 11-3

Before checking or servicing in the engine

compartment ........................................................ 11-4

When you do checking or servicing in the

engine compartment while the engine is

running .................................................................. 11-4

Engine hood ....................................................... 11-4

Engine compartment overview ......................... 11-6

Non-turbo models ................................................... 11-6

Turbo models .......................................................... 11-7

Engine oil ............................................................ 11-8

Checking the oil level ............................................. 11-8

Changing the oil and oil filter ................................ 11-8

Recommended grade and viscosity ..................... 11-10

Recommended grade and viscosity under

severe driving conditions .................................... 11-11

Synthetic oil ............................................................ 11-11

Cooling system .................................................. 11-11

Cooling fan, hose and connections ...................... 11-12

Engine coolant ........................................................ 11-12

Air cleaner element ............................................ 11-15

Replacing the air cleaner element ......................... 11-15

Spark plugs ......................................................... 11-17

Recommended spark plugs ................................... 11-17

Drive belts ........................................................... 11-18

Manual transmission oil .................................... 11-18

Checking the oil level ............................................. 11-18

Recommended grade and viscosity ..................... 11-19

Automatic transmission fluid ............................ 11-20

Checking the fluid level .......................................... 11-20

Recommended fluid ............................................... 11-21

Front differential gear oil (AT vehicles) ............ 11-21

Checking the oil level ............................................. 11-21

Recommended grade and viscosity ..................... 11-22

Rear differential gear oil .................................... 11-22

Checking the gear oil level .................................... 11-22

Recommended grade and viscosity ..................... 11-23

Power steering fluid ........................................... 11-23

Checking the fluid level .......................................... 11-23

Recommended fluid ............................................... 11-24

Brake fluid ........................................................... 11-25

Checking the fluid level .......................................... 11-25

Recommended brake fluid ..................................... 11-25

Clutch fluid (MT vehicles) .................................. 11-26

Checking the fluid level .......................................... 11-26

Recommended clutch fluid .................................... 11-26

Brake booster ..................................................... 11-27

Brake pedal ......................................................... 11-27

Checking the brake pedal free play ...................... 11-27

Checking the brake pedal reserve distance ......... 11-27

Clutch pedal (MT vehicles) ................................ 11-28

Checking the clutch function ................................ 11-28

Checking the clutch pedal free play ..................... 11-28

Hill holder (MT vehicles – if equipped) ............. 11-28

Maintenance and service

Replacement of brake pad and lining ............... 11-29

Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings ......... 11-29

Parking brake stroke .......................................... 11-30

Tires and wheels ................................................ 11-30

Types of tires .......................................................... 11-30

Tire inspection ........................................................ 11-30

Tire pressures and wear ........................................ 11-31

Wheel balance ........................................................ 11-32

Wear indicators ....................................................... 11-33

Tire rotation direction mark ................................... 11-33

Tire rotation ............................................................. 11-33

Tire replacement ..................................................... 11-34

Wheel replacement ................................................. 11-35

Aluminum wheels (if equipped) ........................ 11-35

Windshield washer fluid .................................... 11-35

Replacement of wiper blades ............................ 11-37

Windshield wiper blades ........................................ 11-37

Rear window wiper blade ....................................... 11-38

Battery ................................................................. 11-40

Fuses ................................................................... 11-41

Main fuse ............................................................. 11-42

Installation of accessories ................................ 11-43

Replacing bulbs .................................................. 11-44

Headlights (Canada-spec. 2.5XT) .......................... 11-45

Headlights (Except Canada-spec. 2.5XT) ............. 11-46

Rear combination lights ......................................... 11-47

License plate light .................................................. 11-48

Dome light and map light ....................................... 11-48

High mount stop light ............................................ 11-49

Maintenance and service

11-3

–

CONTINUED

–

Maintenance a nd service

Maintenance schedule

The scheduled maintenance items re-

quired to be serviced at regular intervals

are shown in the “Warranty and Mainte-

nance Booklet”.

For details of your maintenance schedule,

read the separate “Warranty and Mainte-

nance Booklet”.

Maintenance precautions

When maintenance and service are re-

quired, it is recommended that all work be

done by an authorized SUBARU dealer.

If you perform maintenance and service

by yourself, you should familiarize your-

self with the information provided in this

section on general maintenance and ser-

vice for your SUBARU.

Incorrect or incomplete service could

cause improper or unsafe vehicle opera-

tion. Any problems caused by improper

maintenance and service performed by

you are not eligible for warranty coverage.

yTesting of an All-Wheel Drive ve-

hicle must NEVER be performed

on a single two-wheel dynamome-

ter or similar apparatus. Attempt-

ing to do so will result in transmis-

sion damage and in uncontrolled

vehicle movement and may cause

an accident or injuries to persons

nearby.

yAlways select a safe area when

performing maintenance on your

vehicle.

yAlways be very careful to avoid in-

jury when working on the vehicle.

Remember that some of the mate-

rials in the vehicle may be hazard-

ous if improperly used or handled,

for example, battery acid.

yYour vehicle should only be ser-

viced by persons fully competent

to do so. Serious personal injury

may result to persons not experi-

enced in servicing vehicles.

yAlways use the proper tools and

make certain that they are well

maintained.

yNever get under the vehicle sup-

ported only by a jack. Always use

a safety stands to support the ve-

hicle.

yNever keep the engine running in

a poorly ventilated area, such as a

garage or other closed areas.

yDo not smoke or allow open

flames around the fuel or battery.

This will cause a fire.

yBecause the fuel system is under

pressure, replacement of the fuel

filter should be performed only by

your SUBARU dealer.

11-4

Maintenance and service

Before checking or servicing

in the engine compartment

When you do checking or ser-

vicing in the engine compart-

ment while the engine is run-

ning

Engine hood

To open the hood:

1. If the wiper blades are lifted off the

windshield, return them to their original

positions.

2. Pull the hood release knob under the

instrument panel.

yWear adequate eye protection to

guard against getting oil or fluids

in your eyes. If something does

get in your eyes, thoroughly wash

them out with clean water.

yDo not tamper with the wiring of

the SRS airbag system or seatbelt

pretensioner system, or attempt

to take its connectors apart, as

that may activate the system or it

can render it inoperative. The wir-

ing and connectors of these sys-

tems are yellow for easy identifi-

cation. NEVER use a circuit tester

for these wiring.

If your SRS airbag or seatbelt pre-

tensioner needs service, consult

your nearest SUBARU dealer.

yAlways stop the engine and set

the parking brake firmly to pre-

vent the vehicle from moving.

yAlways let the engine cool down.

Engine parts become very hot

when the engine is running and

remain hot for some time after the

engine is stopped.

yDo not spill engine oil, engine

coolant, brake fluid or any other

fluid on hot engine components.

This may cause a fire.

yAlways remove the key from the

ignition switch. When the ignition

switch is in the “ON” position, the

cooling fan may operate suddenly

even when the engine is stopped.

A running engine can be dangerous.

Keep your fingers, hands, clothing,

hair and tools away from the cooling

fan, belts and any other moving en-

gine parts. Removing rings, watch-

es and ties is advisable.

B00002

Maintenance and service

11-5

3. Release the secondary hood release

located under the front grille by moving

the lever toward the left.

Lift up the hood, release the hood prop

from its retainer and put the end of the

hood prop into the slot in the hood.

To close the hood:

1. Lift the hood slightly and remove the

hood prop from the slot in the hood and re-

turn the prop to its retainer.

2. Lower the hood until it approaches ap-

proximately 12 in (30 cm) from the closed

position and let it drop.

After closing the hood, be sure the hood is

securely locked.

If this does not close the hood, release it

from a slightly higher position. Do not

push the hood forcibly to close it. It could

deform the metal.

200747

200748

Always check that the hood is prop-

erly locked before you start driving.

If it is not, it might fly open while the

vehicle is moving and block your

view, which may cause an accident

and serious bodily injury.

11-6

Maintenance and service

Engine compartment overview

Non-turbo models

12 3456

7891011

13 12

B00357

1) Air cleaner element (page 11-15)

2) Manual transmission oil level gauge

(MT) (page 11-18) or Differential gear

oil level gauge (AT) (page 11-21)

3) Clutch fluid reservoir (page 11-26)

4) Automatic transmission fluid level

gauge (page 11-20)

5) Brake fluid reservoir (page 11-25)

6) Fuse box (page 11-41)

7) Battery (page 11-40)

8) Windshield washer tank (page 11-35)

9) Engine coolant reservoir (page 11-

11)

10) Engine oil level gauge (page 11-8)

11) Engine oil filler cap (page 11-8)

12) Radiator cap (page 11-11)

13) Power steering fluid reservoir (page

11-23)

Maintenance and service

11-7

Turbo models

123456

7891011

13 12

B00358

1) Air cleaner element (page 11-15)

2) Manual transmission oil level gauge

(MT) (page 11-18) or Differential gear

oil level gauge (AT) (page 11-21)

3) Clutch fluid reservoir (page 11-26)

4) Automatic transmission fluid level

gauge (page 11-20)

5) Brake fluid reservoir (page 11-25)

6) Fuse box (page 11-41)

7) Battery (page 11-40)

8) Windshield washer tank (page 11-35)

9) Engine coolant reservoir (page 11-

11)

10) Engine oil level gauge (page 11-8)

11) Engine oil filler cap (page 11-8)

12) Radiator cap (page 11-11)

13) Power steering fluid reservoir (page

11-23)

11-8

Maintenance and service

Engine oil

Checking the oil level

Check the engine oil level at each fuel

stop.

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

stop the engine.

2. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean, and

insert it again.

3. Be sure the dipstick is correctly insert-

ed until it stops with the graphic symbol

“ ” on its top appearing as shown in

the illustration.

1) Notch

2) Upper level

3) Lower level

4. Pull out the dipstick again and check

the oil level on it. If it is below the lower

level, add oil to bring the level up to the up-

per level.

If you check the oil level just after stopping

the engine, wait a few minutes for the oil to

drain back into the oil pan before checking

the level.

Just after driving or while the engine is

warm, the engine oil level reading may be

in a range between the upper level and

the notch mark. This is caused by thermal

expansion of the engine oil.

To prevent overfilling the engine oil, do not

add any additional oil above the upper lev-

el when the engine is cold.

Changing the oil and oil filter

Change the oil and oil filter according to

the maintenance schedule in the “Warran-

ty and Maintenance Booklet”.

The engine oil and oil filter must be

changed more frequently than listed in the

maintenance schedule when driving on

dusty roads, when short trips are frequent-

ly made, when towing a trailer, or when

driving in extremely cold weather.

1. Warm up the engine by letting the en-

gine idle for approximately 10 minutes to

ease draining the engine oil.

2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

stop the engine.

3. Remove the oil filler cap.

B00359

yUse only engine oil with the rec-

ommended grade and viscosity.

yBe careful not to spill engine oil

when adding it. If oil touches the

exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad

smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If en-

gine oil gets on the exhaust pipe,

be sure to wipe it off.

B00418

Maintenance and service

11-9

–

CONTINUED

–

4. Open the access cover by removing

the eight clips and turning the access cov-

er counterclockwise. The drain plug will be

exposed.

5. Drain out the engine oil by removing

the drain plug while the engine is still

warm. The used oil should be drained into

an appropriate container and disposed of

properly.

6. Wipe the seating surface of the drain

plug with a clean cloth and tighten it se-

curely with a new sealing washer after the

oil has completely drained out.

7. Remove the oil filter with an oil filter

wrench.

8. Before installing a new oil filter, apply a

thin coat of engine oil to the seal.

9. Clean the rubber seal seating area of

the bottom of engine and install the oil fil-

ter by hand turning. Be careful not to twist

or damage the seal.

10.Tighten the oil filter by the amount indi-

cated in the following table after the seal

makes contact with the bottom of engine.

11.Close the access cover by turning it

clockwise and reinstall the eight clips in

their original positions.

12.Pour engine oil through the filler neck.

Oil quantity (guideline):

4.2 US qt (4.0 liters, 3.5 Imp qt)

B00392

B00404

Be careful not to burn yourself with

hot engine oil.

B00405

Oil filter color Part number Amount of

rotation

Black 15208AA100 1 rotation

White 15208AA09A 2/3 – 3/4

rotation

yNever over tighten the oil filter be-

cause that can result in an oil leak.

yThoroughly wipe off any engine

oil that has spilled over the ex-

haust pipe and/or under-cover. If

left unremoved, the oil could

catch fire.

11-10

Maintenance and service

The oil quantity indicated above is only a

guideline. The necessary quantity of oil

depends on the quantity of oil that has

been drained. The quantity of drained oil

differs slightly depending on the tempera-

ture of the oil and the time the oil is left

flowing out. After pouring oil into the en-

gine, therefore, you must use the dipstick

to confirm that the level is correct.

13.Start the engine and make sure that no

oil leaks appear around the filter’s rubber

seal.

14.Run the engine until it reaches the nor-

mal operating temperature. Then stop the

engine and wait a few minutes to allow the

oil drain back. Check the oil level again

and if necessary, add more engine oil.

Recommended grade and

viscosity

Oil grade:

ILSAC GF-4, which can be identified

with the ILSAC certification mark

(Starburst mark)

or API classification SM with the

words “ENERGY CONSERVING”

These recommended oil grades can be

identified by looking for either or both of

the following marks displayed on the oil

container.

API Service label

1) Indicates the oil quality by API designa-

tions

2) Indicates the SAE oil viscosity grade

3) Indicates that the oil has fuel saving ca-

pabilities

ILSAC Certification Mark (Starburst

Mark)

In choosing an oil, you want the proper

quality and viscosity, as well as one that

will add to fuel economy. The following ta-

ble lists the recommended viscosities and

applicable temperatures.

When adding oil, different brands may be

used together as long as they are the

same API classification and SAE viscosity

as those recommended by SUBARU.

SAE

5W-30

3B00446 B00014

Maintenance and service

11-11

–

CONTINUED

–

SAE viscosity number and applicable

temperature

*: 5W-30 is recommended.

Engine oil viscosity (thickness) affects fuel

economy. Oils of lower viscosity provide

better fuel economy. However, in hot

weather, oil of higher viscosity is required

to properly lubricate the engine.

Recommended grade and

viscosity under severe driv-

ing conditions

If the vehicle is used in desert areas, in ar-

eas with very high temperatures, or used

for heavy-duty applications such as tow-

ing a trailer, use of oil with the following

grade and viscosities is recommended.

API classification SM (or SL):

SAE viscosity No.:

30, 40, 10W-50, 20W-40, 20W-50

Synthetic oil

You can use synthetic engine oil that

meets the same requirements given for

conventional engine oil. When using syn-

thetic oil, you must use oil of the same

classification, viscosity and grade shown

in this Owner’s Manual, and must follow

the oil and filter changing intervals shown

in the maintenance schedule.

Cooling system

Use only engine oil with the recom-

mended grade and viscosity.

B00549

5W-30*

10W-30, 10W-40

-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40

-20 0 6020 80 10040 Never attempt to remove the radia-

tor cap until the engine has been

shut off and has cooled down com-

pletely. Since the coolant is under

pressure, you may suffer serious

burns from a spray of boiling hot

coolant when the cap is removed.

The cooling system has been filled

at the factory with a high quality,

corrosion-inhibiting, year-around

coolant which provides protection

against freezing down to –33qF

(–36qC). For adding, use genuine

SUBARU coolant or an equivalent: a

mixture of 50% soft water (or clear

and drinkable water) and 50% phos-

phate or non-amine type coolant.

Use of improper coolants may result

in corrosion in the cooling system. It

is important to maintain protection

against freezing and corrosion,

even if freezing temperatures are

not expected. Never mix different

kinds of coolant.

11-12

Maintenance and service

Cooling fan, hose and con-

nections

Your vehicle employs an electric cooling

fan which is thermostatically controlled to

operate when the engine coolant reaches

a specific temperature.

If the radiator cooling fan does not operate

even when the engine coolant tempera-

ture gauge exceeds the normal operating

range, the cooling fan circuit may be de-

fective. Check the fuse and replace it if

necessary. If the fuse is not blown, have

the cooling system checked by your SUB-

ARU dealer.

If frequent addition of coolant is neces-

sary, there may be a leak in the engine

cooling system. It is recommended that

the cooling system and connections be

checked for leaks, damage, or looseness.

Engine coolant

TChecking the coolant level

1) “FULL” level mark

2) “LOW” level mark

Check the coolant level at each fuel stop.

1. Check the coolant level on the outside

of the reservoir while the engine is cool.

2. If the level is close to or lower than the

“LOW” level mark, add coolant up to the

“FULL” level mark. If the reserve tank is

empty, remove the radiator cap and refill

as required.

3. After refilling the reserve tank and the

radiator, reinstall the caps and check that

the rubber gaskets inside the radiator cap

are in the proper position.

FULL

LOW

600442

yBe careful not to spill engine cool-

ant when adding it. If coolant

touches the exhaust pipe, it may

cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or

a fire. If engine coolant gets on the

exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it

off.

yDo not splash the engine coolant

over painted parts. The alcohol

contained in the engine coolant

may damage the paint surface.

B00018

Maintenance and service

11-13

–

CONTINUED

–

TChanging the coolant

Always add genuine Subaru cooling sys-

tem conditioner whenever the coolant is

replaced.

Change the engine coolant and add gen-

uine Subaru cooling system conditioner

using the following procedures according

to the maintenance schedule.

1. Remove the under cover.

2. Place a proper container under the

drain plug and loosen the drain plug.

3. Loosen the radiator cap to drain the

coolant from the radiator. Then drain the

coolant from the reserve tank. Tighten the

drain plug securely.

4. Install the under cover.

Non-turbo models

1) Filler neck

2) Fill up to this level

Turbo models

1) Filler neck

2) Fill up to this level

5. Slowly pour the coolant and fill up to

just below the filler neck, allowing enough

room to add genuine Subaru cooling sys-

tem conditioner in the radiator. Add genu-

ine Subaru cooling system conditioner un-

til the coolant level reaches the filler neck.

Do not pour the coolant too quickly, as this

may lead to insufficient air bleeding and

trapped air in the system.

B00019

Never attempt to remove the radia-

tor cap until the engine has been

shut off and has cooled down com-

pletely. Since the coolant is under

pressure, you may suffer serious

burns from a spray of boiling hot

coolant when the cap is removed.

B00360

B00394

11-14

Maintenance and service

Guideline of coolant quantity (including cool-

ant in reservoir tank):

Non-turbo models:

MT. 7.3 US qt (6.9 liters, 6.1 Imp qt)

AT. 7.2 US qt (6.8 liters, 6.0 Imp qt)

Turbo models:

MT. 7.8 US qt (7.4 liters, 6.5 Imp qt)

AT. 7.7 US qt (7.3 liters, 6.4 Imp qt)

1) “FULL” level mark

2) “LOW” level mark

6. Pour the coolant and fill to the reservoir

tank’s “FULL” level mark.

7. Put the radiator cap back on and tight-

en firmly. At this time, make sure that the

rubber gasket in the radiator cap is cor-

rectly in place.

8. Start and run the engine for more than

five minutes at 2,000 to 3,000 rpm.

9. Stop the engine and wait until the cool-

ant cools down (122 to 140qF [50 to

60qC]). If there is any loss of coolant, add

coolant to the radiator’s filler neck and to

the reserve tank’s “FULL” level.

10.Put the radiator cap and reservoir cap

back on and tighten firmly.

FULL

LOW

600442

yBe careful not to spill engine cool-

ant when adding it. If coolant

touches the exhaust pipe, it may

cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or

a fire. If engine coolant gets on the

exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it

off.

yDo not splash the engine coolant

over painted parts. The alcohol

contained in the engine coolant

may damage the paint surface.

B00018

Maintenance and service

11-15

–

CONTINUED

–

Air cleaner element

The air cleaner element functions as a fil-

ter screen. When the element is perforat-

ed or removed, engine wear will be exces-

sive and engine life shortened.

The air cleaner element has a viscous

type and a dry type.

Be sure to use the appropriate type of air

cleaner element, which depends on the

vehicle type.

If there is the embossed requirement "Use

of genuine dry air cleaner element is re-

quired" on the air cleaner case cover,

which is shown in the following figure, use

the dry type air cleaner element.

For vehicles without the requirement on

the air cleaner case cover, use the vis-

cous type air cleaner element.

1) Embossed requirement

Replacing the air cleaner ele-

ment

Replace the air cleaner element according

to the maintenance schedule in the “War-

ranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Under

extremely dusty conditions, replace it

more frequently. It is recommended that

you always use genuine SUBARU parts.

TNon-turbo models

1. Unsnap the two clamps holding the air

cleaner case cover.

2. Push the air cleaner case cover in the

direction of the arrow shown in the draw-

Do not operate the engine with the

air cleaner element removed. The air

cleaner element not only filters in-

take air but also stops flames if the

engine backfires. If the air cleaner

element is not installed when the en-

gine backfires, you could be burned.

B00548

B00361

B00362

11-16

Maintenance and service

ing.

1) Air cleaner case cover

2) Viscous air cleaner element

Dry air cleaner element (if required)

3. Open the air cleaner case cover and

remove the air cleaner element.

4. Clean the inside of the air cleaner cov-

er and case with a damp cloth and install

a new air cleaner element.

5. To install the air cleaner case cover, in-

sert the three projections on the air clean-

er case into the slits on the air cleaner

case cover and then snap the two clamps

on the air cleaner case cover.

TTurbo models

1. Unsnap the two clamps holding the air

cleaner case cover.

2. Open the air cleaner case cover and

remove the air cleaner element.

B00363

B00364

B00024

B00025

Maintenance and service

11-17

3. Clean the inside of the air cleaner cov-

er and case with a damp cloth and install

a new air cleaner element.

4. To install the air cleaner case cover, in-

sert the two projections on the air cleaner

case cover into the slits on the air cleaner

case and then snap the two clamps on the

air cleaner case cover.

Spark plugs

It may be difficult to replace the spark

plugs. It is recommended that you have

the spark plugs replaced by your

SUBARU dealer.

The spark plugs should be replaced ac-

cording to the maintenance schedule in

the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

Recommended spark plugs

Non-turbo models:

FR5AP-11 (NGK)

Turbo models:

ILFR6B (NGK)

B00026

yWhen disconnecting the spark

plug cables, always grasp the

spark plug cap, not the cables.

yMake sure the cables are replaced

in the correct order.

B00027

11-18

Maintenance and service

Drive belts

1) Power steering pump pulley

2) Air conditioner compressor pulley

3) Crank pulley

The alternator, power steering pump, and

air conditioner compressor depend on

drive belts. Satisfactory performance re-

quires that belt tension be correct.

To check belt tension, place a straight-

edge (ruler) across two adjacent pulleys

and apply a force of 22 lbs (98 N, 10 kg)

midway between the pulleys by using a

spring scale. Belt deflection should be the

amount specified. If a belt is loose,

cracked, or worn, contact your SUBARU

dealer.

in (mm) Manual transmission oil

Checking the oil level

Non-turbo models:

1) Yellow handle

B00365

Deflection

New belt Used belt

A0.28 – 0.35

(7.0 – 9.0)

0.35 – 0.43

(9.0 – 11.0)

B0.30 – 0.33

(7.5 – 8.5)

0.35 – 0.40

(9.0 – 10.0)

B00366

Maintenance and service

11-19

Turbo models

Check the oil level monthly.

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

stop the engine.

2. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean, and

insert it again.

1) Upper level

2) Lower level

3. Pull out the dipstick again and check

the oil level on it. If it is below the lower

level, add oil through the dipstick hole to

bring the level up to the upper level.

Recommended grade and

viscosity

Each oil manufacturer has its own base

oils and additives. Never use different

brands together.

Oil grade:

API classification GL-5

SAE viscosity No. and applicable tem-

perature

B00367

Be careful not to spill manual trans-

mission oil when adding it. If oil

touches the exhaust pipe, it may

cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a

fire. If oil gets on the exhaust pipe,

be sure to wipe it off.

B00368

-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40

-20 0 6020

80W

75W/90

80 10040

85W

B00032

11-20

Maintenance and service

Automatic transmission fluid

Checking the fluid level

The automatic transmission fluid expands

largely as its temperature rises; the fluid

level differs according to fluid tempera-

ture. Therefore, there are two different

scales for checking the level of hot fluid

and cold fluid on the dipstick.

Though the fluid level can be checked

without warming up the fluid on the

“COLD” range, we recommend checking

the fluid level when the fluid is at operating

temperature.

TChecking the fluid level when the

fluid is hot

Check the fluid level monthly.

1. Drive the vehicle several miles to raise

the temperature of the transmission fluid

up to normal operating temperature; 154

to 176qF (70 to 80qC) is normal.

2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

set the parking brake.

3. First shift the selector lever in each po-

sition. Then shift it in the “P” position, and

run the engine at idling speed.

1) Yellow handle

1) HOT range

2) COLD range

3) Upper level

4) Lower level

4. Pull out the dipstick and check the fluid

level on the gauge. If it is below the lower

level on the “HOT” range, add the recom-

mended automatic transmission fluid up to

the upper level.

TChecking the fluid level when the

fluid is cold

When the fluid level has to be checked

without time to warm up the automatic

transmission, check to see that the fluid

level is between the lower level and upper

level on the “COLD” range. If it is below

that range, add fluid up to the upper level.

Be careful not to overfill.

B00369

B00370

Be careful not to spill automatic

transmission fluid when adding it. If

automatic transmission fluid touch-

es the exhaust pipe, it may cause a

bad smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If au-

tomatic transmission fluid gets on

the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it

off.

Maintenance and service

11-21

–

CONTINUED

–

Recommended fluid

Use one of the following types of automat-

ic transmission fluid.

Genuine Subaru Automatic Transmis-

sion Fluid Type-HP

IDEMITSU ATF HP

Castrol Transmax J

Pennzoil ATF-J*

* Available only in the USA (except

Alaska and Hawaii)

For optimum transmission perfor-

mance, only use the automatic trans-

mission fluid that is recommended and

provided by Subaru.

If the recommended automatic trans-

mission fluid is unavailable, Dexron III

may be temporarily used. If the Dexron

III is used continuously there will be a

noticeable increase in the vibration

and noise from the automatic transmis-

sion.

Front differential gear oil (AT

vehicles)

Checking the oil level

1) Yellow handle

Check the differential oil level monthly.

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

stop the engine.

2. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean, and

insert it again.

1) Upper level

2) Lower level

3. Pull out the dipstick again and check

the oil level on it. If it is below the lower

level, add oil to bring the level up to the up-

per level.

B00371

Be careful not to spill front differen-

tial gear oil when adding it. If oil

touches the exhaust pipe, it may

cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a

fire. If oil gets on the exhaust pipe,

be sure to wipe it off.

B00372

11-22

Maintenance and service

Recommended grade and

viscosity

Each oil manufacturer has its own base

oils and additives. Never use different

brands together.

Oil grade:

API classification GL-5

SAE viscosity No. and applicable tem-

perature

Rear differential gear oil

Checking the gear oil level

Your vehicle may be equipped with a rear

differential protector. The differential pro-

tector provides protection to the rear dif-

ferential assembly during off-road use.

Removal of the rear differential protector

is not required when checking the oil level.

1) Filler plug

2) Drain plug

1) Filler hole

2) Drain hole

3) Oil level

Remove the plug from the filler hole and

check the oil level. The oil level should be

kept even with the bottom of the filler hole.

If the oil level is below the bottom edge of

the hole, add oil through the filler hole to

raise the level.

-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40

-20 0 6020

80W

75W/90

80 10040

85W

B00032

B00373

B00374

Maintenance and service

11-23

–

CONTINUED

–

Recommended grade and

viscosity

Each oil manufacturer has its own base

oils and additives. Never use different

brands together.

Oil grade:

API classification GL-5

SAE viscosity No. and applicable tem-

perature

Power steering fluid

Checking the fluid level

1) Reservoir tank

yBe careful not to spill rear differ-

ential gear oil when adding it. If

rear differential gear oil touches

the exhaust pipe, it may cause a

bad smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If

rear differential gear oil gets on

the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe

it off.

yIf the vehicle requires frequent re-

filling, there may be an oil leak. If

you suspect a problem, have the

vehicle checked at your SUBARU

dealer.

-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40

-20 0 6020

80W

75W/90

80 10040

85W

B00032

Be careful not to burn yourself be-

cause the fluid may be hot.

yWhen power steering fluid is be-

ing added, use only clean fluid,

and be careful not to allow any dirt

into the tank. And never use dif-

ferent brands together.

B00375

11-24

Maintenance and service

The power steering fluid expands greatly

as its temperature rises; the fluid level dif-

fers according to fluid temperature. There-

fore, the reservoir tank has two different

checking ranges for hot and cold fluids.

Check the power steering fluid level

monthly.

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, and

stop the engine.

1) Specified range

2. Check the fluid level of the reservoir

tank.

When the fluid is hot after the vehicle has

been run: Check that the oil level is be-

tween “HOT MIN” and “HOT MAX” on the

surface of the reservoir tank.

When the fluid is cool before the vehicle is

run: Check that the oil level is between

“COLD MIN” and “COLD MAX” on the sur-

face of the reservoir tank.

3. If the fluid level is lower than the appli-

cable “MIN” line, add the recommended

fluid as necessary to bring the level be-

tween the “MIN” and “MAX” line.

If the fluid level is extreme low, it may indi-

cate possible leakage. Consult your SUB-

ARU dealer for an inspection.

Recommended fluid

“Dexron III” Type Automatic Transmis-

sion Fluid

yAvoid spilling fluid when adding it

in the tank.

yBe careful not to spill power steer-

ing fluid when adding it. If power

steering fluid touches the exhaust

pipe, it may cause a bad smell,

smoke, and/or a fire. If power

steering fluid gets on the exhaust

pipe, be sure to wipe it off.

B00376

Maintenance and service

11-25

Brake fluid

Checking the fluid level

Check the fluid level monthly.

Check the fluid level on the outside of the

reservoir. If the level is below “MIN”, add

the recommended brake fluid to “MAX”.

Use only brake fluid from a sealed con-

tainer.

Recommended brake fluid

FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or DOT 4

brake fluid

yNever let brake fluid contact your

eyes because brake fluid can be

harmful to your eyes. If brake fluid

gets in your eyes, immediately

flush them thoroughly with clean

water. For safety, when perform-

ing this work, wearing eye protec-

tion is advisable.

yBrake fluid absorbs moisture from

the air. Any absorbed moisture

can cause a dangerous loss of

braking performance.

yIf the vehicle requires frequent re-

filling, there may be a leak. If you

suspect a problem, have the vehi-

cle checked at your SUBARU

dealer.

yNever use different brands of

brake fluid together. Also, avoid

mixing DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake flu-

ids even if they are of the same

brand.

yWhen adding brake fluid, be care-

ful not to allow any dirt into the

reservoir.

yNever splash the brake fluid over

painted surfaces or rubber parts.

Alcohol contained in the brake flu-

id may damage them.

yBe careful not to spill brake fluid

when adding it. If brake fluid

touches the exhaust pipe, it may

cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or

a fire. If brake fluid gets on the ex-

haust pipe, be sure to wipe it off.

B00125

11-26

Maintenance and service

Clutch fluid (MT vehicles)

Checking the fluid level

Check the fluid level on the outside of the

reservoir. If the level is below “MIN” level

mark, add the recommended clutch fluid

to “MAX” level mark.

Use only clutch fluid from a sealed con-

tainer.

Recommended clutch fluid

FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or DOT 4

brake fluid

Never let clutch fluid contact your

eyes because clutch fluid can be

harmful to your eyes. If clutch fluid

gets in your eyes, immediately flush

them thoroughly with clean water.

For safety, when performing this

work, wearing eye protection is ad-

visable.

yClutch fluid absorbs moisture

from the air. Any absorbed mois-

ture can cause improper clutch

operation.

yIf the vehicle requires frequent re-

filling, there may be a leak. If you

suspect a problem, have the vehi-

cle checked at your SUBARU

dealer.

yNever use different brands of

clutch fluid together.

yWhen clutch fluid is added, be

careful not to allow any dirt into

the tank.

yNever splash the clutch fluid over

painted surfaces or rubber parts.

Alcohol contained in the clutch

fluid may damage them.

yBe careful not to spill clutch fluid

when adding it. If clutch fluid

touches the exhaust pipe, it may

cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or

a fire. If clutch fluid gets on the ex-

haust pipe, be sure to wipe it off.

B00126

Avoid mixing DOT 3 and DOT 4

brake fluids even if they are of the

same brand.

Maintenance and service

11-27

Brake booster

If the brake booster does not operate as

described in the following, have it checked

by your SUBARU dealer.

1. With the engine off, depress the brake

pedal several times, applying the same

pedal force each time. The distance the

pedal travels should not vary.

2. With the brake pedal depressed, start

the engine. The pedal should move slight-

ly down to the floor.

3. With the brake pedal depressed, stop

the engine and keep the pedal depressed

for 30 seconds. The pedal height should

not change.

4. Start the engine again and run for ap-

proximately one minute then turn it off.

Depress the brake pedal several times to

check the brake booster. The brake boost-

er operates properly if the pedal stroke de-

creases with each depression.

Brake pedal

Check the brake pedal free play and re-

serve distance according to the mainte-

nance schedule in the “Warranty and

Maintenance Booklet”.

Checking the brake pedal free

play

1) 0.02 – 0.08 in (0.5 – 2.0 mm)

Stop the engine and firmly depress the

brake pedal several times. Lightly press

the brake pedal down with one finger to

check the free play with a force of less

than 2 lbs (10 N, 1 kg).

If the free play is not within proper specifi-

cation, contact your SUBARU dealer.

Checking the brake pedal re-

serve distance

1) More than 2.56 in (65 mm)

Depress the pedal with a force of approxi-

mately 66 lbs (294 N, 30 kg) and measure

the distance between the upper surface of

the pedal pad and the floor.

When the measurement is smaller than

the specification, or when the pedal does

not operate smoothly, contact with your

SUBARU dealer.

B00377

B00378

11-28

Maintenance and service

Clutch pedal (MT vehicles)

Check the clutch pedal free play and re-

serve distance according to the mainte-

nance schedule in the “Warranty and

Maintenance Booklet”.

Checking the clutch function

Check the clutch engagement and disen-

gagement.

1. With the engine idling, check that there

are no abnormal noises when the clutch

pedal is depressed, and that shifting into

1st or reverse feels smooth.

2. Start the vehicle by releasing the pedal

slowly to check that the engine and trans-

mission smoothly couple without any sign

of slippage.

Checking the clutch pedal

free play

1) 0.15 – 0.44 in (4 – 11 mm)

Lightly press the clutch pedal down with

your finger until you feel resistance, and

check the free play.

If the free play is not within proper specifi-

cation, contact your SUBARU dealer.

Hill holder (MT vehicles – if

equipped)

Ensure that the hill holder operates prop-

erly under the following circumstances:

1. Stop the vehicle on an uphill grade by

depressing the brake pedal and clutch

pedal, with the engine running.

2. Make sure that the vehicle does not

move backward even after the brake ped-

al is released.

3. Then make sure the vehicle starts

climbing the grade by following the normal

starting procedures.

If the hill holder does not operate as de-

scribed above, contact with your SUBARU

dealer.

B00377

Maintenance and service

11-29

Replacement of brake pad

and lining

The right front disc brake and the right rear

disc brake have audible wear indicators

on the brake pads. If the brake pads wear

close to their service limit, the wear indica-

tor makes a very audible scraping noise

when the brake pedal is applied.

If you hear this scraping noise each time

you apply the brake pedal, have the brake

pads serviced by your SUBARU dealer as

soon as possible.

Breaking-in of new brake

pads and linings

When replacing the brake pad or lining,

use only genuine SUBARU parts. After re-

placement, the new parts must be broken

in as follows:

TBrake pad and lining

While maintaining a speed of 30 to 40 mph

(50 to 65 km/h), step on the brake pedal

lightly. Repeat this five or more times.

TParking brake lining

1. Drive the vehicle at a speed of approx-

imately 22 mph (35 km/h).

2. With the parking brake release button

pushed in, pull the parking brake lever

SLOWLY and GENTLY. (Pulling with a

force of approximately 33 lbs [147 N, 15

kg].)

3. Drive the vehicle for approximately 220

yards (200 meters) in this condition.

4. Wait 5 to 10 minutes for the parking

brake to cool down. Repeat this proce-

dure.

5. Check the parking brake stroke. If the

parking brake stroke is out of the specified

range, adjust it by turning the adjusting nut

located on the parking brake lever.

Parking brake stroke:

7 – 8 notches / 44 lbs (196 N, 20 kg)

If you continue to drive despite the

scraping noise from the audible

brake pad wear indicator, it will re-

sult in the need for costly brake ro-

tor repair or replacement.

700040

A safe location and situation should

be selected for break-in driving.

Pulling the parking brake lever too

forcefully may cause the rear

wheels to lock. To avoid this, be cer-

tain to pull the lever up slowly and

gently.

11-30

Maintenance and service

Parking brake stroke

Check the parking brake stroke according

to the maintenance schedule in the “War-

ranty and Maintenance Booklet”. When

the parking brake is properly adjusted,

braking power is fully applied by pulling

the lever up seven to eight notches gently

but firmly (approximately 44 lbs, 196 N, 20

kg). If the parking brake lever stroke is not

within the specified range, have the brake

system checked and adjusted at your

SUBARU dealer.

Tires and wheels

Types of tires

You should be familiar with type of tires

present on your vehicle.

TAll season tires

The factory-installed tires on your new ve-

hicle are all season tires.

All season tires are designed to provide

an adequate measure of traction, handling

and braking performance in year-round

driving including snowy and icy road con-

ditions. However all season tires do not of-

fer as much traction performance as win-

ter (snow) tires in heavy or loose snow or

on icy roads.

All season tires are identified by “ALL

SEASON” and/or “M+S” (Mud & Snow) on

the tire sidewall.

TSummer tires

Summer tires are high-speed capability

tires best suited for highway driving under

dry conditions.

Summer tires are inadequate for driving

on slippery roads such as on snow-cov-

ered or icy roads.

If you drive your vehicle on snow-covered

or icy roads, we strongly recommend the

use of winter (snow) tires.

When installing winter tires, be sure to re-

place all four tires.

TWinter (snow) tires

Winter tires are best suited for driving on

snow-covered and icy roads. However

winter tires do not perform as well as sum-

mer tires and all season tires on roads oth-

er than snow-covered and icy roads.

Tire inspection

Check on a daily basis that the tires are

free from serious damage, nails, and

stones. At the same time, check the tires

for abnormal wear.

Contact your SUBARU dealer immediate-

ly if you find any problem.

NOTE

yWhen the wheels and tires strike

curbs or are subjected to harsh treat-

ment as when the vehicle is driven on a

rough surface, they can suffer damage

that cannot be seen with the naked eye.

This type of damage does not become

evident until time has passed. Try not

to drive over curbs, potholes or on oth-

er rough surfaces. If doing so is un-

avoidable, keep the vehicle’s speed

down to a walking pace or less, and ap-

proach the curbs as squarely as possi-

ble. Also, make sure the tires are not

pressed against the curb when you

B00379

Maintenance and service

11-31

–

CONTINUED

–

park the vehicle.

yIf you feel unusual vibration while

driving or find it difficult to steer the ve-

hicle in a straight line, one of the tires

and/or wheels may be damaged. Drive

slowly to the nearest authorized SUBA-

RU dealer and have the vehicle in-

spected.

Tire pressures and wear

Maintaining the correct tire pressures

helps to maximize the tires’ service lives

and is essential for good running perfor-

mance. Check and, if necessary, adjust

the pressure of each tire (including the

spare) at least once a month (for example,

during a fuel stop) and before any long

journey.

Check the tire pressures when the tires

are cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust

the tire pressures to the values shown on

the tire placard. The tire placard is located

on the door pillar on the driver’s side.

Driving even a short distance warms up

the tires and increases the tire pressures.

Also, the tire pressures are affected by the

outside temperature. It is best to check tire

pressure outdoors before driving the vehi-

cle.

When a tire becomes warm, the air inside

it expands, causing the tire pressure to in-

crease. Be careful not to mistakenly re-

lease air from a warm tire to reduce its

pressure.

yThe air pressure in a tire increases

by approximately 4.3 psi (30 kPa, 0.3

kgf/cm2) when the tire becomes warm.

yThe tires are considered cold when

the vehicle has been parked for at least

three hours or has been driven less

than one mile (1.6 km).

Incorrect tire pressures detract from con-

trollability and ride comfort, and they

cause the tires to wear abnormally.

yCorrect tire pressure (tread worn

evenly)

Roadholding is good, and steering is re-

sponsive. Rolling resistance is low, so fuel

consumption is also lower.

800221

Do not let air out of warm tires to ad-

just pressure. Doing so will result in

low tire pressure.

B00050

11-32

Maintenance and service

yAbnormally low tire pressure (tread

worn at shoulders)

Rolling resistance is high, so fuel con-

sumption is also higher.

yAbnormally high tire pressure (tread

worn in center)

Ride comfort is poor. Also, the tire magni-

fies the effects of road-surface bumps and

dips, possibly resulting in vehicle damage.

If the tire placard shows tire pressures for

the vehicle when fully loaded and for the

vehicle when towing a trailer, adjust the

tire pressures to the values that match

current loading conditions.

Wheel balance

Each wheel was correctly balanced when

your vehicle was new, but the wheels will

become unbalanced as the tires become

worn during use. Wheel imbalance caus-

es the steering wheel to vibrate slightly at

certain vehicle speeds and detracts from

the vehicle’s straight-line stability. It can

also cause steering and suspension sys-

tem problems and abnormal tire wear. If

you suspect that the wheels are not cor-

rectly balanced, have them checked and

adjusted by your SUBARU dealer. Also

have them adjusted after tire repairs and

after tire rotation.

Loss of correct wheel alignment* caus-

es the tires to wear on one side and re-

duces the vehicle’s running stability.

B00051 B00052

Driving at high speeds with exces-

sively low tire pressures can cause

the tires to deform severely and to

rapidly become hot. A sharp in-

crease in temperature could cause

tread separation, and destruction of

the tires. The resulting loss of vehi-

cle control could lead to an acci-

dent.

Maintenance and service

11-33

–

CONTINUED

–

Contact your SUBARU dealer if you no-

tice abnormal tire wear.

*: The suspension system is designed to hold

each wheel at a certain alignment (relative to

the other wheels and to the road) for optimum

straight-line stability and cornering perfor-

mance.

Wear indicators

1) New tread

2) Worn tread

3) Tread wear indicator

Each tire incorporates a tread wear indica-

tor, which becomes visible when the depth

of the tread grooves decreases to 0.063 in

(1.6 mm). A tire must be replaced when

the tread wear indicator appears as a solid

band across the tread.

NOTE

For safety, inspect tire tread regularly

and replace the tires before their tread

wear indicators become visible.

Tire rotation direction mark

Example of tire rotation direction mark

1) Front

If the tire has the rotation direction specifi-

cation, the tire rotation direction mark is

placed on its sidewall.

When you install a tire that has the tire ro-

tation direction mark, install the tire with

the direction mark facing forward.

123

B00327

When a tire’s tread wear indicator

becomes visible, the tire is worn be-

yond the acceptable limit and must

be replaced immediately. With a tire

in this condition, driving at high

speeds in wet weather can cause

the vehicle to hydroplane. The re-

sulting loss of vehicle control can

lead to an accident.

B00550

11-34

Maintenance and service

Tire rotation

Vehicles equipped with unidirectional tires

1) Front

Vehicles equipped with 4 non-unidirec-

tional tires

1) Front

Tire wear varies from wheel to wheel. To

maximize the life of each tire and ensure

that the tires wear uniformly, it is best to

rotate the tires every 7,500 miles (12,500

km). Move the tires to the positions shown

in the illustration each time they are rotat-

ed.

Replace any damaged or unevenly worn

tire at the time of rotation. After tire rota-

tion, adjust the tire pressures and make

sure the wheel nuts are correctly tight-

ened.

After driving approximately 600 miles

(1,000 km), check the wheel nuts again

and retighten any nut that has become

loose.

Tire replacement

The wheels and tires are important and in-

tegral parts of your vehicle’s design; they

cannot be changed arbitrarily. The tires fit-

ted as standard equipment are optimally

matched to the characteristics of the vehi-

cle and were selected to give the best pos-

sible combination of running performance,

ride comfort, and service life. It is essential

for every tire to have a size and construc-

tion matching those shown on the tire

placard and to have a speed symbol and

load index matching those shown on the

tire placard.

Using tires of a non-specified size detracts

from controllability, ride comfort, braking

performance, speedometer accuracy and

odometer accuracy. It also creates incor-

rect body-to-tire clearances and inappro-

priately changes the vehicle’s ground

clearance.

All four tires must be the same in terms of

manufacturer, brand (tread pattern), con-

struction, and size. You are advised to re-

place the tires with new ones that are

identical to those fitted as standard equip-

ment.

For safe vehicle operation, SUBARU rec-

ommends replacing all four tires at the

same time.

B00545

B00546

yAll four tires must be the same in

terms of manufacturer, brand

(tread pattern), construction, de-

gree of wear, speed symbol, load

index and size. Mixing tires of dif-

ferent types, sizes or degrees of

wear can result in damage to vehi-

cle’s power train. Use of different

types or sizes of tires can also

dangerously reduce controllabili-

ty and braking performance and

can lead to an accident.

Maintenance and service

11-35

–

CONTINUED

–

Wheel replacement

When replacing wheels due, for example,

to damage, make sure the replacement

wheels match the specifications of the

wheels that are fitted as standard equip-

ment. Replacement wheels are available

from SUBARU dealers.

Aluminum wheels

(if equipped)

Aluminum wheels can be scratched and

damaged easily. Handle them carefully to

maintain their appearance, performance,

and safety.

yWhen any of the wheels is removed and

replaced for tire rotation or to change a

flat, always check the tightness of the

wheel nuts after driving approximately 600

miles (1,000 km). If any nut is loose, tight-

en it to the specified torque.

yNever apply oil to the threaded parts,

wheel nuts, or tapered surface of the

wheel.

yNever let the wheel rub against sharp

protrusions or curbs.

yBe sure to fit tire chains on uniformly

and completely around the tire, otherwise

the chains may scratch the wheel.

yWhen wheel nuts, balance weights, or

the center cap is replaced, be sure to re-

place them with genuine SUBARU parts

designed for aluminum wheels.

Windshield washer fluid

If you spray washer fluid on the windshield

but the supply of washer fluid appears to

diminish, check the level of washer fluid in

the tank.

yUse only radial tires. Do not use

radial tires together with belted

bias tires and/or bias-ply tires. Do-

ing so can dangerously reduce

controllability, resulting in an ac-

cident.

Use only those wheels that are

specified for your vehicle. Wheels

not meeting specifications could in-

terfere with brake caliper operation

and may cause the tires to rub

against the wheel well housing dur-

ing turns. The resulting loss of vehi-

cle control could lead to an acci-

dent.

Never use engine coolant as washer

fluid because it could cause paint

damage.

300523

11-36

Maintenance and service

Washer fluid level gauge

Remove the washer tank filler cap, then

check the fluid level indicated by the level

gauge (attached to the inside of the cap).

If the level is near the “Low” mark, add flu-

id until it reaches the “Hi” level on the level

gauge or the “Full” mark on the tank.

Use windshield washer fluid. If windshield

washer fluid is unavailable use clean wa-

ter.

In areas where water freezes in winter,

use an anti-freeze type windshield washer

fluid. SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid

contains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5%

surfactant, by volume. Its freezing temper-

ature varies according to how much it is di-

luted, as indicated in the following table.

In order to prevent freezing of washer flu-

id, check the freezing temperatures in the

table above when adjusting the fluid con-

centration to the outside temperature.

If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with

a different concentration from the one

used previously, purge the old fluid from

the piping between the reservoir tank and

washer nozzles by operating the washer

for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if

the concentration of the fluid remaining in

the piping is too low for the outside tem-

perature, it may freeze and block the noz-

zles.

Low

300172

FULL

300524

Washer Fluid

Concentration

Freezing

Temperature

30% 10.4qF (–12qC)

50% –4qF (–20qC)

100% –49qF (–45qC)

Never use engine coolant as washer

fluid because it could cause paint

damage.

Adjust the washer fluid concentra-

tion appropriately for the outside

temperature. If the concentration is

inappropriate, sprayed washer fluid

may freeze on the windshield and

obstruct your view, and the fluid

may freeze in the reservoir tank.

Maintenance and service

11-37

–

CONTINUED

–

Replacement of wiper blades

Grease, wax, insects, or other material on

the windshield or the wiper blade results in

jerky wiper operation and streaking on the

glass. If you cannot remove the streaks af-

ter operating the windshield washer or if

the wiper operation is jerky, clean the out-

er surface of the windshield (or rear win-

dow) and the wiper blades using a sponge

or soft cloth with a neutral detergent or

mild-abrasive cleaner. After cleaning,

rinse the windshield and wiper blades with

clean water. The windshield is clean if

beads do not form when you rinse the

windshield with water.

If you cannot eliminate the streaking even

after following this method, replace the

wiper blades using the following proce-

dures:

Windshield wiper blades

1. Raise the wiper arm off the windshield.

1) Stopper

2. Remove the wiper blade assembly by

holding its pivot area and pushing it in the

direction shown by the arrow while de-

pressing the wiper blade stopper.

1) Metal support

3. Grasp the locked end of the blade rub-

ber assembly and pull it firmly until the

stoppers on the rubber are free of the met-

al support.

Do not clean the wiper blades with

gasoline or a solvent, such as paint

thinner or benzene. This will cause

deterioration of the wiper blades.

B00380

B00330

11-38

Maintenance and service

1) Metal spines

4. If the new blade rubber is not provided

with two metal spines, remove the metal

spines from the old blade rubber and in-

stall them in the new blade rubber.

5. Align the claws of the metal support

with the grooves in the rubber and slide

the blade rubber assembly into the metal

support until it locks.

1) Stopper

Be sure to position the claws at the end of

the metal support between the stoppers

on the rubber as shown. If the rubber is

not retained properly, the wiper blade may

scratch the windshield.

6. Install the wiper blade assembly to the

wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.

7. Lower the wiper arm.

Rear window wiper blade

1. Raise the wiper arm off the rear win-

dow.

2. Turn the wiper blade assembly coun-

terclockwise.

3. Having turned the wiper blade assem-

bly to the angle shown in the illustration,

pull it in the direction of the arrow to re-

move it from the wiper arm.

B00331

B00059

B00332

B00061

B00062

Maintenance and service

11-39

–

CONTINUED

–

1) Plastic support

4. Pull out the end of the blade rubber as-

sembly to unlock it from the plastic sup-

port.

5. Pull the blade rubber assembly out of

the plastic support.

1) Metal spines

6. If the new blade rubber is not provided

with two metal spines, remove the metal

spines from the old blade rubber and in-

stall them in the new blade rubber.

7. Align the claws of the plastic support

with the grooves in the blade rubber as-

sembly, then slide the blade rubber as-

sembly into place.

Securely lock the end of the plastic sup-

port as shown in the illustration. If the rub-

B00381

B00064

B00333

B00066

B00067

11-40

Maintenance and service

ber is not retained properly, the wiper may

scratch the rear window glass.

8. Install the wiper blade assembly to the

wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.

9. Lower the wiper arm.

Battery

yBefore beginning work on or near

any battery, be sure to extinguish

all cigarettes, matches, and light-

ers. Never expose a battery to an

open flame or electric sparks. Bat-

teries give off a gas which is high-

ly flammable and explosive.

yFor safety, in case an explosion

does occur, wear eye protection

or shield your eyes when working

near any battery. Never lean over

a battery.

yDo not let battery fluid contact

eyes, skin, fabrics, or paint be-

cause battery fluid is a corrosive

acid. If battery fluid gets on your

skin or in your eyes, immediately

flush the area with water thor-

oughly. Seek medical help imme-

diately if acid has entered the

eyes.

If battery fluid is accidentally

swallowed, immediately drink a

large amount of milk or water, and

seek medical attention immediate-

ly.

yTo lessen the risk of sparks, re-

move rings, metal watchbands,

and other metal jewelry. Never al-

low metal tools to contact the pos-

itive battery terminal and anything

connected to it WHILE you are at

the same time in contact with any

other metallic portion of the vehi-

cle because a short circuit will re-

sult.

yKeep everyone including children

away from the battery.

yCharge the battery in a well-venti-

lated area.

yBattery posts, terminals and relat-

ed accessories contain lead and

lead compounds, chemicals

known to the State of California to

cause cancer and reproductive

harm. Batteries also contain other

chemicals known to the State of

California to cause cancer. Wash

hands after handling.

Never use more than 10 amperes

when charging the battery because

it will shorten battery life.

Maintenance and service

11-41

–

CONTINUED

–

1) Cap

2) Upper level

3) Lower level

It is unnecessary to periodically check the

battery fluid level or periodically refill with

distilled water.

However, if the battery fluid level is below

the lower level, remove the cap. Fill to the

upper level with distilled water.

Fuses

The fuses are designed to melt during an

overload to prevent damage to the wiring

harness and electrical equipment. The

fuses are located in two fuse boxes.

One is located under the instrument panel

behind the cover on the driver’s seat side.

To remove the cover, pull it out.

The other one is housed in the engine

compartment.

1) Fuse puller

2) Spare fuse

The fuse puller and spare fuses are stored

UPPER LEVEL

LOWER LEVEL

3B00382

Never replace a fuse with one hav-

ing a higher rating or with material

other than a fuse because serious

damage or a fire could result.

B00069

600444

2B00383

11-42

Maintenance and service

in the main fuse box cover in the engine

compartment.

1) Good

2) Blown

If any lights, accessories or other electri-

cal controls do not operate, inspect the

corresponding fuse. If a fuse has blown,

replace it.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”

position and turn off all electrical accesso-

ries.

2. Remove the cover.

3. Determine which fuse may be blown.

The back side of each fuse box cover and

the “Fuses and circuits” section in chapter

12 in this manual show the circuit for each

fuse.

4. Pull out the fuse with the fuse puller.

5. Inspect the fuse. If it has blown, re-

place it with a spare fuse of the same rat-

ing.

6. If the same fuse blows again, this indi-

cates that its system has a problem. Con-

tact your SUBARU dealer for repairs.

Main fuse

Main fuse box

The main fuses are designed to melt dur-

ing an overload to prevent damage to the

wiring harness and electrical equipment.

Check the main fuses if any electrical

component fails to operate (except the

starter motor) and other fuses are good. A

melted main fuse must be replaced. Use

only replacements with the same speci-

fied rating as the melted main fuse. If a

main fuse blows after it is replaced, have

the electrical system checked by your

nearest SUBARU dealer.

B00338

600160

600444

Maintenance and service

11-43

Installation of accessories

Always consult your SUBARU dealer be-

fore installing fog lights or any other elec-

trical equipment in your vehicle. Such ac-

cessories may cause the electronic sys-

tem to malfunction if they are incorrectly

installed or if they are not suited for the ve-

hicle.

11-44

Maintenance and service

Replacing bulbs

321

15 14

786

910

B00384

Maintenance and service

11-45

–

CONTINUED

–

Wattage Bulb No.

1) High beam headlight 12V-60W 9005 (HB3)

2) Low beam headlight

Canada-spec. 2.5XT 12V-35W D2R

All except Canada-spec.

2.5XT

12V-55W H1

3) Front turn signal light 12V-21W (Amber) 1474

4) Map light 12V-8W –

5) Dome light 12V-8W –

6) Side marker light (Front) 12V-5W 168

7) Front fog light 12V-51W 9006 (HB4)

8) Parking light 12V-5W 168

9) High mount stop light 12V-13W 912

10) Cargo area light 12V-5W –

11) Tail/stop light 12V-21/5W 7443

12) Backup light 12V-16W 921

13) Rear turn signal light 12V-21W (Amber) 1474

14) Tail/stop light 12V-21/5W 7443

15) License plate light 12V-5W 168

Headlights (Canada-spec.

2.5XT)

Replace any bulb only with a new

bulb of the specified wattage. Using

a bulb of different wattage could re-

sult in a fire.

High-intensity-discharge (HID) bulbs

are used for the low beams of the

headlights on the Canada-spec.

2.5XT. These HID bulbs use an ex-

tremely high voltage. To avoid the

risk of an electric shock and result-

ing serious injury, you should not at-

tempt to replace them. Neither

should you attempt to replace the

high-beam bulbs, remove/refit the

headlight assemblies, or remove any

headlight-assembly components.

For replacement of the headlight

bulbs (low-beam and high-beam), re-

moval and installation of the head-

light assemblies, and removal of

headlight-assembly components,

contact your SUBARU dealer.

11-46

Maintenance and service

Headlights (Except Canada-

spec. 2.5XT)

yIf headlight aiming is required, con-

sult your SUBARU dealer for proper

adjustment of the headlight aim.

yIt may be difficult to replace the

bulbs. Have your SUBARU dealer re-

place the bulbs if necessary.

Before replacing the left-hand (battery-

side) low- or high-beam light bulb, remove

the screw that retains the windshield

washer nozzle and tip the windshield

washer nozzle sideways.

TLow beam light bulbs

1. Remove the bulb cover, by turning it

counterclockwise.

2. Remove the retainer spring, then pull

out the bulb and electrical connector unit.

Halogen headlight bulbs become

very hot while in use. If you touch

the bulb surface with bare hands or

greasy gloves, finger prints or

grease on the bulb surface will de-

velop into hot spots and cause the

bulb to break. If there are finger

prints or grease on the bulb surface,

wipe them away with a soft cloth

moistened with alcohol.

B00393

B00385

B00386

Maintenance and service

11-47

–

CONTINUED

–

3. Disconnect the electrical connector

from the bulb.

4. Install a new bulb into the electrical

connector, then set the retainer spring se-

curely.

5. Install the bulb cover.

THigh beam light bulbs

1. Disconnect the electrical connector

from the bulb.

2. Remove the bulb from the headlight

assembly by turning it counterclockwise.

3. Replace the bulb with new one.

4. Reconnect the electrical connector. At

this time, use care not to touch the bulb

surface.

5. To install the bulb to the headlight as-

sembly, turn it clockwise until it clicks.

Rear combination lights

1. Remove the upper and lower screws.

Then, slide the rear combination lamp as-

sembly to the rear and remove it from the

vehicle.

B00387

700093

B00388

B00389

11-48

Maintenance and service

1) Tail/stop light

2) Backup light

3) Rear turn signal light

4) Tail/stop light

2. Remove the bulb holder from the rear

combination light assembly by turning it

counterclockwise.

3. Pull the bulb from the holder. Install a

new bulb.

4. Set the bulb holder into the rear combi-

nation light assembly and turn it clockwise

until it locks.

5. Reinstall the rear combination light as-

sembly.

License plate light

1. Remove the mounting screws using a

Phillips screwdriver.

2. Remove the cover and lens.

3. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Install a

new bulb.

4. Reinstall the lens and cover.

5. Tighten the mounting screws.

Dome light and map light

Dome light

Map light

1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of

4B00390

B00391 B00090

B00091

Maintenance and service

11-49

the lens with a flat-head screwdriver.

2. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Install a

new bulb.

3. Reinstall the lens.

High mount stop light

1. Remove the mounting screws using a

Phillips screwdriver and then remove the

high mount stop light cover.

2. Pull the bulb from the socket. Install a

new bulb.

3. Reinstall the cover.

4. Tighten the mounting screws then rein-

stall the covers.

NOTE

Other bulbs may be difficult to replace.

Have your SUBARU dealer replace

these bulbs if necessary.

B00547

Specifications

Specifications ..................................................... 12-2

Dimensions ............................................................. 12-2

Engine ...................................................................... 12-3

Electrical system .................................................... 12-3

Capacities ................................................................ 12-4

Tires ......................................................................... 12-5

Wheel alignment ..................................................... 12-5

Fuses and circuits .............................................. 12-6

Fuse panel located behind the instrument

panel ........................................................................ 12-6

Fuse panel located in the engine

compartment ........................................................... 12-8

Bulb chart ............................................................ 12-9

Vehicle identification ......................................... 12-10

12-2

Specifications

These specifications are subject to change without notice.

Dimensions

in (mm)

*1: Measured with vehicle empty

AT: Automatic transmission

MT: Manual transmission

Item 2.5-liter non-turbo models 2.5-liter turbo models

Drive system AWD

Transmission type AT MT AT MT

Overall length 176.6 (4,485)

Overall width 68.3 (1,735)

Overall height 62.6 (1,590) 62.4 (1,585)

Wheel base 99.4 (2,525)

Tread Front 58.9 (1,495)

Rear 58.5 (1,485)

Ground clearance*18.07 (205) 7.87 (200)

Specifications

12-3

–

CONTINUED

–

Engine

Electrical system

Engine model EJ253 (2.5-liter, SOHC, non-turbo) EJ255 (2.5-liter, DOHC, turbo)

Engine type Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 4 cylinder, 4-stroke gasoline engine

Displacement cc (cu-in) 2,457 (150)

Bore u Stroke in (mm) 3.92 u 3.11 (99.5 u 79.0)

Compression ratio 10.0 : 1 8.4 : 1

Firing order 1 – 3 – 2 – 4

Battery type and capacity (5HR) Manual transmission 12V-48AH (55D23L)

Automatic transmission 12V-52AH (75D23L)

Alternator 2.5-liter turbo models 12V-110A

2.5-liter non-turbo models 12V-90A

Spark plugs 2.5-liter non-turbo models FR5AP-11 (NGK)

2.5-liter turbo models ILFR6B (NGK)

12-4

Specifications

Capacities

AT: Automatic transmission

MT: Manual transmission

Fuel tank 15.9 US gal (60 liters, 13.2 Imp gal)

Engine oil 4.2 US qt (4.0 liters, 3.5 Imp qt)

Transmission oil MT 3.7 US qt (3.5 liters, 3.1 Imp qt)

AT 9.8 US qt (9.3 liters, 8.2 Imp qt)

Front differential gear oil (AT) 1.3 US qt (1.2 liter, 1.1 Imp qt)

Rear differential gear oil 0.8 US qt (0.8 liter, 0.7 Imp qt)

Power steering fluid 0.7 US qt (0.7 liter, 0.6 Imp qt)

Engine coolant 2.5-liter non-turbo models MT 7.3 US qt (6.9 liters, 6.1 Imp qt)

AT 7.2 US qt (6.8 liters, 6.0 Imp qt)

2.5-liter turbo models MT 7.8 US qt (7.4 liters, 6.5 Imp qt)

AT 7.7 US qt (7.3 liters, 6.4 Imp qt)

Specifications

12-5

Tires

NOTE

For the Canada specification non-turbo models, there is a conventional tire installed under the floor of the cargo area.

Wheel alignment

Tire size P215/60R16 94H P215/55R17 93H

Wheel size 16 u 61/2 JJ or 16 u 61/2 J 17 u 7 JJ

Pressure Front Light load 29 psi (200 kPa, 2.0 kgf/cm2)32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2)

Full load 29 psi (200 kPa, 2.0 kgf/cm2)32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2)

Rear Light load 28 psi (190 kPa, 1.9 kgf/cm2)30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2)

Full load 36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm2)32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2)

Trailer towing 41 psi (280 kPa, 2.8 kgf/cm2)36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm2)

Temporary spare tire Size T135/80D16

Pressure 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)

Item 2.5-liter non-turbo models 2.5-liter turbo models

Drive system AWD

Toe Front 0r 0.12 in (0 r 3 mm)

Rear 0.079 r 0.12 in (2 r 3 mm)

Camber Front –0q25’ r 45’

Rear –0q50’ r 45’ –0q55’ r 45’

12-6

Specifications

Fuses and circuits

Fuse panel located behind the instrument pan-

123456

789101112

1413 15 16 17 18 19

20 21 22 23

C00000

Fuse panel Fuse rating Circuit

115A yHeater fan

215A yHeater fan

315A yPower door lock

yRemote keyless entry

415A yPower outlet (front)

yRemote controlled rear view mirrors

510A yTail light

yParking light

615A ySRS airbag

715A yFog light

830A yABS

915A yRadio

10 10A —

11 15A yEngine ignition system

ySRS airbag

yAT control system

12 10A yIllumination brightness control

13 20A yWiper deicer

yOutside mirror defogger

14 10A yMeter

Specifications

12-7

–

CONTINUED

–

15 30A yWindshield wiper and washer

16 20A yBrake light

17 15A yAir conditioner

18 15A yBackup light

yCruise control

19 15A yPower outlet (cargo)

20 15A yRear window wiper and washer

21 15A yIgnition coil (Non-turbo model only)

22 15A ySeat heater

23 Empty

Fuse panel Fuse rating Circuit

12-8

Specifications

Fuse panel located in the engine compartment

A) FWD socket

B) Main fuse

789

10 11 12 13

C00105

Fuse panel Fuse rating Circuit

130A yRadiator cooling fan (Main)

230A yRadiator cooling fan (Sub)

330A yABS motor

430A yEngine sensor (Non-turbo models

only)

520A yRear window defogger

615A yHazard warning flasher

yHorn

715A yTurn signal lights

810A yAutomatic transmission control unit

910A yAlternator

10 15A yHeadlight (right side)

11 15A yHeadlight (left side)

12 20A yLighting switch

13 15A yClock

yInterior light

14 10A ySecondary air combination valve

(Turbo models only)

Specifications

12-9

Bulb chart

Description Wattage Bulb type

Headlight

High beam 12V-60W 9005 (HB3)

Low beam

Canada-spec. 2.5XT 12V-35W D2R

All except Canada-

spec. 2.5XT

12V-55W H1

Front fog light 12V-51W 9006 (HB4)

Front turn signal light 12V-21W 1474

Parking light 12V-5W 168

Side marker light (Front) 12V-5W 168

Rear combination light

Tail/stop light 12V-21/5W 7443

Turn signal light 12V-21W (Amber) 1474

Tail/stop light 12V-21/5W 7443

Backup light 12V-16W 921

High mount stop light 12V-13W 912

License plate light 12V-5W 168

Cargo area light 12V-15W –

Dome light 12V-8W –

Map light 12V-8W –

12-10

Specifications

Vehicle identification

234

C00112

1) Vehicle identification number

2) Emission control label

3) Vehicle identification number plate

4) Tire inflation pressure plate

5) Certification plate

6) Bar cord label (U.S. only)

7) Model number plate

8) Radio noise label (Canada only)

9) Fuel label

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

Tire information .................................................. 13-2

Tire labeling ............................................................. 13-2

Recommended tire inflation pressure .................. 13-5

Glossary of tire terminology .................................. 13-6

Tire care – maintenance and safety practices ..... 13-7

Vehicle load limit – how to determine ................... 13-8

Determining compatibility of tire and vehicle

load capacities ...................................................... 13-10

Adverse safety consequences of overloading

on handling and stopping and on tires .............. 13-11

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit ........... 13-11

Uniform tire quality grading standards ............ 13-12

Treadwear ................................................................ 13-12

Traction AA, A, B, C ................................................ 13-12

Temperature A, B, C ............................................... 13-12

Reporting safety defects (USA) ......................... 13-13

13-2

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

For U.S.A.

The following information has been com-

piled according to Code of Federal Regu-

lations “Title 49, Part 575”.

Tire information

Tire labeling

Many markings (e.g. Tire size, Tire

Identification Number or TIN) are

placed on the sidewall of a tire by tire

manufacturers. These marking can

provide you with useful information on

the tire.

TTire size

Your vehicle comes equipped with P-

Metric tire size. It is important to un-

derstand the sizing system in select-

ing the proper tire for your vehicles.

Here is a brief review of the tire sizing

system with a breakdown of its indi-

vidual elements.

VP Metric

With the P-Metric system, Section

Width is measured in millimeters. To

convert millimeters into inches, divide

by 25.4. The Aspect Ratio (Section

Height divided by Section Width)

helps provide more dimensional infor-

mation about the tire size.

Example:

(1) P = Certain tire type used on light

duty vehicles such as passenger cars

(2) Section Width in millimeters

(3) Aspect Ratio (= section height y

section width).

(4) R = Radial Construction

(5) Rim diameter in inches

VLoad and Speed Rating Descrip-

tions

The load and speed rating descrip-

tions will appear following the size

designation.

They provide two important facts

about the tire. First, the number des-

ignation is its load index. Second, the

letter designation indicates the tire’s

speed rating.

Example:

(6) Load Index: A numerical code

P 215 / 60 R 16

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

P 215 / 60 R 16 94 H

Size designation (6) (7)

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

13-3

–

CONTINUED

–

which specifies the maximum load a

tire can carry at the speed indicated

by its speed symbol, at maximum in-

flation pressure.

For example, “94” means 1,477 lbs

(670 kg).

(7) Speed Rating: An alphabetical

system describing a tire’s capability to

travel at established and predeter-

mined speeds.

For example, “H” means 130 mph

(210 km/h)

TTire Identification Number (TIN)

Tire Identification Number (TIN) is

marked on the intended outboard

sidewall. The TIN is composed of four

groups. Here is a brief review of the

TIN with a breakdown of its individual

elements.

(1) Manufacturer’s Identification

Mark

(2) Tire Size

(3) Tire Type Code

(4) Date of Manufacture

The first two figures identify the week,

starting with “01” to represent the first

full week of the calendar year; the

second two figures represent the

year. For example, 0101 means the

1st week of 2001.

TOther markings

The following makings are also

placed on the sidewall.

VMaximum permissible inflation

pressure

The maximum cold inflation pressure

to which this tire may be inflated. For

example, “300 kpa (44 PSI) MAX.

PRESS”

VMaximum load rating

The load rating at the maximum per-

missible weight load for this tire. For

example, “MAX. LOAD 670 kg (1477

LBS) @ 300 kpa (44 PSI) MAX.

PRESS.”

Load indices apply only to the

tire, not to the vehicle. Putting a

load rated tire on any vehicle

does not mean the vehicle can

be loaded up to the tire’s rated

load.

ySpeed ratings apply only to

the tire, not to the vehicle. Put-

ting a speed rated tire on any

vehicle does not mean the ve-

hicle can be operated at the

tire’s rated speed.

yThe speed rating is void if the

tires are worn out, damaged,

repaired, retreaded, or other-

wise altered from their original

condition. If tires are repaired,

retreaded, or otherwise al-

tered, they may not be suitable

for original equipment tire de-

signed loads and speeds.

DOT XX XX XXX XXXX

(1) (2) (3) (4)

13-4

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

VConstruction type

Applicable construction of this tire.

For example, “TUBELESS STEEL

BELTED RADIAL”

VConstruction

The generic name of each cord mate-

rial used in the plies (both sidewall

and tread area) of this tire.

For example, “PLIES: SIDEWALL

POLYESTER 1 TREAD POLYES-

TER 1 + STEEL 2 + NYLON 1”

VUniform Tire Quality Grading

(UTQG)

For details, refer to “Uniform tire qual-

ity grading standards” in this chapter.

Maximum load rating applies

only to the tire, not to the vehi-

cle. Putting a load rated tire on

any vehicle does not mean the

vehicle can be loaded up to the

tire’s rated load.

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

13-5

–

CONTINUED

–

Recommended tire inflation pressure

TRecommended cold tire inflation pressure

Recommended cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle’s tires is as follows,

Tire size P215/60R16 94H P215/55R17 93H

Wheel size 16 u 61/2 JJ or 16 u 61/2 J 17 u 7 JJ

Pressure Front Light load 29 psi (200 kPa, 2.0 kgf/cm2)32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2)

Full load 29 psi (200 kPa, 2.0 kgf/cm2)32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2)

Rear Light load 28 psi (190 kPa, 1.9 kgf/cm2)30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2)

Full load 36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm2)32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2)

Trailer towing 41 psi (280 kPa, 2.8 kgf/cm2)36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm2)

Temporary spare tire Size T135/80D16

Pressure 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)

13-6

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

TVehicle placard

The vehicle placard is affixed to the

driver’s side door pillar.

Example:

The vehicle placard shows original

tire size, recommended cold tire infla-

tion pressure on each tire at maxi-

mum loaded vehicle weight, seating

capacity and loading information.

TAdverse safety consequences

of under-inflation

Driving at high speeds with exces-

sively low tire pressures can cause

the tires to flex severely and to rapidly

become hot. A sharp increase in tem-

perature could cause tread separa-

tion, and failure of the tire(s). Possible

resulting loss of vehicle control could

lead to an accident.

TMeasuring and adjusting air

pressure to achieve proper infla-

tion

Check and, if necessary, adjust the

pressure of each tire (including the

spare) at least once a month and be-

fore any long journey. Check the tire

pressures when the tires are cold.

Use a pressure gauge to adjust the

tire pressures to the specific values.

Driving even a short distance warms

up the tires and increases the tire

pressures. Also, the tire pressures

are affected by the outside tempera-

ture. It is best to check tire pressure

outdoors before driving the vehicle.

When a tire becomes warm, the air in-

side it expands, causing the tire pres-

sure to increase. Be careful not to

mistakenly release air from a warm

tire to reduce its pressure.

Glossary of tire terminology

yCold tire pressure

The pressure in a tire that has been

driven less than 1 mile or has been

standing for three hours or more.

yMaximum inflation pressure

The maximum cold inflation pressure

to which a tire may be inflated.

yRecommended inflation pres-

sure

The cold inflation pressure recom-

mended by a vehicle manufacturer.

yIntended outboard sidewall

1)The sidewall that contains a

whitewall, bears white lettering or

bears manufacturer, brand, and/or

model name molding that is higher

or deeper than the same molding

on the other sidewall of the tire, or

2)The outward facing sidewall of an

800221

D00115

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

13-7

–

CONTINUED

–

asymmetrical tire that has a particu-

lar side that must always face out-

ward when mounting on a vehicle.

yAccessory weight

The combined weight (in excess of

those standard items which may be

replaced) of floor mats, leather seats

and cross bars to the extent that these

items are available as factory-in-

stalled equipment (whether installed

or not).

yCurb weight

The weight of a motor vehicle with

standard equipment including the

maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and

coolant and air conditioning.

yMaximum loaded vehicle weight

The sum of curb weight, accessory

weight, vehicle capacity weight and

production options weight.

yNormal occupant weight

150 lbs (68 kg) times the number of

occupants (3 occupants).

yOccupant distribution

Distribution of occupants in a vehicle,

2 in front, 1 in rear seat.

yProduction options weight

The combined weight of those in-

stalled regular production options

weighing over 5.1 lbs (2.3 kg) in ex-

cess of those standards items which

they replace, not previously consid-

ered in curb weight or accessory

weight.

yVehicle capacity weight

The total weight of cargo, luggage

and occupants that can be added to

the vehicle.

yVehicle maximum load on a tire

Load on an individual tire that is deter-

mined by distributing to each axle its

share of the maximum loaded vehicle

weight and dividing by two.

yVehicle normal load on a tire

Load on an individual tire that is deter-

mined by distributing to each axle its

share of the curb weight, accessory

weight, and normal occupant weight

and dividing by two.

Tire care – maintenance and

safety practices

yCheck on a daily basis that the tires

are free from serious damage, nails,

and stones. At the same time, check

the tires for abnormal wear.

y Inspect the tire tread regularly and

replace the tires before their tread

wear indicators become visible. When

a tire’s tread wear indicator becomes

visible, the tire is worn beyond the ac-

ceptable limit and must be replaced

immediately. With a tire in this condi-

tion, driving at even low speeds in wet

weather can cause the vehicle to hy-

droplane. Possible resulting loss of

vehicle control can lead to an acci-

dent.

yTo maximize the life of each tire and

ensure that the tires wear uniformly, it

is best to rotate the tires every 7,500

miles (12,500 km). Rotating the tires

involves switching the front and rear

tires on the right-hand side of the ve-

hicle and similarly switching the front

and rear tires on the left-hand side of

the vehicle. (Each tire must be kept on

its original side of the vehicle.) Re-

place any damaged or unevenly worn

tire at the time of rotation. After tire ro-

tation, adjust the tire pressures and

make sure the wheel nuts are correct-

ly tightened. A tightening torque spec-

ification and a tightening sequence

specification for the wheel nuts can be

found “Flat tires” in Chapter 9.

13-8

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

Vehicle load limit – how to de-

termine

The load capacity of your vehicle is

determined by weight, not by avail-

able cargo space. The load limit of

your vehicle is shown on the vehicle

placard attached to the driver’s side

B-pillar. Locate the statement “The

combined weight of occupants and

cargo should never exceed XXX kg or

XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.

The vehicle placard also shows seat-

ing capacity of your vehicle.

The total load capacity includes the

total weight of driver and all passen-

gers and their belongings, any cargo,

any optional equipment such as a

trailer hitch, roof rack or bike carrier,

etc., and the tongue load of a trailer.

Therefore cargo capacity can be cal-

culated by the following method.

Cargo capacity = Load limit – (total

weight of occupants + total weight of

optional equipment + tongue load of a

trailer (if applicable))

For towing capacity information and

weight limits, refer to “Trailer towing”

in Chapter 8.

TCalculating total and load capac-

ities varying seating configura-

tions

Calculate the available load capacity

as shown in the following examples:

Example 1A

Vehicle capacity weight of the vehicle

is 900 lbs (408 kg), which is indicated

on the vehicle placard with the state-

ment “The combined weight of occu-

pants and cargo should never exceed

900 lbs or 408 kg”.

For example, if the vehicle has one

occupant weighing 154 lbs (70 kg)

plus cargo weighing 662 lbs (300 kg).

1. Calculate the total weight.

2. Calculate the available load capac-

ity by subtracting the total weight from

the vehicle capacity weight of 900 lbs

(408 kg).

3. The result of step 2 shows that a

further 84 lbs (38 kg) of cargo can be

carried.

D00106

Total weight

= 154 lbs (70 kg) + 662 lbs (300 kg)

=816 lbs (370 kg)

(Occupant) (Cargo)

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

13-9

–

CONTINUED

–

Example 1B

For example, if a person weighing 176

lbs (80 kg) now enters the same vehi-

cle (bringing the number of occupants

to two), the calculations are as fol-

lows:

1. Calculate the total weight.

2. Calculate the available load capac-

ity.

3. The total weight now exceeds the

capacity weight by 92 lbs (42 kg), so

the cargo weight must be reduced by

92 lbs (42 kg) or more.

Example 2A

Vehicle capacity weight of the vehicle

is 900 lbs (408 kg), which is indicated

on the vehicle placard with the state-

ment “The combined weight of occu-

pants and cargo should never exceed

408 kg or 900 lbs”.

For example, the vehicle has one oc-

cupant weighing 165 lbs (75 kg) plus

cargo weighing 375 lbs (170 kg). In

addition, the vehicle is fitted with a

trailer hitch weighing 22 lbs (10 kg), to

which is attached a trailer weighing

1,764 lbs (800 kg). 10% of the trailer

weight is applied to the trailer tongue

(i.e. Tongue load = 176 lbs (80 kg)).

1. Calculate the total weight.

2. Calculate the available load capac-

ity.

D00107

Total weight

= 154 lbs (70 kg) + 176 lbs (80 kg)

+ 662 lbs (300 kg)

=992 lbs (450 kg)

(Occupant)

(Cargo) D00108

Total weight

= 165 lbs (75 kg) + 375 lbs (170 kg)

+ 22 lbs (10 kg) + 176 lbs (80 kg)

=738 lbs (335 kg)

(Occupant) (Cargo)

(Trailer hitch) (Tongue load)

13-10

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

3. The result of step 2 shows that a

further 162 lbs (73 kg) of cargo can be

carried.

Example 2B

For example, if a person weighing 143

lbs (65 kg) and a child weighing 40 lbs

(18 kg) now enter the same vehicle

(bringing the number of occupants to

three), and a child restraint system

weighing 11 lbs (5 kg) is installed in

the vehicle for the child to use, the cal-

culations are as follows:

1. Calculate the total weight.

2. Calculate the available load capac-

ity.

3. The total weight now exceeds the

capacity weight by 32 lbs (15 kg), so

the cargo weight must be reduced by

32 lbs (15 kg) or more.

Determining compatibility of

tire and vehicle load capaci-

ties

The sum of four tires’ maximum load

ratings must exceed the maximum

loaded vehicle weight (“GVWR”). In

addition, sum of the maximum load

ratings of two front tires and of two

rear tires must exceed each axle’s

maximum loaded capacity (“GAWR”).

Original equipment tires are designed

to fulfill those conditions.

The maximum loaded vehicle weight

is referred to Gross Vehicle Weight

Rating (GVWR). And each axle’s

maximum loaded capacity is referred

to Gross Axle Weight Rating

(GAWR). The GVWR and each axle’s

GAWR are shown on the vehicle cer-

tification label affixed to the driver’s

door.

The GVWR and front and rear

GAWRs are determined by not only

the maximum load rating of tires but

also loaded capacities of the vehicle’s

D00109

Total weight

= 165 lbs (75 kg) + 143 lbs (65 kg)

+ 40 lbs (18 kg)

+ 11 lbs (5 kg) + 375 lbs (170 kg)

+ 22 lbs (10 kg) + 176 lbs (80 kg)

=932 lbs (423 kg)

(Occupant)

(Cargo)

(Trailer hitch)

(Child restraint)

(Tongue load)

(Occupant)

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

13-11

suspension, axles and other parts of

the body.

Therefore, this means that the vehicle

cannot necessarily be loaded up to

the tire’s maximum load rating on the

tire sidewall.

Adverse safety consequenc-

es of overloading on handling

and stopping and on tires

Overloading could affect vehicle han-

dling, stopping distance, vehicle and

tire as shown in the following. This

could lead to an accident and possibly

result in severe personal injury.

yVehicle stability will deteriorate.

yHeavy and/or high-mounted loads

could increase the risk of rollover.

yStopping distance will increase.

yBrakes could overheat and fail.

ySuspension, bearings, axles and

other parts of the body could break or

experience accelerated wear that will

shorten vehicle life.

yTires could fail.

yTread separation could occur.

yTire could separate from its rim.

Steps for Determining Cor-

rect Load Limit

1. Locate the statement “The com-

bined weight of occupants and cargo

should never exceed XXX pounds” on

your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of

the driver and passengers that will be

riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of

the driver and passengers from XXX

kilograms or XXX pounds.

4. The resulting figure equals the

available amount of cargo and lug-

gage load capacity. For example, if

the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs

(635kg). and there will be five- 150 lbs

(68 kg) passengers in your vehicle,

the amount of available cargo and

luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.

(1,400 – 750 (5 u 150) = 650 lbs)

5. Determine the combined weight of

luggage and cargo being loaded on

the vehicle. That weight may not safe-

ly exceed the available cargo and lug-

gage load capacity calculated in Step

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trail-

er, load from your trailer will be trans-

ferred to your vehicle. Consult this

manual to determine how this reduc-

es the available cargo and luggage

load capacity of your vehicle.

13-12

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

Uniform tire quality grading

standards

This information indicates the relative

performance of passenger car tires in

the area of treadwear, traction, and

temperature resistance. This is to aid

the consumer in making an informed

choice in the purchase of tires.

Quality grades can be found where

applicable on the tire sidewall be-

tween tread shoulder and maximum

section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Tem-

perature A

The quality grades apply to new pneu-

matic tires for use on passenger cars.

However, they do not apply to deep

tread, winter type snow tires, space-

saver or temporary use spare tires,

tires with nominal rim diameters of 12

inches or less, or to some limited pro-

duction tires.

All passenger car tires must confirm

to Federal Safety Requirements in

addition to these grades.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative

rating based on the wear rate of the

tire when tested under controlled con-

ditions on a specified government test

course.

For example, a tire graded 150 would

wear one and one-half (1-1/2) times

as well on the government course as

a tire graded 100. The relative perfor-

mance of tires depends upon the ac-

tual conditions of their use, however,

and may depart significantly from the

norm due to variations in driving hab-

its, service practices and differences

in road characteristics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, from highest to

lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those

grades represent the tire’s ability to

stop on wet pavement as measured

under controlled conditions on speci-

fied government test surfaces of as-

phalt and concrete. A tire marked C

may have poor traction performance.

Temperature A, B, C

The temperature grades are A (the

highest), B, and C, representing the

tire’s resistance to the generation of

heat and its ability to dissipate heat

when tested under controlled condi-

tions on a specified indoor laboratory

test wheel. Sustained high tempera-

ture can cause the material of the tire

to degenerate and reduce tire life, and

excessive temperature can lead to

sudden tire failure. The grade C corre-

sponds to a level of performance

which all passenger car tires must

meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle

Safety Standards No. 109. Grades B

and A represent higher levels of per-

formance on the laboratory test wheel

than the minimum required by law.

The traction grade assigned to

this tire is based on straight-

ahead braking traction tests,

and does not include accelera-

tion, cornering, hydroplaning, or

peak traction characteristics.

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

13-13

Reporting safety defects

(USA)

If you believe that your vehicle has

a defect which could cause a

crash or could cause injury or

death, you should immediately in-

form the National Highway Traffic

Safety Administration (NHTSA) in

addition to notifying Subaru of

America, Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar com-

plaints, it may open an investiga-

tion, and if it finds that a safety de-

fect exists in a group of vehicles, it

may order a recall and remedy

campaign. However, NHTSA can-

not become involved in individual

problems between you, your deal-

er, or Subaru of America, Inc. To

contact NHTSA, you may call the

Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at

1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-

9153); go to

http://www.safercar.gov; or write

to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400

Seventh Street, SW., Washington,

DC 20590. You can also obtain

other information about motor ve-

hicle safety from

http://www.safercar.gov.

The temperature grade for this

tire is established for a tire that

is properly inflated and not over-

loaded. Excessive speed, under-

inflation, or excessive loading,

either separately or in combina-

tion, can cause heat buildup and

possible tire failure.

Index

14-2

Index

ABS .................................................................................. 7-16

Warning light ....................................................... 3-13, 7-17

Accessory power outlets .................................................... 6-8

Active head restraint ........................................................... 1-6

Air cleaner element ........................................................ 11-15

Air filtration system ........................................................... 4-12

Alarm system .................................................................... 2-12

All-Wheel Drive warning light (AT vehicles) ..................... 3-15

Aluminum wheel ............................................................. 11-35

Aluminum wheel cleaning ................................................. 10-3

Antenna system ................................................................. 5-2

Anti-lock brake system warning light (ABS) ............ 3-13, 7-16

Arming the system ............................................................ 2-13

Armrest ...................................................................... 1-10, 6-4

Ashtray (Canada only, if equipped) ......................... 6-11, 10-5

Audio set ............................................................................ 5-3

Auto-dimming mirror/compass ......................................... 3-26

Automatic climate control system ....................................... 4-8

Automatic transmission .................................................... 7-10

Capacities .................................................................... 12-4

Fluid ........................................................................... 11-20

Selector lever ............................................................... 7-11

Shift lock release ......................................................... 7-14

Temperature warning (AT OIL TEMP) ......................... 3-12

Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor (A/ELR) ........... 1-12

Battery ............................................................................ 11-40

Jump starting ................................................................. 9-7

Replacing (remote keyless entry) .................................. 2-8

Brake

Booster ...................................................................... 11-27

Fluid ........................................................................... 11-25

Pad and lining ............................................................ 11-29

Parking ....................................................................... 11-30

Pedal .......................................................................... 11-27

System ......................................................................... 7-16

Warning light ................................................................ 3-13

Brake pedal .................................................................... 11-27

Free play .................................................................... 11-27

Reserve distance ....................................................... 11-27

Braking ............................................................................. 7-15

Braking tips ....................................................................... 7-15

Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings ..................... 11-29

Bulb

Chart ............................................................................ 12-9

Replacing ................................................................... 11-44

Capacities ......................................................................... 12-4

Cargo area cover (if equipped) ......................................... 6-13

Cargo area light .................................................................. 6-2

Cargo tie-down hooks ....................................................... 6-14

Center console ................................................................... 6-4

Charge warning light ......................................................... 3-12

CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator lamp 3-11

Child restraint systems ..................................................... 1-24

Installation with seatbelt ............................................... 1-27

Top tether anchorages ................................................. 1-34

Child safety ............................................................................ 5

Child safety locks .............................................................. 2-17

Index

14-3

Chime

Key ................................................................................ 3-5

Seatbelt ................................................................ 1-12, 3-9

Clock ................................................................................ 3-16

Clutch (MT)

Fluid ........................................................................... 11-26

Pedal ......................................................................... 11-28

Coat hook ......................................................................... 6-12

Coolant ........................................................................... 11-12

Cooling system ............................................................... 11-11

Corrosion protection ................................................ 8-10, 10-3

Cruise control ................................................................... 7-22

Cruise control indicator light ............................................. 3-15

Cup holders ........................................................................ 6-7

Dashboard storage compartment ....................................... 6-6

Daytime running light system ........................................... 3-18

Differential gear oil

Front (AT vehicles) .................................................... 11-21

Rear ........................................................................... 11-22

Dimensions ....................................................................... 12-2

Disarming the system ....................................................... 2-14

Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ........................... 7-16

Dome light .......................................................................... 6-2

Door locks .......................................................................... 2-4

Door open warning light ................................................... 3-14

Drive belt ........................................................................ 11-18

Driving

Car phone/cell phone ....................................................... 7

Drinking ............................................................................ 6

Drugs ................................................................................ 6

Foreign countries ........................................................... 8-4

Pets ................................................................................... 7

Snowy and icy roads ...................................................... 8-9

Tired or sleepy .................................................................. 7

Driving tips ................................................................. 7-10, 8-5

Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system ........... 7-18

Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) ................................ 1-11

Engine

Compartment overview ................................................ 11-6

Coolant ....................................................................... 11-12

Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) ................................... 8-2

Hood ............................................................................ 11-4

Oil ................................................................................. 11-8

Overheating ................................................................. 9-10

Starting ........................................................................... 7-7

Stopping ......................................................................... 7-8

Exterior care ..................................................................... 10-2

Flat tires .............................................................................. 9-3

Floor mat ........................................................................... 6-12

Fluid level

Automatic transmission .............................................. 11-20

Brake .......................................................................... 11-25

Clutch (MT vehicles) .................................................. 11-26

Power steering ........................................................... 11-23

Front differential gear oil (AT vehicles) ........................... 11-21

Front fog light button ......................................................... 3-20

Front seatbelt pretensioners ............................................. 1-21

14-4

Index

Front seats ......................................................................... 1-2

Fore and aft adjustment .......................................... 1-3, 1-4

Reclining ................................................................. 1-3, 1-5

Fuel .................................................................................... 7-2

Economy hints ............................................................... 8-2

Filler lid and cap ............................................................ 7-3

Requirements ................................................................ 7-2

Fuses ............................................................................. 11-41

Fuses and circuits ............................................................ 12-6

GAWR .............................................................................. 8-12

Glove box ........................................................................... 6-4

Gross Axle Weight Rating ................................................ 8-12

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ........................................... 8-12

GVWR .............................................................................. 8-12

Hazard warning flasher ...................................................... 3-6

Head restraint adjustment .................................................. 1-6

Headlight

Beam leveler ................................................................ 3-20

Flasher ........................................................................ 3-18

Headlights ........................................................................ 3-17

Heater operation ................................................................ 4-5

High beam indicator light .................................................. 3-15

Hill holder .............................................................. 7-21, 11-28

Horn ................................................................................. 3-29

Ignition switch ..................................................................... 3-3

Illuminated entry ................................................................. 2-8

Illumination brightness control .......................................... 3-19

Immobilizer indicator light ................................................... 2-3

Indicator light ...................................................................... 3-9

Inside mirror ...................................................................... 3-25

Interior lights ....................................................................... 6-2

Jack and jack handle ........................................................ 9-14

Jump starting ...................................................................... 9-7

Key

Number .......................................................................... 2-2

Reminder chime ............................................................. 3-5

Key interlock release (AT vehicles) .................................... 3-5

Keys .................................................................................... 2-2

Leather seat materials ...................................................... 10-5

Light control switch ........................................................... 3-17

Limited slip differential (LSD) ............................................ 7-15

Loading your vehicle ......................................................... 8-11

Low fuel warning light ....................................................... 3-14

Lower and tether anchorages ........................................... 1-32

LSD (Limited slip differential) ............................................ 7-15

Lumbar support (Drivers seat only) .................................... 1-5

Index

14-5

Main fuse ........................................................................ 11-42

Maintenance

Precautions .................................................................. 11-3

Schedule ...................................................................... 11-3

Seatbelt ....................................................................... 1-19

Tools ............................................................................ 9-14

Malfunction indicator lamp ................................................ 3-11

Manual

Climate control system .................................................. 4-3

Seat ............................................................................... 1-3

Transmission ................................................................. 7-9

Transmission oil ......................................................... 11-18

Map lights ........................................................................... 6-3

Maximum load limits ......................................................... 8-18

Meters and gauges ............................................................. 3-6

Mirrors .............................................................................. 3-25

Moonroof ................................................................. 2-21, 9-13

New vehicle break-in driving ............................................... 8-2

Odometer/Trip meter .......................................................... 3-6

Off road driving ................................................................... 8-6

Oil filter ............................................................................. 11-8

Oil level

Engine ......................................................................... 11-8

Manual transmission .................................................. 11-18

Rear differential ......................................................... 11-22

Oil pressure warning light ................................................. 3-12

Outside mirrors ................................................................. 3-27

Outside temperature indicator ............................................ 3-8

Overhead console ............................................................... 6-6

Parking brake ......................................................... 7-20, 11-30

Stroke ......................................................................... 11-30

Parking light switch ........................................................... 3-20

Parking your vehicle ......................................................... 7-19

Periodic inspections ............................................................ 8-4

Pocket ................................................................................. 6-7

Power

Door locking switches .................................................... 2-6

Seat ................................................................................ 1-4

Steering ........................................................................ 7-15

Steering fluid level ...................................................... 11-23

Windows ...................................................................... 2-18

Rear

Combination lights ..................................................... 11-47

Differential gear oil level ............................................. 11-22

Gate .................................................................... 2-20, 9-13

Seats .............................................................................. 1-7

Viscous limited slip differential (LSD) ........................... 7-15

Rear window

Defogger button ........................................................... 3-24

Wiper and washer switch ............................................. 3-23

Wiper blade ................................................................ 11-38

Remote keyless entry system ............................................. 2-6

14-6

Index

Replacing

Air cleaner element .................................................... 11-15

Battery (remote keyless entry) ....................................... 2-8

Bulbs ......................................................................... 11-44

Transmitters ................................................................... 2-9

Rocking the vehicle .......................................................... 8-11

Roof rail and crossbar ...................................................... 8-13

Safety

Precautions when driving .................................................. 4

Symbol .............................................................................. 2

Warnings ........................................................................... 2

Seat height adjustment (drivers seat) ................................. 1-4

Seatbelt .................................................................................. 4

Extender ...................................................................... 1-20

Maintenance ................................................................ 1-19

Pretensioners .............................................................. 1-21

Safety tips .................................................................... 1-10

Warning light and chime ....................................... 1-12, 3-9

Seatbelts .......................................................................... 1-10

Seats

Fabric .......................................................................... 10-4

Heater ............................................................................ 1-7

Selector lever (AT vehicles) ............................................. 7-11

Self-leveling rear suspension ........................................... 7-25

Shift lock release .............................................................. 7-14

Shift position indicator ...................................................... 3-15

Shopping bag hook .......................................................... 6-14

Snow tires ........................................................................ 8-10

Snowy and icy roads .......................................................... 8-9

Spark plugs .................................................................... 11-17

Specifications ................................................................... 12-2

Speedometer ...................................................................... 3-6

SRS

Airbag system warning light ......................................... 3-10

Frontal airbag ............................................................... 1-40

Side airbag ................................................................... 1-52

SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) ... 4, 1-36

Steering wheel

Power ........................................................................... 7-15

Tilt wheel ...................................................................... 3-28

Storage compartments ....................................................... 6-4

Sun visors ........................................................................... 6-3

Supplemental Restraint System airbag ............................ 1-36

Synthetic leather upholstery ............................................. 10-5

Tachometer ........................................................................ 3-7

Temperature gauge ............................................................ 3-8

Temperature warning (AT OIL TEMP) .............................. 3-12

Tie-down hooks ................................................................ 9-11

Tilt steering wheel ............................................................. 3-28

Tire

Chains .......................................................................... 8-10

Inspection .................................................................. 11-30

Pressures and wear ................................................... 11-31

Replacement .............................................................. 11-34

Rotation ..................................................................... 11-34

Types ......................................................................... 11-30

Top tether anchorages ..................................................... 1-34

Towing .............................................................................. 9-10

All wheels on the ground ............................................. 9-12

Flat-bed truck ............................................................... 9-12

Index

14-7

Trailer

Connecting .................................................................. 8-16

Hitch ................................................................... 8-16, 8-21

Towing ......................................................................... 8-18

Towing tips .................................................................. 8-23

Turn signal indicator lights ................................................ 3-15

Turn signal lever ............................................................... 3-19

Under-floor storage compartment ..................................... 6-15

Valet mode ....................................................................... 2-15

Vanity mirror ....................................................................... 6-3

Vehicle

Capacity weight ........................................................... 8-12

Identification .............................................................. 12-10

Symbols ............................................................................ 3

Ventilator ............................................................................ 4-2

Warning and indicator lights ............................................... 3-9

Warning lights

ABS ............................................................................. 3-13

All-Wheel Drive ............................................................ 3-15

Anti-lock Brake system ................................................ 3-13

AT OIL TEMPerature ................................................... 3-12

Brake system ............................................................... 3-13

Charge ......................................................................... 3-12

CHECK ENGINE ......................................................... 3-11

Door open .................................................................... 3-14

Low fuel ........................................................................ 3-14

Oil pressure .................................................................. 3-12

Seatbelt ................................................................. 1-12, 3-9

SRS airbag system ...................................................... 3-10

Warranties and maintenance ............................................ 8-18

Washing ............................................................................ 10-2

Waxing and polishing ........................................................ 10-3

Wear indicators ............................................................... 11-33

Wheel

Alignment ..................................................................... 12-5

Aluminum ................................................................... 11-35

Balance ...................................................................... 11-32

Replacement .............................................................. 11-35

Windows ........................................................................... 2-18

Windshield

Washer fluid ............................................................... 11-35

Wiper and washer switches ......................................... 3-22

Wiper deicer ................................................................. 3-24

Windshield wiper blades

Replacement .............................................................. 11-37

Winter driving ...................................................................... 8-7

Wiper and washer ............................................................. 3-21

000134

GAS STATION REFERENCE

Fuel:

TNon-turbo models

Use only unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI or

higher.

TTurbo models

Use premium unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 AKI or

higher. If premium unleaded gasoline is not available, regular un-

leaded gasoline with octane rating of 87 AKI or higher may be tem-

porarily used. For optimum engine performance and driveability, it

is required that you use premium grade unleaded gasoline.

Fuel octane rating

This octane rating is the average of the Research Octane and Mo-

tor numbers and is commonly referred to as the Anti Knock Index

(AKI). Refer to “Fuel” section in this manual.

Fuel capacity:

15.9 US gal (60 liters, 13.2 Imp gal)

Engine oil:

Use only API classification SM with the words “ENERGY CON-

SERVING” and the ILSAC certification mark (starburst mark) dis-

played on the container (ILSAC GF-4).

Engine oil capacity:

4.2 US qt (4.0 liters, 3.5 Imp qt)

Cold tire pressure:

For the Canada specification non-turbo models, there is a conventional tire installed under the floor of the cargo area.

Tire size P215/60R16 94H P215/55R17 93H

Wheel size 16 u 61/2 JJ or 16 u 61/2 J 17 u 7 JJ

Pressure Front Light load 29 psi (200 kPa, 2.0 kgf/cm2)32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2)

Full load 29 psi (200 kPa, 2.0 kgf/cm2)32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2)

Rear Light load 28 psi (190 kPa, 1.9 kgf/cm2)30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2)

Full load 36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm2)32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2)

Trailer towing 41 psi (280 kPa, 2.8 kgf/cm2)36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm2)

Temporary spare tire Size T135/80D16

Pressure 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)

Subaru 2007 Forester 2 5X Owners Manual

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation